Nikon D850 User's Manual
No reproduction in any form of this manual, in whole or in part (except
for brief quotation in critical articles or reviews), may be made without
written authorization from NIKON CORPORATION.
DIGITAL CAMERA
User's Manual
Printed in Thailand
En
6MB40211-04
• Read this manual thoroughly before using the camera.
• To ensure proper use of the camera, be sure to read
“For Your Safety” (page x).
• After reading this manual, keep it in a readily accessible
place for future reference.
En
To get the most from your camera, please be sure to read all
instructions thoroughly and keep them where they will be read
by all who use the product.
Symbols and Conventions
To make it easier to find the information you need, the following
symbols and conventions are used:
D
This icon marks cautions; information that should be read
before use to prevent damage to the camera.
A
This icon marks notes; information that should be read before
using the camera.
0
This icon marks references to other sections in this manual.
Menu items, options, and messages displayed in the camera monitor are
shown in bold.
Throughout this manual, smartphones and tablets are referred to as
“smart devices”.
Camera Settings
The explanations in this manual assume that default settings are used.
A For Your Safety
Before using the camera for the first time, read the safety instructions
in “For Your Safety” (0 x).
Nikon User Support for India and Australia
Contact a Nikon representative for technical assistance with the
operation of your Nikon product or products. For information on the
Nikon representatives in your area, visit
http://www.nikon-asia.com/support.
D850 Model Name: N1608
Camera Manuals
The following manuals are available for the D850.
The D850 User’s Manual (This
Manual)
Master basic camera operations as well as features
specific to this camera.
The Menu Guide (PDF)
For more information on menu options and subjects
such as how to connect the camera to a computer,
printer, or television, download the camera Menu
Guide (pdf ) from the Nikon Download Center.
nikon download center D850
https://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/en/products/359/D850.html
Online Manuals (HTML)
The content of the User’s Manual and Menu Guide
can be viewed at the following web address:
nikon online manual D850
https://onlinemanual.nikonimglib.com/d850/en/
i
Package Contents
Be sure all items listed here were included with your camera.
BF-1B body cap (0 19)
D850 digital camera
(0 1)
EN-EL15a rechargeable Li-ion battery with terminal cover (0 14, 16)
MH-25a battery charger (comes with either an AC wall adapter or power
cable of a type and shape that varies with the country or region of sale;
0 14)
HDMI/USB cable clip (0 298)
SnapBridge Connection Guide
UC-E22 USB cable
(for D-SLR Cameras)
AN-DC18 strap (0 14)
Warranty
User’s Manual (this guide)
Purchasers of the lens kit option should confirm that the
package also includes a lens. Memory cards are sold separately.
Cameras purchased in Japan display menus and messages in
English and Japanese only; other languages are not supported.
We apologize for any inconvenience this may cause.
A ViewNX-i and Capture NX-D Computer Software
Use ViewNX-i to fine-tune photos or to copy pictures to a computer for
viewing, or Capture NX-D to fine-tune pictures that have been copied
to a computer and to convert NEF (RAW) images to other formats.
These applications are available for download from:
http://downloadcenter.nikonimglib.com/
You can also visit this website for the latest information on Nikon
software, including system requirements.
ii
Table of Contents
Package Contents ......................................................................... ii
For Your Safety .............................................................................. x
Notices.......................................................................................... xiv
Introduction
1
Getting to Know the Camera ...................................................... 1
Camera Body ............................................................................................1
The Control Panel ...................................................................................5
The Viewfinder Display.........................................................................7
The Diopter Adjustment Control ......................................................9
Using the Tilting Monitor.................................................................. 10
Using the Touch Screen .................................................................... 12
First Steps
14
Attach the Camera Strap................................................................... 14
Charge the Battery .............................................................................. 14
Insert the Battery and a Memory Card......................................... 16
Attach a Lens......................................................................................... 19
Basic Setup............................................................................................. 21
Tutorial
24
Camera Menus: An Overview....................................................24
Using Camera Menus ......................................................................... 25
Basic Photography and Playback............................................. 30
The Battery Level and Number of Exposures Remaining...... 30
“Point-and-Shoot” Photography.................................................... 32
Viewing Photographs ........................................................................ 35
iii
Live View Photography
37
Autofocus......................................................................................41
Choosing a Focus Mode ....................................................................41
Choosing an AF-Area Mode .............................................................42
Manual Focus ...............................................................................44
Using the i Button ......................................................................45
Split-Screen Display Zoom................................................................48
Silent Live View Photography..........................................................49
Negative Digitizer ................................................................................52
The Live View Display .................................................................54
The Information Display ....................................................................55
Touch Photography (Touch Shutter).......................................56
Movies
59
Recording Movies........................................................................59
Indices ......................................................................................................64
Using the i Button ..............................................................................65
Image Area: Choosing a Movie Crop.............................................68
Frame Size, Frame Rate, and Movie Quality ...............................69
The Live View Display .........................................................................71
The Information Display ....................................................................72
Taking Photos in Movie Mode.........................................................73
Viewing Movies............................................................................76
Editing Movies .............................................................................78
Trimming Movies .................................................................................78
Saving Selected Frames.....................................................................82
iv
Image Recording Options
83
Image Area ...................................................................................83
Image Quality............................................................................... 88
Image Size..................................................................................... 91
Using Two Memory Cards..........................................................93
Focus
94
Autofocus ..................................................................................... 94
Autofocus Mode................................................................................... 98
AF-Area Mode .....................................................................................100
Focus Point Selection.......................................................................105
Focus Lock............................................................................................108
Manual Focus .............................................................................111
Release Mode
113
Choosing a Release Mode........................................................113
Power Source and Frame Rate......................................................114
Self-Timer Mode (E) .................................................................116
Mirror up Mode (MUP) ................................................................118
ISO Sensitivity
119
Manual Adjustment ..................................................................119
Auto ISO Sensitivity Control ...................................................121
v
Exposure
124
Metering..................................................................................... 124
Exposure Mode ......................................................................... 126
P: Programmed Auto........................................................................ 128
S: Shutter-Priority Auto.................................................................... 129
A: Aperture-Priority Auto ................................................................ 130
M: Manual ............................................................................................. 131
Long Time-Exposures (M Mode Only) ................................... 133
Shutter-Speed and Aperture Lock ........................................ 136
Autoexposure (AE) Lock.......................................................... 137
Exposure Compensation......................................................... 139
Bracketing.................................................................................. 142
White Balance
156
White Balance Options ............................................................ 156
Fine-Tuning White Balance .................................................... 161
Choosing a Color Temperature.............................................. 163
Preset Manual ........................................................................... 165
Viewfinder Photography ................................................................ 166
Live View (Spot White Balance).................................................... 169
Managing Presets.............................................................................. 172
Image Enhancement
175
Picture Controls ........................................................................ 175
Selecting a Picture Control ............................................................ 175
Modifying Picture Controls............................................................ 177
Preserving Detail in Highlights and Shadows..................... 180
Active D-Lighting .............................................................................. 180
High Dynamic Range (HDR) .......................................................... 182
vi
Optional Flash Units
187
Using a Flash ..............................................................................187
On-Camera Flash Photography..............................................190
Flash Modes ...............................................................................192
Flash Compensation.................................................................194
FV Lock ........................................................................................196
Flash Info for Shoe-Mounted Units........................................198
Remote Flash Units ...................................................................202
Other Shooting Options
203
The R Button.............................................................................203
Using the Command Dials.......................................................207
The i button ..............................................................................208
Two-Button Reset: Restoring Default Settings....................209
Focus Shift Photography .........................................................212
Non-CPU Lenses ........................................................................218
Location Data.............................................................................221
More About Playback
223
Viewing Images .........................................................................223
Full-Frame Playback..........................................................................223
Thumbnail Playback .........................................................................223
Playback Controls ..............................................................................224
Using the Touch Screen ..................................................................226
The i Button........................................................................................228
Photo Information ....................................................................229
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom...................................238
Protecting Photographs from Deletion ................................240
vii
Rating Pictures .......................................................................... 241
Selecting Photos for Upload................................................... 243
Selecting Individual Photos........................................................... 243
Selecting Multiple Photos.............................................................. 244
Deleting Photographs ............................................................. 245
During Playback................................................................................. 245
The Playback Menu .......................................................................... 246
Menu List
248
A Camera Menus
More information on camera menus is available in a Menu Guide that
can be downloaded from the Nikon website (0 i).
D The Playback Menu: Managing Images.......................... 248
C The Photo Shooting Menu: Shooting Options .............. 250
1 The Movie Shooting Menu: Movie Shooting
Options.................................................................................. 256
A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings............ 260
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup......................................... 271
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies........... 278
O My Menu/m Recent Settings ............................................. 280
viii
Technical Notes
281
Compatible Lenses....................................................................281
The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS)...........................288
Other Accessories......................................................................295
Optional MB-D18 Battery Packs .............................................299
Parts of the MB-D18..........................................................................299
Using the Battery Pack.....................................................................302
Specifications ......................................................................................310
Caring for the Camera ..............................................................311
Storage ..................................................................................................311
Cleaning ................................................................................................311
Image Sensor Cleaning....................................................................312
Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions......................319
Troubleshooting........................................................................324
Battery/Display ...................................................................................324
Shooting ...............................................................................................325
Playback ................................................................................................328
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi (Wireless Networks) .................................329
Miscellaneous .....................................................................................329
Error Messages...........................................................................330
Specifications.............................................................................336
AF-S NIKKOR 24–120mm f/4G ED VR Lens User’s
Manual ...................................................................................351
Approved Memory Cards ........................................................360
Memory Card Capacity.............................................................362
Battery Life .................................................................................365
Index ............................................................................................367
ix
For Your Safety
To prevent damage to property or injury to yourself or to others, read “For
Your Safety” in its entirety before using this product.
Keep these safety instructions where all those who use this product will read
them.
DANGER: Failure to observe the precautions marked with this icon carries a
high risk of death or severe injury.
WARNING: Failure to observe the precautions marked with this icon could
result in death or severe injury.
CAUTION: Failure to observe the precautions marked with this icon could
result in injury or property damage.
WARNING
• Do not use while walking or operating a motor vehicle.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in accidents or other injury.
• Do not disassemble or modify this product. Do not touch internal parts
that become exposed as the result of a fall or other accident.
Failure to observe these precautions could result in electric shock or other
injury.
• Should you notice any abnormalities such as the product producing
smoke, heat, or unusual odors, immediately disconnect the battery or
power source.
Continued operation could result in fire, burns or other injury.
• Keep dry. Do not handle with wet hands. Do not handle the plug with
wet hands.
Failure to observe these precautions could result in fire or electric shock.
• Do not let your skin remain in prolonged contact with this product
while it is on or plugged in.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in low-temperature burns.
• Do not use this product in the presence of flammable dust or gas such
as propane, gasoline or aerosols.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in explosion or fire.
x
• Do not directly view the sun or other bright light source through the
lens or camera.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in visual impairment.
• Do not aim the flash or AF-assist illuminator at the operator of a motor
vehicle.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in accidents.
• Keep this product out of reach of children.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in injury or product
malfunction. In addition, note that small parts constitute a choking hazard.
Should a child swallow any part of this product, seek immediate medical
attention.
• Do not entangle, wrap or twist the straps around your neck.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in accidents.
• Do not use batteries, chargers, or AC adapters not specifically
designated for use with this product. When using batteries, chargers,
and AC adapters designated for use with this product, do not:
- Damage, modify, forcibly tug or bend the cords or cables, place them
under heavy objects, or expose them to heat or flame.
- Use travel converters or adapters designed to convert from one
voltage to another or with DC-to-AC inverters.
Failure to observe these precautions could result in fire or electric shock.
• Do not handle the plug when charging the product or using the AC
adapter during thunderstorms.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in electric shock.
• Do not handle with bare hands in locations exposed to extremely high
or low temperatures.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in burns, or frostbite.
CAUTION
• Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun or other strong light sources.
Light focused by the lens could cause fire or damage to product’s internal
parts. When shooting backlit subjects, keep the sun well out of the frame.
Sunlight focused into the camera when the sun is close to the frame could
cause fire.
xi
• Turn this product off when its use is prohibited. Disable wireless
features when the use of wireless equipment is prohibited.
The radio-frequency emissions produced by this product could interfere
with equipment onboard aircraft or in hospitals or other medical facilities.
• Remove the battery and disconnect the AC adapter if this product will
not be used for an extended period.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in fire or product
malfunction.
• Do not touch moving parts of the lens or other moving parts.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in injury.
• Do not fire the flash in contact with or in close proximity to the skin or
objects.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in burns or fire.
• Do not leave the product where it will be exposed to extremely high
temperatures, for an extended period such as in an enclosed
automobile or in direct sunlight.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in fire or product
malfunction.
DANGER (Batteries)
• Do not mishandle batteries.
Failure to observe the following precautions could result in the batteries
leaking, overheating, rupturing, or catching fire:
- Use only rechargeable batteries approved for use in this product.
- Do not expose batteries to flame or excessive heat.
- Do not disassemble.
- Do not short-circuit the terminals by touching them to necklaces,
hairpins, or other metal objects.
- Do not expose batteries or the products in which they are inserted to
powerful physical shocks.
• Do not attempt to recharge EN-EL15a rechargeable batteries using
chargers not specifically designated for this purpose.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in the batteries leaking,
overheating, rupturing, or catching fire.
• If battery liquid comes into contact with the eyes, rinse with plenty of
clean water and seek immediate medical attention.
Delaying action could result in eye injuries.
xii
WARNING (Batteries)
• Keep batteries out of reach of children.
Should a child swallow a battery, seek immediate medical attention.
• Do not immerse batteries in water or expose to rain.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in fire or product
malfunction. Immediately dry the product with a towel or similar object
should it become wet.
• Discontinue use immediately should you notice any changes in the
batteries, such as discoloration or deformation. Cease charging
EN-EL15a rechargeable batteries if they do not charge in the specified
period of time.
Failure to observe these precautions could result in the batteries leaking,
overheating, rupturing, or catching fire.
• Prior to disposal, insulate battery terminals with tape.
Overheating, rupture, or fire may result should metal objects come into
contact with the terminals. Recycle or dispose of batteries in accord with
local regulations.
• If battery liquid comes into contact with a person's skin or clothing,
immediately rinse the affected area with plenty of clean water.
Failure to observe this precaution could result in skin irritation.
xiii
Notices
• No part of the manuals included with • Nikon will not be held liable for any
this product may be reproduced,
damages resulting from the use of
transmitted, transcribed, stored in a
this product.
retrieval system, or translated into
• While every effort has been made to
any language in any form, by any
ensure that the information in these
means, without Nikon’s prior written manuals is accurate and complete,
permission.
we would appreciate it were you to
• Nikon reserves the right to change
bring any errors or omissions to the
the appearance and specifications
attention of the Nikon
of the hardware and software
representative in your area (address
described in these manuals at any
provided separately).
time and without prior notice.
Notice for Customers in Canada
CAN ICES-3 B / NMB-3 B
Notices for Customers in Europe
CAUTION: RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT
TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.
This symbol indicates
that electrical and
electronic equipment is
to be collected
separately.
The following apply only
to users in European countries:
• This product is designated for
separate collection at an
appropriate collection point. Do not
dispose of as household waste.
• Separate collection and recycling
helps conserve natural resources
and prevent negative consequences
for human health and the
environment that might result from
incorrect disposal.
• For more information, contact the
retailer or the local authorities in
charge of waste management.
xiv
This symbol on the
battery indicates that the
battery is to be collected
separately.
The following apply only
to users in European
countries:
• All batteries, whether marked with
this symbol or not, are designated
for separate collection at an
appropriate collection point. Do not
dispose of as household waste.
• For more information, contact the
retailer or the local authorities in
charge of waste management.
Notices for Customers in the U.S.A.
The Battery Charger
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS—SAVE THESE
INSTRUCTIONS
DANGER—TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS
For connection to a supply not in the U.S.A., use an attachment plug adapter
of the proper configuration for the power outlet if needed. This power unit is
intended to be correctly oriented in a vertical or floor mount position.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Radio Frequency Interference Statement
This equipment has been tested and
found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15
of the FCC rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference
in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses, and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if
not installed and used in accordance
with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does
cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment
off and on, the user is encouraged to try
to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving
antenna.
• Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an
outlet on a circuit different from that
to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced
radio/television technician for help.
CAUTIONS
Modifications
The FCC requires the user to be
notified that any changes or
modifications made to this device
that are not expressly approved by
Nikon Corporation may void the
user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
Interface Cables
Use the interface cables sold or
provided by Nikon for your
equipment. Using other interface
cables may exceed the limits of
Class B Part 15 of the FCC rules.
Nikon Inc., 1300 Walt Whitman Road,
Melville, New York 11747-3064, U.S.A.
Tel.: 631-547-4200
xv
Power Cable
At voltages over AC 125 V (U.S.A. only): The power cable must be rated for the
voltage in use, be at least AWG no. 18 gauge, and have SVG insulation or
better with a NEMA 6P-15 plug rated for AC 250 V 15 A.
Notice Concerning Prohibition of Copying or Reproduction
Note that simply being in possession of material that has been digitally
copied or reproduced by means of a scanner, digital camera, or other device
may be punishable by law.
• Items prohibited by law from being copied • Cautions on certain copies and
reproductions
or reproduced
The government has issued cautions
Do not copy or reproduce paper
money, coins, securities, government on copies or reproductions of
securities issued by private
bonds, or local government bonds,
companies (shares, bills, checks, gift
even if such copies or reproductions
certificates, etc.), commuter passes,
are stamped “Sample.”
or coupon tickets, except when a
The copying or reproduction of
minimum of necessary copies are to
paper money, coins, or securities
be provided for business use by a
which are circulated in a foreign
company. Also, do not copy or
country is prohibited.
reproduce passports issued by the
Unless the prior permission of the
government, licenses issued by
government has been obtained, the public agencies and private groups,
copying or reproduction of unused
ID cards, and tickets, such as passes
postage stamps or post cards issued and meal coupons.
by the government is prohibited.
• Comply with copyright notices
The copying or reproduction of
Under copyright law, photographs
stamps issued by the government
or recordings of copyrighted works
and of certified documents
made with the camera cannot be
stipulated by law is prohibited.
used without the permission of the
copyright holder. Exceptions apply
to personal use, but note that even
personal use may be restricted in
the case of photographs or
recordings of exhibits or live
performances.
xvi
Disposing of Data Storage Devices
Please note that deleting images or formatting memory cards or other data
storage devices does not completely erase the original image data. Deleted
files can sometimes be recovered from discarded storage devices using
commercially available software, potentially resulting in the malicious use of
personal image data. Ensuring the privacy of such data is the user’s
responsibility.
Before discarding a data storage device or transferring ownership to another
person, erase all data using commercial deletion software, or format the
device and then completely refill it with images containing no private
information (for example, pictures of empty sky). Care should be taken to
avoid injury when physically destroying data storage devices.
Before discarding the camera or transferring ownership to another person,
you should also use the Reset all settings option in the camera setup menu
to delete any personal network information.
xvii
AVC Patent Portfolio License
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL
AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH
THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED
BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS
OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS
GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE
OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE http://www.mpegla.com
Use Only Nikon Brand Electronic Accessories
Nikon cameras are designed to the highest standards and include complex
electronic circuitry. Only Nikon brand electronic accessories (including
chargers, batteries, AC adapters, and flash accessories) certified by Nikon
specifically for use with this Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven
to operate within the operational and safety requirements of this electronic
circuitry.
The use of non-Nikon electronic accessories could damage
the camera and may void your Nikon warranty. The use of
third-party rechargeable Li-ion batteries not bearing the
Nikon holographic seal shown at right could interfere with
normal operation of the camera or result in the batteries overheating,
igniting, rupturing, or leaking.
For more information about Nikon brand accessories, contact a local
authorized Nikon dealer.
D Use Only Nikon Brand Accessories
Only Nikon brand accessories certified by Nikon specifically for use
with your Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven to operate
within its operational and safety requirements. THE USE OF NON-NIKON
ACCESSORIES COULD DAMAGE YOUR CAMERA AND MAY VOID YOUR NIKON
WARRANTY.
xviii
A Before Taking Important Pictures
Before taking pictures on important occasions (such as at weddings or
before taking the camera on a trip), take a test shot to ensure that the
camera is functioning normally. Nikon will not be held liable for
damages or lost profits that may result from product malfunction.
A Life-Long Learning
As part of Nikon’s “Life-Long Learning” commitment to ongoing
product support and education, continually-updated information is
available on-line at the following sites:
• For users in the U.S.A.: http://www.nikonusa.com/
• For users in Europe and Africa: http://www.europe-nikon.com/support/
• For users in Asia, Oceania, and the Middle East: http://www.nikon-asia.com/
Visit these sites to keep up-to-date with the latest product information,
tips, answers to frequently-asked questions (FAQs), and general advice
on digital imaging and photography. Additional information may be
available from the Nikon representative in your area. See the following
URL for contact information: http://imaging.nikon.com/
xix
❚❚ Bluetooth and Wi-Fi (Wireless LAN)
This product is controlled by the United States Export Administration
Regulations (EAR). The permission of the United States government is not
required for export to countries other than the following, which as of this
writing are subject to embargo or special controls: Cuba, Iran, North Korea,
Sudan, and Syria (list subject to change).
The use of wireless devices may be prohibited in some countries or regions.
Contact a Nikon-authorized service representative before using the wireless
features of this product outside the country of purchase.
Notice for Customers in the U.S.A. and Canada
This device complies with part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada’s licenceexempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
FCC WARNING
The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications
made to this device that are not expressly approved by Nikon Corporation
may void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
FCC Radio Frequency Interference Statement
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for
a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Co-location
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any
other antenna or transmitter.
Nikon Inc., 1300 Walt Whitman Road, Melville, New York 11747-3064, U.S.A.
Tel.: 631-547-4200
xx
FCC/IC RF Exposure Statement
The available scientific evidence does not show that any health problems are
associated with using low power wireless devices. There is no proof, however,
that these low power wireless devices are absolutely safe. Low power Wireless
devices emit low levels of radio frequency energy (RF) in the microwave range
while being used. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health effects (by
heating tissue), exposure of low-level RF that does not produce heating
effects causes no known adverse health effects. Many studies of low-level RF
exposures have not found any biological effects. Some studies have
suggested that some biological effects might occur, but such findings have
not been confirmed by additional research. This product has been tested and
found to comply with FCC/IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure
Guidelines and RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. Please
refer to the SAR test report that was uploaded to FCC website.
Notices for Customers in Europe
Hereby, Nikon Corporation declares that the radio equipment
type D850 is in compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU.
The full text of the EU declaration of conformity is available at the following
internet address: http://imaging.nikon.com/support/pdf/DoC_D850.pdf.
Notice for Customers in Singapore
Trade Name:
Model: D850
This device complies with radio-frequency regulations. The content of
certification labels not affixed to the device is given below.
Complies with
IMDA Standards
DA103423
Notice for Customers in Nigeria
Connection and use of this communications
equipment is permitted by the Nigerian
Communications Commission
xxi
Security
Although one of the benefits of this product is that it allows others to freely
connect for the wireless exchange of data anywhere within its range, the
following may occur if security is not enabled:
• Data theft: Malicious third-parties may intercept wireless transmissions to
steal user IDs, passwords, and other personal information.
• Unauthorized access: Unauthorized users may gain access to the network
and alter data or perform other malicious actions. Note that due to the
design of wireless networks, specialized attacks may allow unauthorized
access even when security is enabled.
• Unsecured networks: Connecting to open networks may result in
unauthorized access. Use secure networks only.
xxii
Introduction
Getting to Know the Camera
Take a few moments to familiarize yourself with camera controls
and displays. You may find it helpful to bookmark this section
and refer to it as you read through the rest of the manual.
Camera Body
9
8
1
10
11
2
12
3
13
4
4
5
14
6
7
17
15
16
1 T button ...........................88, 91
2 Release mode dial lock release
.......................................................113
3 Release mode dial ......................113
4 Eyelet for camera strap................ 14
5 U button ...................................156
6 I button..................................126
7 Y button......................................124
8 Stereo microphone....................... 65
9 Movie-record button ................... 59
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Power switch ................................. 21
Shutter-release button................ 32
E button.............................. 139, 209
S /Q button.................. 119, 271
Control panel....................................5
Diopter adjustment control ..........9
Focal plane mark (E) ............... 112
Accessory shoe
(for optional flash unit)... 187, 295
1
Camera Body (Continued)
1
3
4
14
5
15
16
2
13
12 11
10
6
17
7
18
8
19
9
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Self-timer lamp ........................... 116
Meter coupling lever
BKT button.................................... 142
Flash sync terminal cover ......... 188
Ten-pin remote terminal cover
Audio connector cover
USB connector cover
HDMI connector cover
AF-mode button ..... 41, 42, 98, 100
Focus-mode selector ....41, 94, 111
Lens release button.......................20
Lens mounting mark ....................19
Mirror.................................... 118, 315
Flash sync terminal .................... 188
Ten-pin remote terminal .......... 295
Headphone connector.......... 67, 72
Connector for external
microphone................................ 295
18 USB connector ............................ 295
19 HDMI connector ......................... 295
20 Body cap.................................19, 295
12
13
14
15
16
17
D Close the Connector Cover
Close the connector cover when the connectors are not in use. Foreign
matter in the connectors can interfere with data transfer.
2
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
10
9
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
Sub-command dial
7
Pv button ............. 44, 127, 268, 270 8
Fn1 button ...........................268, 270
Battery-chamber cover latch ..... 16 9
Battery-chamber cover .........16, 18 10
Lens mount ........................... 19, 112
CPU contacts
Contact cover for optional MB-D18
multi-power battery pack ....... 299
Tripod socket
Power connector cover
D The Speaker
Do not place the speaker in close proximity to magnetic devices.
Failure to observe this precaution could affect the data recorded on
the magnetic devices.
3
Camera Body (Continued)
1
2
3
4
12
13
17
18
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
4
14
15
16
19
20
21
24
Viewfinder ............................7, 9, 116
Eyepiece shutter lever ............... 116
O /Q button................36, 245, 271
K button ...............................35, 223
G button............................24, 248
L/Z/Q button........25, 175, 240
X button .................................40, 238
W/M button..... 192, 194, 223, 238
J button ................................25, 224
Fn2 button .................. 242, 268, 270
Tilting monitor...10, 12, 37, 59, 223
Viewfinder eyepiece ..............9, 116
Speaker ....................................... 3, 76
23
22
14 Sub-selector
................... 106, 108, 137, 268, 270
15 AF-ON button........99, 109, 261, 268
16 Main command dial
17 Multi selector......... 25, 34, 268, 269
18 Focus selector lock..................... 105
19 Memory card slot cover ........ 16, 18
20 R button ............... 55, 72, 198, 203
21 Live view selector................... 37, 59
22 a button ............... 37, 59, 169, 270
23 i button ................. 45, 65, 208, 228
24 Memory card access lamp...........32
The Control Panel
The control panel shows a variety of camera settings when the
camera is on. The items shown here appear the first time the
camera is turned on; information on other settings can be found
in the relevant sections of this manual.
1 2
3
4
5
15
14
6
7
13
12
11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10 9
Exposure mode ...........................126
Photo shooting menu bank .....250
Shutter speed .....................129, 131
Battery indicator ........................... 30
Aperture (f-number) ..........130, 131
XQD card icon ..........................16, 93
SD card icon .............................16, 93
Number of exposures
remaining ............................. 31, 362
8
AF-area mode .............................. 100
Autofocus mode ........................... 98
White balance.............................. 156
Image size (JPEG and TIFF
images) .......................................... 91
13 Image quality ................................ 88
14 B (“clock not set”) indicator
15 Metering ....................................... 124
9
10
11
12
A The B (“clock not set”) Indicator
The camera clock is powered by an independent, rechargeable power
source, which is charged as necessary when the main battery is
installed or the camera is powered by an optional power connector
and AC adapter (0 295). Two days of charging will power the clock for
about three months. If the B icon flashes in the control panel, the
clock has been reset and the date and time recorded with any new
photographs will not be correct. Set the clock to the correct time and
date using the Time zone and date > Date and time option in the
setup menu (0 271).
5
A LCD Illuminators
Rotating the power switch
Power switch
toward D activates the
backlights for the buttons and
control panel, making it easier
to use the camera in the dark.
After the power switch is
released, the backlights will
remain lit for a few seconds
while the standby timer is active
or until the shutter is released or the power switch is rotated toward D
again.
D The Control Panel and Viewfinder Displays
The brightness of the control panel and viewfinder displays varies with
temperature, and the response times of the displays may drop at low
temperatures. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction.
6
The Viewfinder Display
2
3
4
5
6
1
7 8 9 10 11 12 13
21 22
1, 2
23
14 15 16 17 18
24
1 Roll indicator
2 AF area brackets...............................9
3 Framing grid (displayed when On
is selected for Custom Setting d9,
Viewfinder grid display) ...265
4 Focus points ................. 94, 105, 261
5 Pitch indicator 1, 3
6 Flicker detection .........................254
7 Focus indicator ............ 32, 108, 112
25 26
19 20
27
Metering ....................................... 124
Autoexposure (AE) lock............. 137
Shutter speed lock icon ... 136, 268
Shutter speed ..................... 129, 131
Autofocus mode ........................... 98
12 Aperture lock icon............. 136, 268
13 Aperture (f-number) ......... 130, 131
Aperture (number of stops) ..... 130
8
9
10
11
7
14 Exposure mode ........................... 126
15 Flash compensation
indicator ..................................... 194
16 Exposure compensation
indicator ...................................... 139
17 ISO sensitivity indicator ............ 119
Auto ISO sensitivity
indicator ...................................... 121
18 ISO sensitivity .............................. 119
Preset white balance recording
indicator ...................................... 165
Active D-Lighting amount ....... 180
AF-area mode .............................. 100
19 “k” (appears when memory
remains for over 1000
exposures)......................................31
20 Flash-ready indicator 4
....................................................... 187
21 FV lock indicator ......................... 196
22 Flash sync indicator ................... 266
23 Aperture stop indicator ............ 130
24 Exposure indicator ..................... 132
Exposure compensation
display.......................................... 139
25 Low battery warning ....................30
26 Exposure/flash bracketing
indicator ...................................... 143
WB bracketing indicator........... 148
ADL bracketing indicator ......... 152
27 Number of exposures
remaining..............................31, 362
Number of shots remaining
before memory buffer fills
.............................................. 115, 362
Exposure compensation value
....................................................... 139
Flash compensation value ....... 194
PC mode indicator
1 Can be displayed by pressing a button to which Viewfinder virtual horizon has been
assigned using Custom Setting f1 (Custom control assignment, 0 268).
2 Functions as a pitch indicator when camera is rotated to take pictures in “tall” (portrait)
orientation.
3 Functions as a roll indicator when camera is rotated to take pictures in “tall” (portrait)
orientation.
4 Displayed when an optional flash unit is attached (0 187). The flash-ready indicator lights
when the flash is charged.
Note: Display shown with all indicators lit for illustrative purposes.
D No Battery
When the battery is totally exhausted or no battery is inserted, the
display in the viewfinder will dim. This is normal and does not indicate
a malfunction. The viewfinder display will return to normal when a
fully-charged battery is inserted.
8
The Diopter Adjustment Control
Lift the diopter adjustment control and
rotate it until the viewfinder display,
focus points, and AF area brackets are in
sharp focus. When operating the control
with your eye to the viewfinder, be
careful not to put your fingers or
fingernails in your eye. Push the diopter
adjustment control back in once you have adjusted focus to your
satisfaction.
Focus point
AF area brackets
Viewfinder not in focus
Viewfinder in focus
A Diopter-Adjustment Viewfinder Lenses
Corrective lenses (available separately;
0 295) can be used to further adjust
viewfinder diopter. Before attaching a
diopter-adjustment viewfinder lens, remove
the DK-17F viewfinder eyepiece by closing
the viewfinder shutter to release the
eyepiece lock (q) and then grasping the
eyepiece lightly between your finger and thumb and unscrewing it as
shown (w).
9
Using the Tilting Monitor
The monitor can be angled and rotated as shown below.
Normal use: The monitor is
normally used in storage
position.
Low-angle shots: Tilt the monitor
up to take shots in live view with
the camera held low.
High-angle shots: Tilt the monitor
down to take shots in live view
with the camera held high.
10
D Using the Monitor
Rotate the monitor gently, stopping when you feel resistance. Do not
use force. Failure to observe these precautions could damage the
camera or monitor. If the camera is mounted on a tripod, care should
be taken to ensure that the monitor does not contact the tripod.
Do not lift or carry the camera by the monitor. Failure to observe this
precaution could damage the camera. If the monitor is not being used
to take photographs, return it to the storage position.
Do not touch the area to the rear of the
monitor or allow liquid to contact the inner
surface. Failure to observe these precautions
could cause product malfunction.
Be particularly careful
not to touch this area.
11
Using the Touch Screen
The touch-sensitive monitor supports the following operations:
Flick
Flick a finger a short distance left or right
across the monitor.
Slide
Slide a finger over the monitor.
Stretch/Pinch
Place two fingers on the monitor and
move them apart or pinch them
together.
12
❚❚ Using the Touch Screen
During playback (0 226), the touch screen can be used to:
• View other images
• Zoom in or out
• View thumbnails
• View movies
During live view, the touch screen can be used to take pictures
(touch shutter; 0 56) or to measure a value for spot white
balance (0 169). The touch screen can also be used for typing
(0 273) or navigating the menus (0 29).
D The Touch Screen
The touch screen responds to static electricity and may not respond
when covered with third-party protective films or when touched with
fingernails or gloved hands. Do not use excessive force or touch the
screen with sharp objects.
D Using the Touch Screen
The touch screen may not respond as expected if you attempt to
operate it while leaving your palm or another finger resting on it in
second location. It may not recognize other gestures if your touch is
too soft, your fingers are moved too quickly or too short a distance or
do not remain in contact with the screen, or if the movement of the
two fingers in a pinch or stretch is not correctly coordinated.
A Enabling or Disabling Touch Controls
Touch controls can be enabled or disabled using the Touch controls
option in the setup menu (0 274).
A See Also
For information on choosing the direction you flick your finger to view
other images in full-frame playback, see B > Touch controls (0 274).
13
First Steps
Attach the Camera Strap
Attach the strap securely to the camera eyelets.
Charge the Battery
Insert the battery and plug the charger in (depending on the
country or region, the charger comes with either an AC wall
adapter or a power cable). An exhausted battery will fully charge
in about two hours and 35 minutes.
• AC wall adapter: Insert the AC wall adapter into the charger AC
inlet (q). Slide the AC wall adapter latch as shown (w) and
rotate the adapter 90° to fix it in place (e). Insert the battery
and plug the charger in.
AC wall adapter latch
90°
14
• Power cable: After connecting the power cable with the plug in
the orientation shown, insert the battery and plug the cable in.
The CHARGE lamp will flash while the battery charges.
Battery charging
Charging complete
D The Battery and Charger
Read and follow the warnings and cautions in “For Your Safety” (0 x) and
“Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions” (0 319).
15
Insert the Battery and a Memory Card
Before inserting or removing the battery or memory cards,
confirm that power switch is in the OFF position. Insert the
battery in the orientation shown, using the battery to keep the
orange battery latch pressed to one side. The latch locks the
battery in place when the battery is fully inserted.
Battery latch
Holding the memory card in the orientation shown, slide it
straight into the appropriate slot until it clicks into place.
• XQD memory cards:
• SD memory cards:
16
D Memory Cards
• Memory cards may be hot after use. Observe due caution when
removing memory cards from the camera.
• Turn the power off before inserting or removing memory cards. Do
not remove memory cards from the camera, turn the camera off, or
remove or disconnect the power source during formatting or while
data are being recorded, deleted, or copied to a computer. Failure to
observe these precautions could result in loss of data or in damage to
the camera or card.
• Do not touch the card terminals with your fingers or metal objects.
• Do not bend, drop, or subject to strong physical shocks.
• Do not apply force to the card casing. Failure to observe this
precaution could damage the card.
• Do not expose to water, high levels of humidity, or direct sunlight.
• Do not format memory cards in a computer.
A The Write Protect Switch
SD memory cards are equipped
with a write protect switch to
prevent accidental loss of data.
When this switch is in the “lock”
Write-protect switch
position, the memory card cannot
be formatted and photos cannot
be deleted or recorded (a warning will be displayed in the monitor if
you attempt to release the shutter). To unlock the memory card, slide
the switch to the “write” position.
A No Memory Card
If no memory card is inserted, the control
panel and viewfinder will show S. If the
camera is turned off with a charged
battery and no memory card inserted,
S will be displayed in the control panel.
17
❚❚ Removing the Battery and Memory Cards
Removing the Battery
Turn the camera off and open the
battery-chamber cover. Press the battery
latch in the direction shown by the arrow
to release the battery and then remove
the battery by hand.
Removing Memory Cards
After confirming that the memory card access lamp is off, turn
the camera off, open the memory card slot cover, and remove
the card as described below.
• XQD memory cards: Press the eject button
to partially eject the card (q). The card
can then be removed by hand (w).
XQD memory cards
• SD memory cards: Press the card in and
then release it (q). The card can then
be removed by hand (w).
SD memory cards
18
Attach a Lens
Be careful to prevent dust from entering the camera when the
lens or body cap is removed. The lens generally used in this
manual for illustrative purposes is an AF-S NIKKOR 50mm f/1.4G.
Remove the
camera body cap
Remove the rear lens cap
Mounting mark (camera)
Align the mounting
marks
Mounting mark (lens)
Rotate the lens as shown until it clicks into place
Be sure to remove the lens cap before taking pictures.
19
A Detaching the Lens
Be sure the camera is off when removing or
exchanging lenses. To remove the lens, press
and hold the lens release button (q) while
turning the lens clockwise (w). After
removing the lens, replace the lens caps and
camera body cap.
D CPU Lenses with Aperture Rings
In the case of CPU lenses equipped with an aperture ring (0 284), lock
aperture at the minimum setting (highest f-number).
20
Basic Setup
The language option in the setup menu is automatically
highlighted the first time menus are displayed. Choose a
language and set the camera clock.
1 Turn the camera on.
Power switch
2 Select Language in the setup menu.
Press the G button to display the
camera menus, then highlight
Language in the setup menu and
press 2. For information on using
menus, see “Using Camera Menus”
(0 25).
G button
A Connecting to Smart Devices with SnapBridge
Instal the SnapBridge app to your smart device to
download pictures from the camera or control the camera
remotely. For more information, see the supplied
SnapBridge Connection Guide (for D-SLR Cameras).
21
3 Select a language.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight the desired
language and press J.
4 Select Time zone and date.
Select Time zone and date and press
2.
5 Set time zone.
Select Time zone and press 2. Press
4 or 2 to highlight the local time
zone (the UTC field shows the
difference between the selected time
zone and Coordinated Universal Time,
or UTC, in hours) and press J.
22
6 Turn daylight saving time on or off.
Select Daylight saving time and
press 2. Daylight saving time is off by
default; if daylight saving time is in
effect in the local time zone, press 1
to highlight On and press J.
7 Set the date and time.
Select Date and time and press 2.
Press 4 or 2 to select an item, 1 or 3
to change. Press J when the clock is
set to the current date and time (note
that the camera uses a 24-hour clock).
8 Set date format.
Select Date format and press 2. Press
1 or 3 to choose the order in which
the year, month, and day will be
displayed and press J.
9 Exit to shooting mode.
Press the shutter-release button
halfway to exit to shooting mode.
23
Tutorial
Camera Menus: An Overview
Most shooting, playback, and setup
options can be accessed from the camera
menus. To view the menus, press the G
button.
G button
Tabs
Choose from the following menus:
• D: Playback (0 248)
• B: Setup (0 271)
• C: Photo Shooting (0 250)
• N: Retouch (0 278)
• 1: Movie Shooting (0 256)
• O/m: MY MENU or RECENT SETTINGS
• A: Custom Settings (0 260)
(defaults to MY MENU; 0 280)
Slider shows position in current
menu.
Current settings are shown by icons.
Menu options
Options in current menu.
Help icon (0 25)
24
Using Camera Menus
❚❚ Menu Controls
You can navigate the menus via the touch screen or using the
multi selector and J button.
Multi selector
Move cursor up
Select highlighted
item
Cancel and return
to previous menu
Select highlighted
item or display submenu
Move cursor down
J button
Select highlighted
item
A The d (Help) Icon
If a d icon is displayed at the bottom left corner of the monitor, a
description of the currently selected option or menu can be displayed
by pressing the L (Z/Q) button. Press 1 or 3 to scroll through the
display. Press L (Z/Q) again to return to the menus.
L (Z/Q) button
25
❚❚ Navigating the Menus
Follow the steps below to navigate the menus.
1 Display the menus.
Press the G button to display the
menus.
G button
2 Highlight the icon for the
current menu.
Press 4 to highlight the
icon for the current menu.
3 Select a menu.
Press 1 or 3 to select the desired menu.
4 Position the cursor in the
selected menu.
Press 2 to position the
cursor in the selected
menu.
26
5 Highlight a menu item.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight a
menu item.
6 Display options.
Press 2 to display options
for the selected menu item.
7 Highlight an option.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight
an option.
8 Select the highlighted item.
Press J to select the highlighted item.
To exit without making a selection,
press the G button.
J button
27
Note the following points:
• Menu items that are displayed in gray are not currently
available.
• While pressing 2 or the center of the multi selector generally
has the same effect as pressing J, there are some items for
which selection can only be made by pressing J.
• To exit the menus and return to shooting mode, press the
shutter-release button halfway.
28
❚❚ Using the Touch Screen
You can also navigate the menus using the following touch
screen operations.
Scroll
Slide up or down to scroll.
Choose a
menu
Tap a menu icon to choose a
menu.
Select
options/
adjust
settings
Tap menu items to display
options and tap icons or sliders
to change. To exit without
changing settings, tap Z.
29
Basic Photography and Playback
The Battery Level and Number of Exposures
Remaining
Before taking photographs, check the battery level and number
of exposures remaining as described below.
❚❚ Battery Level
The battery level is shown in the control
panel and viewfinder.
Control panel
Viewfinder
Icon
Control panel Viewfinder
Description
L
—
Battery fully charged.
K
—
J
—
Battery partially discharged.
I
—
Low battery. Charge battery or ready spare
H
d
battery.
H
d
Shutter release disabled. Charge or exchange
(flashes)
(flashes)
battery.
A Camera Off Display
If the camera is turned off with a battery and
memory card inserted, the memory card
icon and number of exposures remaining
will be displayed (some memory cards may
in rare cases only display this information
when the camera is on).
30
Control panel
❚❚ Number of Exposures Remaining
The camera has two memory card slots:
one for XQD cards and the other for SD
cards. When two cards are inserted, the
role played by each is determined by the
options selected for Primary slot
selection and Secondary slot function;
when Secondary slot function is set to
the default value of Overflow (0 93), the
card in the secondary slot will only be
used when the card in the primary slot is
full.
The control panel display shows what
cards are currently inserted (the example
here shows the display when cards are
inserted in both slots). If an error occurs
(for example, if the memory card is full or
the card in the SD slot is locked), the icon
for the affected card will flash (0 330).
The control panel and viewfinder show
the number of photographs that can be
taken at current settings (values over
1000 are rounded down to the nearest
hundred; e.g., values between 4000 and
4099 are shown as 4.0 k).
SD card slot
XQD card slot
Control panel
Number of exposures
remaining
Control panel
Viewfinder
31
“Point-and-Shoot” Photography
1 Ready the Camera.
When framing photographs in the
viewfinder, hold the handgrip in your
right hand and cradle the camera
body or lens with your left.
When framing photographs in
portrait (tall) orientation, hold the
camera as shown.
2 Frame the photograph.
At default settings, the camera will
focus on the subject in the center
focus point. Frame a photograph in
the viewfinder with the main subject
in the center focus point.
Focus point
32
3 Press the shutter-release
button halfway.
Press the shutter-release
button halfway to focus.
The in-focus indicator (I)
will appear in the
viewfinder when the focus
operation is complete.
Viewfinder display
I
F
H
F H
(flashes)
Focus indicator
Description
Subject in focus.
Focus point is between camera and subject.
Focus point is behind subject.
Camera unable to focus on subject in focus point
using autofocus (0 110).
4 Shoot.
Smoothly press the
shutter-release button the
rest of the way down to
take the photograph. The
memory card access lamp
Memory card access
will light and the
lamp
photograph will be
displayed in the monitor
for a few seconds. Do not eject the memory card or remove or
disconnect the power source until the lamp has gone out and
recording is complete.
33
A The Standby Timer (Viewfinder Photography)
The viewfinder and some control panel displays will turn
off if no operations are performed for about six seconds,
reducing the drain on the battery. Press the shutterrelease button halfway to reactivate the displays.
Exposure meters on
Exposure meters off
The length of time before the standby timer expires automatically can
be adjusted using Custom Setting c2 (Standby timer, 0 263).
A The Multi Selector
The multi selector can be used to select the
focus point while the exposure meters are
on (0 105).
Multi selector
34
Viewing Photographs
1 Press the K button.
A photograph will be displayed in the
monitor. The memory card
containing the picture currently
displayed is shown by an icon.
K button
2 View additional pictures.
Additional pictures can be displayed
by pressing 4 or 2 or flicking a finger
left or right over the display (0 226).
To end playback and return to shooting mode, press the
shutter-release button halfway.
A Image Review
When On is selected for Image review in the playback menu (0 249),
photographs are automatically displayed in the monitor after
shooting.
A See Also
For information on choosing a memory card for playback, see
“Playback Controls” (0 224).
35
❚❚ Deleting Unwanted Photographs
To delete the photograph currently displayed in the monitor,
press the O (Q) button. Note that photographs cannot be
recovered once deleted.
1 Display the photograph.
Display the photograph you wish to
delete as described in “Viewing
Photographs” (0 35). The location of
the current image is shown by an icon
at the bottom left corner of the
display.
2 Delete the photograph.
Press the O (Q) button. A
confirmation dialog will be displayed;
press the O (Q) button again to
delete the image and return to
playback. To exit without deleting the
O (Q) button
picture, press K.
A Delete
To delete multiple images or to select the memory card from which
images will be deleted, use the Delete option in the playback menu
(0 246).
36
Live View Photography
Follow the steps below to take photographs in live view.
1 Rotate the live view selector to
C (live view photography).
Live view selector
2 Press the a button.
The mirror will be raised and the view
through the lens will be displayed in
the camera monitor. The subject will
no longer be visible in the viewfinder.
a button
3 Position the focus point.
Position the focus point over your subject as described in
“Choosing an AF-Area Mode” (0 42).
37
4 Focus.
Press the shutter-release button
halfway to focus.
The focus point will flash green and
the shutter release will be disabled while the camera focuses.
If the camera is able to focus, the focus point will be displayed
in green; if the camera is unable to focus, the focus point will
flash red (note that pictures can be taken even when the
focus point flashes red; check focus in the monitor before
shooting). Exposure can be locked by pressing the center of
the sub-selector (0 137); focus locks while the shutterrelease button is pressed halfway.
D Using Autofocus in Live View
Use an AF-S or AF-P lens. The desired results may not be achieved
with other lenses or teleconverters. Note that in live view,
autofocus is slower and the monitor may brighten or darken while
the camera focuses. The focus point may sometimes be displayed
in green when the camera is unable to focus. The camera may be
unable to focus in the following situations:
• The subject contains lines parallel to the long edge of the frame
• The subject lacks contrast
• The subject in the focus point contains areas of sharply
contrasting brightness, or includes spot lighting or a neon sign or
other light source that changes in brightness
• Flicker or banding appears under fluorescent, mercury-vapor,
sodium-vapor, or similar lighting
• A cross (star) filter or other special filter is used
• The subject appears smaller than the focus point
• The subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns
(e.g., blinds or a row of windows in a skyscraper)
• The subject is moving
38
5 Take the picture.
Press the shutter-release button the
rest of the way down to shoot. The
monitor will turn off.
6 Exit live view.
Press the a button to exit live view.
A Exposure Preview
During live view, you can press J to preview
the effects of shutter speed, aperture, and
ISO sensitivity on exposure. Exposure can be
adjusted by ±5 EV (0 139), although only
values between –3 and +3 EV are reflected in
the preview display. Note that the preview
may not accurately reflect the final results
when flash lighting is used, Active D-Lighting (0 180), HDR (high
dynamic range; 0 182), or bracketing is in effect, A (auto) is selected for
the Picture Control Contrast parameter (0 178), or p is selected
for shutter speed. If the subject is very bright or very dark, the exposure
indicators will flash to warn that the preview may not accurately reflect
exposure. Exposure preview is not available when A or % is
selected for shutter speed.
39
A Live View Zoom Preview
Press the X button to magnify the view in the monitor up to a
maximum of about 16×. A navigation window will appear in a gray
frame at the bottom right corner of the display. Use the multi selector
to scroll to areas of the frame not visible in the monitor, or press W (M)
to zoom out.
X button
Navigation window
A See Also
For information on:
• Choosing how long the monitor remains on during live view, see
A > Custom Setting c4 (Monitor off delay, 0 264).
• Choosing the roles played by the movie-record button and command
dials and by the center of the multi selector, see A > Custom Settings
f1 (Custom control assignment) > Movie record button + y (0 268)
and f2 (Multi selector center button, 0 268).
• Preventing unintended operation of the a button, see A > Custom
Setting f8 (Live view button options, 0 270).
40
Autofocus
To take pictures using
autofocus, rotate the focusmode selector to AF.
Focus-mode selector
Choosing a Focus Mode
The following autofocus modes are available in live view:
Mode
Description
Single-servo AF: For stationary subjects. Focus locks when shutterrelease button is pressed halfway. You can also focus by
AF-S
touching your subject in the monitor, in which case focus locks
until you lift your finger from the display to take the photograph.
Full-time-servo AF: For moving subjects. Camera focuses
continuously until shutter-release button is pressed. Focus locks
when shutter-release button is pressed halfway. You can also
AF-F
focus by touching your subject in the monitor, in which case
focus locks until you lift your finger from the display to take the
photograph.
To choose an autofocus mode, press the AF-mode button and
rotate the main command dial until the desired mode is
displayed in the monitor.
AF-mode button Main command
dial
41
Choosing an AF-Area Mode
The following AF-area modes can be selected in live view:
Mode
!
5
6
3
42
Description
Face-priority AF: Use for portraits. The camera automatically
detects and focuses on portrait subjects; the selected subject is
indicated by a double yellow border (if multiple faces are
detected, the camera will focus on the closest subject; to choose
a different subject, use the multi selector). If the camera can no
longer detect the subject (because, for example, the subject has
turned to face away from the camera), the border will no longer
be displayed. If you touch the monitor, the camera will focus on
the face closest to your finger and take a photograph when you
lift your finger from the screen.
Wide-area AF: Use for hand-held shots of landscapes and other
non-portrait subjects. Use the multi selector or touch controls to
move the focus point anywhere in the frame, or press the center
of the multi selector to position the focus point in the center of
the frame.
Normal-area AF: Focus on a selected spot in the frame. Use the
multi selector or touch controls to move the focus point
anywhere in the frame, or press the center of the multi selector
to position the focus point in the center of the frame. A tripod is
recommended.
Pinpoint AF: As for normal-area AF, except that a smaller focus
point is used for pinpoint focus on smaller targets.
Mode
&
Description
Subject-tracking AF: Position the focus point over your subject and
press the center of the multi selector. The focus point will track
the selected subject as it moves through the frame. To end
tracking, press the center of the multi selector again.
Alternatively, you can start tracking by touching your subject in
the monitor; to end tracking and take a photograph, lift your
finger from the screen. If tracking is already in progress,
touching the monitor anywhere will cause the camera to focus
on the current subject, and a photo will be taken when you lift
your finger from the screen. Note that the camera may be
unable to track subjects if they move quickly, leave the frame or
are obscured by other objects, change visibly in size, color, or
brightness, or are too small, too large, too bright, too dark, or
similar in color or brightness to the background.
To choose an AF-area mode, press the AF-mode button and
rotate the sub-command dial until the desired mode is displayed
in the monitor.
AF-mode button
Sub-command
dial
43
Manual Focus
To focus in manual focus mode (0 111),
rotate the lens focus ring until the
subject is in focus. To magnify the view in
the monitor for precise focus, press the X
button (0 40).
X button
You can also enable focus peaking, which
uses colored outlines to indicate objects
that are in focus. To enable focus
peaking, press the i button and select an
option other than Off for Peaking level
(0 45).
Area in focus
A Previewing Focus During Live View
To temporarily select maximum aperture for an improved focus
preview during live view, press the Pv button; the maximum aperture
indicator (0 54) will be displayed. To return aperture to its original
value, press the button again or focus using autofocus. If the shutterrelease button is pressed all the way down to take a picture during
focus preview, aperture will return to the original value before the
photo is taken.
44
Using the i Button
The options listed below can be accessed
by pressing the i button during live view
photography. Use the touch screen or
navigate the menu using the multi
selector and J button, pressing 1 or 3
to highlight items, 2 to view options,
and J to select the highlighted option
and return to the i-button menu. Press
the i button again to exit to the shooting
display.
i button
Option
Description
Choose an image area for live view photography
Choose image area
(0 83).
Active D-Lighting Adjust Active D-Lighting (0 180).
Electronic front- Enable or disable the electronic front-curtain shutter
curtain shutter for mirror-up photography (0 265).
Press 1 or 3 to adjust
monitor brightness for live
view (note that this affects
live view only and has no
Monitor
effect on photographs or
brightness
movies or on the brightness
of the monitor for menus or
playback; to adjust the brightness of the monitor for
menus and playback, use the Monitor brightness
option in the setup menu; 0 271).
45
Option
Photo live view
display WB
Split-screen
display zoom
Silent live view
photography
46
Description
During live view
photography, the white
balance (hue) of the
monitor can be set to a
value different from that
used for photographs
(0 156). This can be
effective if the lighting under which shots are framed
is different from that used when the photographs are
taken, as is sometimes the case when a flash or preset
manual white balance is used. Adjusting the photo
live view display white balance to produce a similar
effect to that used for the actual photographs makes
it easier to picture the results. To use the same white
balance for both the view in the monitor and the
photograph, select None. Monitor white balance is
reset when the camera is turned off, but the last value
used can be selected by pressing the a button while
pressing and holding the U button.
View two separate areas of
the frame side-by-side
(0 48). This option can be
used, for example, to align
buildings with the horizon.
Eliminate the sound made by the shutter when
photos are taken (0 49).
Option
Peaking level
Negative digitizer
Description
Objects that are in focus are
indicated by colored
outlines, including during
focus zoom (0 40). Choose
from 3 (high sensitivity), 2
(standard), 1 (low
sensitivity), and Off; the
higher the setting, the
greater the depth shown as
being in focus. The peaking
color can be changed using
Custom Setting d8
(Peaking highlight color,
0 265).
Area in focus
Create positives from color or black-and-white film
negatives (0 52).
47
Split-Screen Display Zoom
Selecting Split-screen display zoom in
the live view photography i button
menu splits the display into two boxes
showing separate areas of the frame
side-by-side at a high zoom ratio. The
positions of the magnified areas are
shown in the navigation window.
Navigation window
Use the X and W (M) buttons to zoom in
and out, or use the L (Z/Q) button to
select a box and press 4 or 2 to scroll
the selected area left or right. Pressing 1
or 3 scrolls both areas up or down
simultaneously. To focus on the subject
at the center of the selected area, press Area in focus
the shutter-release button halfway. To
exit the split-screen display, press the i button.
48
Silent Live View Photography
To eliminate shutter sounds during live view photography, press
the i button and select On (Mode 1) or On (Mode 2) for Silent
live view photography.
Option
Description
Reduce vibrations caused by the shutter when shooting
landscapes and other static subjects. Use of a tripod is
On (Mode 1) recommended. The maximum frame rate for release mode
CH is approximately 6 fps. ISO sensitivity (0 119) can be set
to values of from Lo 1 to 25600.
Photographs can be taken at a higher rate than when On
(Mode 1) is selected. In release modes S, Q, E, and MUP, one
photograph will be taken each time the shutter-release
button is pressed, while in continuous modes photos will
On (Mode 2)
be taken at approximately 15 fps (CL and QC) or 30 fps (CH)
for a maximum of 3 seconds. Image area is fixed at
DX (24×16), image size at 3600 × 2400, and image quality
at JPEG normal★.
Off
Silent live view photography disabled.
49
A Silent Live View Photography
Multiple exposure photography (0 254) and long-exposure noise
reduction are disabled (0 253) and the flash cannot be used. In
continuous release modes, focus and exposure are fixed at the values
for the first shot in each series. Flicker or banding may be visible in the
monitor and in photographs under fluorescent, mercury vapor, or
sodium lamps (for information on reducing flicker and banding, see
the section on the movie shooting menu Flicker reduction option,
0 254), while subjects in motion may appear distorted, particularly if
the camera is panned horizontally or an object moves horizontally at
high speed through the frame. Jagged edges, color fringing, moiré,
and bright spots may also appear. Bright regions or bands may appear
in scenes lit by flashing signs and other intermittent light sources or if
the subject is briefly illuminated by a strobe or other bright,
momentary light source.
The amount of time you can continue shooting is shown in place of the
number of exposures remaining.
Silent live view photography can also be enabled or disabled using the
Silent live view photography option in the photo shooting menu
(0 255).
A Camera Sounds
The sound of the camera focusing may be audible, as may the sound of
the aperture mechanism when you adjust aperture in mode A or M or
take pictures in mode P or S.
A Custom Setting d11
If On is selected for Custom Setting d11 (Live view in continuous
mode, 0 266) when On (Mode 1) is chosen for Silent live view
photography, the monitor will briefly go dark when the shutter is
released and then turn back on to display the picture. When On (Mode
2) is selected, pictures will not be displayed as they are taken; instead,
a C icon will appear in the monitor when a picture is taken (during
burst photography, the icon will flash).
50
A “On (Mode 2)”
The following exposure settings can be adjusted when On (Mode 2) is
selected:
Aperture
Shutter speed
ISO sensitivity 3
P, S 1
—
—
—
A
✔
—
—
M
✔
✔2
✔
1 Exposure for mode S is equivalent to mode P.
2 Choose from speeds of from 1/30 s to 1/8000 s.
3 In mode M, ISO sensitivity can be set manually to values of from Lo 1 to 25600 or adjusted
automatically by the camera. In other exposure modes, ISO sensitivity is adjusted
automatically by the camera.
Exposure compensation can be used to alter exposure by up to ±3 EV.
Exposure can be previewed in the monitor. Pressing J will display an
exposure indicator (0 132) showing the difference between the
selected and metered exposure values; to hide the indicator, press J
again.
On (Mode 2) cannot be combined with some camera features,
including flexible program (0 128), bracketing (0 142), Active DLighting (0 180), HDR (high dynamic range; 0 182), vignette control
(0 253), auto distortion control (0 253), exposure delay mode
(0 264), and the Clarity Picture Control parameter (0 178). If RAW
primary - JPEG secondary is selected for Secondary slot function in
the photo shooting menu, JPEG images will be recorded to the cards in
both slots.
A “On (Mode 2)” and Photo Info
The photo info for pictures taken with On (Mode 2) selected for Silent
live view photography and white balance set to v (auto) does not
include color temperature (0 234).
51
Negative Digitizer
To record positives of copies of film negatives, press the i button
and select Color negatives or Monochrome negatives for
Negative digitizer.
1 Position the negatives in front of a featureless white or gray
background.
We recommend using an AF-S Micro NIKKOR 60mm f/2.8G ED
or other micro lens and either natural light or an artificial light
source with a high Ra (color rendering index), such as a light
box or a high-CRI fluorescent lamp.
2 In live view, press the i button,
highlight Negative digitizer, and
press 2.
The colors in the display will be
reversed. The flash mode is
automatically set to s; to use a flash,
choose a different flash mode.
3 Choose the film type.
Highlight Color negatives or
Monochrome negatives and press
J.
4 Compose the shot to capture a frame of the film negative.
52
5 Adjust exposure.
Press J to display brightness
adjustment options and press 1 or 3
to adjust exposure. To view your
subject at a higher magnification,
press X (0 40). Press J to proceed.
6 Take the photograph.
Press the shutter-release button all the way down to take the
photograph and save it in JPEG format.
D Negative Digitizer
No options are available for correcting dust, scratches, or uneven
colors due to faded film. Photos are saved in JPEG format regardless of
the option selected for image quality; photos taken with a JPEG option
selected will be saved at the chosen setting, while photos taken with
NEF (RAW) or TIFF (RGB) selected will be saved in JPEG fine★ format.
Some menu items and features, including bracketing and focus shift,
are unavailable. Exposure mode is set to A and cannot be changed.
53
The Live View Display
r t
q
w
y
e
Item
Description
The amount of time remaining before live
view ends automatically. Displayed if shooting
q Time remaining
will end in 30 s or less.
Monitor hue (photo live view display white
Photo live view display
w white balance indicator balance). Can be adjusted using Photo live
view display WB in the i-button menu (0 45).
Maximum aperture
Displayed when the Pv button is pressed to
e indicator
select maximum aperture (0 44).
The current autofocus mode (0 41).
r Autofocus mode
The current AF-area mode (0 42).
t AF-area mode
The current focus point. The display varies
Focus
point
y
with the option selected for AF-area mode.
D The Count Down Display
A count down will be displayed 30 s before live view ends
automatically (the timer turns red if live view is about to end to protect
the internal circuits or, if an option other than No limit is selected for
Custom Setting c4—Monitor off delay > Live view; 0 264—5 s
before the monitor is due to turn off automatically). Depending on
shooting conditions, the timer may appear immediately when live
view is selected.
54
The Information Display
To hide or display indicators in the monitor, press the R button.
The histogram is only displayed in the exposure preview (0 39)
or when On (Mode 2) is selected for Silent live view
photography (0 49). The virtual horizon and histogram
displays are not available with the negative digitizer.
Virtual horizon
(0 272)
Information on
Histogram
Information off
Framing guides
55
Touch Photography (Touch Shutter)
Touch the monitor to focus and lift your
finger to take the photograph.
Tap the icon shown in the illustration to
choose the operation performed by
tapping the monitor in shooting mode.
Choose from the following options:
Option
W (Touch shutter/AF: On)
V (Touch AF: On)
X (Touch shutter/AF: Off)
Description
Touch the monitor to position the focus
point and focus (autofocus only; the touch
shutter cannot be used to focus when the
focus-mode selector is rotated to M to select
manual focus). Focus locks while your finger
remains on the monitor; to release the
shutter, lift your finger from the screen.
As above, except that lifting your finger from
the screen does not release the shutter. If
subject tracking (0 42) is active, you can
focus on the current subject by tapping the
monitor.
Touch shutter and AF disabled.
For information on touch photography focus, see “Autofocus”
(0 41).
56
D Taking Pictures Using Touch Shooting Options
The shutter-release button can be used to focus and take pictures even
when the W icon is displayed to show that the touch shutter is
enabled. Use the shutter-release button to take photographs in
continuous shooting mode (0 113) and during movie recording.
Touch shooting options can be used only to take pictures one at a time
in continuous shooting mode and cannot be used to take
photographs during movie recording.
The touch screen cannot be used to position the focus point when the
focus selector lock is in the L (lock) position (0 105), but it can still be
used to select the subject when face-priority AF is selected for AF-area
mode (0 42).
In self-timer mode (0 116), focus locks on the selected subject when
you touch the monitor and the timer starts when you lift your finger
from the screen. At default settings, the shutter is released about 10 s
after the timer starts; the delay and number of shots can be changed
using Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer, 0 264). If the option selected for
Number of shots is greater than 1, the camera will automatically take
pictures one after the other until the selected number of shots is
recorded.
57
D Shooting in Live View
To prevent light entering via the viewfinder from interfering with
photographs or exposure, close the viewfinder eyepiece shutter
(0 116).
Although they will not appear in the final picture, jagged edges, color
fringing, moiré, and bright spots may appear in the monitor, while
bright regions or bands may appear in some areas with flashing signs
and other intermittent light sources or if the subject is briefly
illuminated by a strobe or other bright, momentary light source. In
addition, distortion may occur with moving subjects, particularly if the
camera is panned horizontally or an object moves horizontally at high
speed through the frame. Flicker and banding visible in the monitor
under fluorescent, mercury vapor, or sodium lamps can be reduced
using the Flicker reduction option in the movie shooting menu
(0 258), although they may still be visible in the final photograph at
some shutter speeds. When shooting in live view, avoid pointing the
camera at the sun or other strong light sources. Failure to observe this
precaution could result in damage to the camera’s internal circuitry.
Regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting c2 (Standby
timer, 0 263), the standby timer will not expire during shooting.
A Beeps During Live View
A beep may sound if you adjust aperture or use the live view selector
during live view.
58
Movies
Read this section for information on recording and viewing
movies.
Recording Movies
Movies can be recorded in live view.
1 Rotate the live view selector to
1 (movie live view).
Live view selector
2 Press the a button.
The mirror will be raised and the view
through the lens will be displayed in
the camera monitor, modified for the
effects of exposure. The subject will
no longer be visible in the viewfinder.
a button
D The 0 Icon
A 0 icon (0 71) indicates that movies cannot be recorded.
A White Balance
White balance can be set at any time by pressing the U button
and rotating a command dial (0 156).
59
3 Choose a focus mode (0 41).
4 Choose an AF-area mode (0 42).
A Pinpoint AF
Pinpoint AF is not available in movie
mode.
5 Focus.
Frame the opening shot and press the
AF-ON button to focus. Note that the
number of subjects that can be
detected in face-priority AF drops
during movie recording.
AF-ON button
A Focusing
Focus can also be adjusted by pressing the shutter-release button
halfway before beginning recording, or you can focus manually as
described in “Manual Focus” (0 44).
60
6 Start recording.
Press the movie-record button to start
recording. A recording indicator and
the time available are displayed in the
monitor. Exposure can be locked by
pressing the center of the subMovie-record button
selector (0 137) or altered by up to
±3 EV using exposure compensation Recording indicator
(0 139); spot metering is not
available. In autofocus mode, the
camera can be refocused by pressing
the AF-ON button or by tapping your
subject in the monitor.
Time remaining
A Audio
The camera can record both video and sound; do not cover the
microphone on the front of the camera during movie recording.
Note that the built-in microphone may record sounds made by the
camera or lens during autofocus, vibration reduction, or changes to
aperture.
61
7 End recording.
Press the movie-record button again
to end recording. Recording will end
automatically when the maximum
length is reached, or the memory card
is full (note that depending on
memory card write speed, shooting
may end before the maximum length is reached).
8 Exit live view.
Press the a button to exit live view.
62
A Exposure Mode
The following exposure settings can be adjusted in movie mode:
1
2
3
4
Aperture
Shutter speed
ISO sensitivity
P, S 1
—
—
— 2, 3
A
✔
—
— 2, 3
M
✔
✔
✔ 3, 4
Exposure for mode S is equivalent to mode P.
The upper limit for ISO sensitivity can be selected using the ISO sensitivity
settings > Maximum sensitivity option in the movie shooting menu (0 257).
Regardless of the option chosen for ISO sensitivity settings > Maximum
sensitivity or for ISO sensitivity (mode M), the upper limit when On is
selected for Electronic VR in the movie shooting menu is ISO 25600.
If On is selected for ISO sensitivity settings > Auto ISO control (mode
M) in the movie shooting menu, the upper limit for ISO sensitivity can be selected using the
Maximum sensitivity option.
In exposure mode M, shutter speed can be set to values between 1/25 s
and 1/8000 s (the slowest available shutter speed varies with the frame
rate; 0 69). In other exposure modes, shutter speed is adjusted
automatically. If the subject is over- or under-exposed in mode P or S,
end live view and start live view again or select exposure A and adjust
aperture.
63
Indices
If Index marking is assigned to a control
using Custom Setting g1 (Custom
control assignment, 0 270), you can
press the selected control during
recording to add indices that can be used
to locate frames during editing and
playback (0 76). Up to 20 indices can be
added to each movie.
Index
A See Also
For information on:
• Choosing the role played by the center of the multi selector, see
A > Custom Setting f2 (Multi selector center button; 0 268).
• Choosing the roles of the Fn1, Fn2, and Pv buttons and the center of
the sub-selector, see A > Custom Setting g1 (Custom control
assignment; 0 270).
• Choosing whether the shutter-release button can be used to start live
view or to start and end movie recording, see A > Custom Setting g1
(Custom control assignment) > Shutter-release button (0 270).
• Preventing unintended operation of the a button, see A > Custom
Setting f8 (Live view button options; 0 270).
64
Using the i Button
The options listed below can be accessed
by pressing the i button in movie mode.
Use the touch screen or navigate the
menu using the multi selector and J
button, pressing 1 or 3 to highlight
items, 2 to view options, and J to select
the highlighted option and return to the
i-button menu. Press the i button again
to exit to the shooting display.
i button
Option
Description
Choose image area Choose image area for movies (0 68).
Frame size/frame rate Select a frame size and rate (0 69).
Movie quality
Choose movie quality (0 69).
Adjust Active D-Lighting (0 180). Not available
Active D-Lighting when peaking level is displayed or at frame sizes of
1920 × 1080 (slow-mo) and 3840 × 2160 (0 69).
Press 1 or 3 to adjust
microphone sensitivity
(0 258). Both the built-in
Microphone
and external
sensitivity
microphones (0 295) are
affected.
Reduce microphone gain and prevent audio
distortion when recording movies in loud
environments.
Control the frequency response of the built-in or
Frequency response
external microphones (0 259).
Attenuator
65
Option
Description
Enable or disable wind noise reduction using the
Wind noise reduction
built-in microphone’s low-cut filter (0 259).
When two memory cards are inserted, you can
Destination
choose the card to which movies are recorded
(0 256).
Press 1 or 3 to adjust monitor brightness (note
that this affects live view only and has no effect on
Monitor brightness
photographs or movies or on the brightness of the
monitor for menus or playback; 0 45).
Multi-selector
Select Enable to enable power aperture. Press 1 to
power aperture
widen the aperture, 3 to narrow the aperture.
Multi selector
Selecting Enable allows exposure compensation to
exposure comp.
be set by pressing 1 or 3.
If Pattern 1 or Pattern 2 is selected, shading will be
used to indicate highlights (bright areas of the
frame). The level of brightness needed to trigger
the highlight display can be selected using Custom
Setting g2 (Highlight brightness, 0 270).
Peaking level is disabled when highlights are
displayed.
Highlights
Highlight display
Pattern 1
Pattern 2
Headphone volume Press 1 or 3 to adjust headphone volume.
Select On to enable electronic vibration reduction
in movie mode. Not available at frame sizes of 1920
× 1080 (slow-mo) and 3840 × 2160 (0 69). Note
Electronic VR
that if electronic vibration is on, Peaking level will
be disabled, the angle of view will be reduced, and
the edges of the frame will be cropped out.
66
Option
Description
Choose whether objects
that are in focus will be
indicated by colored
outlines while manual
focus is in effect.
Area in focus
Peaking level
Choose from 3 (high
sensitivity),
2 (standard), 1 (low
sensitivity), and Off; the
higher the setting, the
greater the depth shown
as being in focus. The
peaking color can be changed using Custom
Setting d8 (Peaking highlight color, 0 265).
Peaking is not available when highlight display is
enabled or at frame sizes of 1920 × 1080 (slow-mo)
and 3840 × 2160 (0 69) or when Active D-Lighting
(0 180) or electronic vibration reduction is
enabled.
A Using an External Microphone
The optional ME-1 stereo microphone or ME-W1 wireless microphone
can be used to record sound for movies (0 295).
A Headphones
Third-party headphones can be used. Note that high sound levels may
result in high volume; particular care should be taken when
headphones are used.
67
Image Area: Choosing a Movie Crop
You can choose an image area using the Image area > Choose
image area option in the movie shooting menu. Select FX to
shoot movies in what is referred to as “FX-based movie format”,
DX to shoot in “DX-based movie format”. The differences
between the two are illustrated below.
FX
DX
The sizes of the areas recorded are approximately 35.9 ×
20.2 mm (FX-based movie format) and 23.5 × 13.2 mm (DXbased movie format). Movies shot with a DX-format lens and On
selected for Image area > Auto DX crop (0 84) in the movie
shooting menu are recorded in DX-based movie format, as are all
movies (regardless of the lens used or the option selected for
Image area > Choose image area) with a frame size of 1920 ×
1080 (slow-mo). Enabling electronic vibration reduction by
selecting On for Electronic VR in the i-button menu reduces
the size of the crop, slightly increasing the apparent focal length.
68
Frame Size, Frame Rate, and Movie Quality
The Frame size/frame rate option in the movie shooting menu
is used to choose the movie frame size (in pixels) and frame rate.
You can also choose from two Movie quality options: high and
normal. Together, these options determine the maximum bit
rate, as shown in the following table.
Option 1
r 3840 × 2160 (4K UHD); 30p 2
s 3840 × 2160 (4K UHD); 25p 2
t 3840 × 2160 (4K UHD); 24p 2
y/y 1920 × 1080; 60p
z/z 1920 × 1080; 50p
1/1 1920 × 1080; 30p
2/2 1920 × 1080; 25p
3/3 1920 × 1080; 24p
4/4 1280 × 720; 60p
5/5 1280 × 720; 50p
Maximum bit rate
(Mbps) (★ high
quality/Normal)
Maximum length
144
48/24
29 min. 59 s 3
24/12
1920 × 1080; 30p ×4
(slow-mo) 4
Recording: 3 min.
36
Playback: 12 min.
1920 × 1080; 25p ×4
B (slow-mo) 4
1920 × 1080; 24p ×5
Recording: 3 min.
29
C (slow-mo) 4
Playback: 15 min.
Actual frame rate is 29.97 fps for values listed as 30p, 23.976 fps for values listed as 24p, and
59.94 fps for values listed as 60p.
When this option is selected, movie quality is fixed at “high”.
Each movie will be recorded across up to 8 files of up to 4 GB each. The number of files and the
length of each file vary with the options selected for Frame size/frame rate and
Movie quality.
See “Slow Motion Movies” (0 70).
A
1
2
3
4
69
❚❚ Slow-Motion Movies
To record silent slow-motion movies, select 1920×1080; 30p ×4
(slow-mo), 1920×1080; 25p ×4 (slow-mo), or 1920×1080; 24p
×5 (slow-mo) for Frame size/frame rate in the movie shooting
menu. Movies recorded at 4 or 5 times the rated speed are
played back at the rated speed for a slow-motion effect; for
example, movies shot with 1920×1080; 30p ×4 (slow-mo)
selected will be recorded at a frame of roughly 120 fps (120p)
and play back at approximately 30 fps (30p).
Frame rate *
Frame size/frame rate
Recorded at
Plays back at
1920 × 1080; 30p ×4 (slow-mo)
120p
30p
1920 × 1080; 25p ×4 (slow-mo)
100p
25p
1920 × 1080; 24p ×5 (slow-mo)
120p
24p
* Actual frame rate is 119.88 fps for values listed as 120p, 29.97 fps for values listed as 30p, and
23.976 fps for values listed as 24p.
D Slow-Motion Movies
When a slow-motion option is selected, quality is fixed at “normal” and
the image area is fixed at DX, regardless of the lens used or the option
selected for Image area > Choose image area in the movie shooting
menu (0 256). Movies shot with face-priority AF, pinpoint AF, or
subject-tracking AF selected for AF-area mode (0 42) are recorded
using wide-area AF.
70
The Live View Display
q
w
e
r
t
y
u
io
!0
!1
!2
!3
Item
q “No movie” indicator
Description
Indicates that movies cannot be recorded.
Displayed when wind noise reduction is on
w Wind noise reduction (0 259).
Displayed when electronic vibration reduction
e Electronic VR indicator is on (0 259).
Volume of audio output to headphones.
Displayed when third-party headphones are
r Headphone volume
connected.
The current frequency response (0 259).
t Frequency response
y Microphone sensitivity Microphone sensitivity (0 258).
Sound level for audio recording. Displayed in
red if level is too high; adjust microphone
u Sound level
sensitivity accordingly.
HDMI recording
Displayed if movies are simultaneously being
i indicator
recorded to a device connected via HDMI.
Displayed when the attenuator is enabled
o Attenuator indicator (0 259).
The recording time available for movies.
!0 Time remaining
The frame size for movie recording (0 69).
!1 Movie frame size
Highlight display
Displayed when highlight display is on.
!2 indicator
“No power aperture”
Indicates that power aperture is unavailable.
!3 indicator
71
The Information Display
To hide or display indicators in the monitor, press the R button.
Virtual horizon
(0 272)
Information on
Histogram
Information off
Framing guides
D The Count-Down Display
A count down will be displayed 30 s before live view ends
automatically (0 54). Depending on shooting conditions, the timer
may appear immediately when movie recording begins. Note that
regardless of the amount of recording time available, live view will still
end automatically when the timer expires.
A Adjusting Settings During Movie Recording
Headphone volume cannot be adjusted during recording. If an option
other than I (microphone off) is currently selected, microphone
sensitivity can be changed to any setting other than I while recording
is in progress.
72
Taking Photos in Movie Mode
To take photos in movie mode (either in live view or
during movie recording), select Take photos for
Custom Setting g1 (Custom control assignment) >
Shutter-release button (0 270). Photos with an
aspect ratio of 16 : 9 can then be taken at any time by pressing
the shutter-release button all the way down. If movie recording
is in progress, recording will end and the footage recorded to
that point will be saved.
Except at a frame size of 3840 × 2160 (0 69), photographs are
recorded in the format selected for Image quality in the photo
shooting menu (0 88); photos taken at a frame size of
3840 × 2160 are recorded at an image quality of JPEG fine★. For
information on image size, see “Image Size” (0 74). Note that
the exposure for photographs cannot be previewed when the
live view selector is rotated to 1; mode P, S, or A is recommended
but accurate results can be achieved in mode M by previewing
exposure with the live view selector rotated to C.
73
❚❚ Image Size
The size of photos taken in movie mode varies with the image
area (0 256) and the option selected for Image size in the
photo shooting menu (0 91).
Image area
FX
DX
Image size
Large
Medium
Small
Large
Medium
Small
Size (pixels)
8256 × 4640
6192 × 3480
4128 × 2320
5408 × 3040
4048 × 2272
2704 × 1520
D Recording Movies
Movies are recorded in the sRGB color space. Flicker, banding, or
distortion may be visible in the monitor and in the final movie under
fluorescent, mercury vapor, or sodium lamps or with subjects that are
in motion, particularly if the camera is panned horizontally or an object
moves horizontally at high speed through frame (for information on
reducing flicker and banding, see the section on the movie shooting
menu Flicker reduction option, 0 258). Flicker may also appear while
power aperture is in use. Jagged edges, color fringing, moiré, and
bright spots may also appear. Bright regions or bands may appear in
some areas of the frame with flashing signs and other intermittent
light sources or if the subject is briefly illuminated by a strobe or other
bright, momentary light source. When recording movies, avoid
pointing the camera at the sun or other strong light sources. Failure to
observe this precaution could result in damage to the camera’s internal
circuitry. Note that noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines)
and unexpected colors may appear if you zoom in on the view through
the lens (0 40) in movie mode.
Flash lighting cannot be used.
Recording ends automatically if the lens is removed or the live view
selector is rotated to a new setting.
74
A Wireless Remote Controllers and Remote Cords
If Record movies is selected for Custom Setting g1 (Custom control
assignment) > Shutter-release button (0 270), the shutter-release
buttons on optional wireless remote controllers and remote cords
(0 295) can be pressed halfway to start live view or pressed all the way
down to start and end movie recording.
75
Viewing Movies
Movies are indicated by a 1 icon in full-frame playback (0 223).
Tap the a icon in the monitor or press the center of the multi
selector to start playback; your current position is indicated by
the movie progress bar.
1 icon
Length
a icon
Current position/total length
Movie Volume Guide
progress bar
The following operations can be performed:
To
Pause
Play
Rewind/
advance
Start
slow-motion
playback
76
Description
Press 3 to pause playback.
Press the center of the multi selector to resume
playback when movie is paused or during rewind/
advance.
Press 4 to rewind, 2 to advance.
Speed increases with each press,
from 2× to 4× to 8× to 16×; keep
the control pressed to skip to beginning or end of
movie (first frame is indicated by h in top right corner
of monitor, last frame by i). If playback is paused, the
movie rewinds or advances one frame at a time; keep
the control pressed for continuous rewind or advance.
Press 3 while the movie is paused to start slowmotion playback.
To
Description
Rotate the main command dial to skip ahead or back
Skip 10 s
10 s.
Rotate the sub-command dial to skip to next or
Skip ahead/
previous index, or to skip to the last or first frame if the
back
movie contains no indices.
Adjust volume Press X to increase volume, W (M) to decrease.
View movie Press the i or J button to view movie editing options
editing options (0 78).
Exit
Press 1 or K to exit to full-frame playback.
Return to
Press the shutter-release button halfway to exit to
shooting mode shooting mode.
A The p Icon
Movies with indices (0 64) are indicated
by a p icon in full-frame playback.
77
Editing Movies
Trim footage to create edited copies of movies or save selected
frames as JPEG stills.
Option
9
4
Description
Create a copy from which unwanted footage
Choose start/end point
has been removed.
Save current frame
Save a selected frame as a JPEG still.
Trimming Movies
To create trimmed copies of movies:
1 Display a movie full frame (0 223).
2 Pause the movie on the new opening
frame.
Play the movie back as described in
“Viewing Movies” (0 76), pressing the
center of the multi selector to start
and resume playback and 3 to pause
and pressing 4 or 2 or rotating the
Movie progress bar
main or sub-command dial to locate
the desired frame. Your approximate position in the movie
can be ascertained from the movie progress bar. Pause
playback when you reach the new opening frame.
78
3 Select Choose start/end point.
Press i or J, then highlight Choose
start/end point and press 2.
4 Select Start point.
To create a copy that begins from the
current frame, highlight Start point
and press J. The frames before the
current frame will be removed when
you save the copy in Step 9.
Start point
5 Confirm the new start point.
If the desired frame is not currently
displayed, press 4 or 2 to advance or
rewind (to skip to 10 s ahead or back,
rotate the main command dial; to skip
to an index, or to the first or last frame
if the movie contains no indices,
rotate the sub-command dial).
79
6 Choose the end point.
Press L (Z/Q) to switch from the
start point (w) to the end point (x)
selection tool and then select the
closing frame as described in Step 5.
The frames after the selected frame
will be removed when you save the
copy in Step 9.
L (Z/Q) button
End point
7 Create the copy.
Once the desired frame is displayed, press 1.
8 Preview the movie.
To preview the copy, highlight
Preview and press J (to interrupt the
preview and return to the save
options menu, press 1). To abandon
the current copy and select a new
start point or end point as described
above, highlight Cancel and press J; to save the copy,
proceed to Step 9.
80
9 Save the copy.
Highlight Save as new file and press
J to save the copy to a new file. To
replace the original movie file with the
edited copy, highlight Overwrite
existing file and press J.
D Trimming Movies
Movies must be at least two seconds long. The copy will not be saved
if there is insufficient space available on the memory card.
Copies have the same time and date of creation as the original.
A Removing Opening or Closing Footage
To remove only the opening footage from the movie, proceed to
Step 7 without pressing the L (Z/Q) button in Step 6. To remove
only the closing footage, select End point in Step 4, select the closing
frame, and proceed to Step 7 without pressing the L (Z/Q) button
in Step 6.
A The Retouch Menu
Movies can also be edited using the Trim movie option in the retouch
menu (0 279).
81
Saving Selected Frames
To save a copy of a selected frame as a JPEG still:
1 Pause the movie on the desired
frame.
Play the movie back as described in
“Viewing Movies” (0 76), pressing the
center of the multi selector to start
and resume playback and 3 to pause.
Pause the movie at the frame you
intend to copy.
2 Choose Save current frame.
Press i or J, then highlight Save
current frame and press J to create a
JPEG copy of the current frame. The
image will be recorded at the
dimensions selected for Frame size/
frame rate in the movie shooting
menu (0 69).
A Save Current Frame
JPEG movie stills created with the Save current frame option cannot
be retouched. JPEG movie stills lack some categories of photo
information (0 229).
82
Image Recording Options
Image Area
Choose from image areas of FX (36×24) (FX format), DX (24×16)
(DX format), 5 : 4 (30×24), 1.2× (30×20), and 1:1 (24×24).
FX format
DX format (24×16)
image circle
5:4
DX format
1:1
1.2×
FX format (36×24)
image circle
83
❚❚ Image Area Options
The camera offers a choice of the following image areas:
Option
Description
Images are recorded in FX format with an angle of
view equivalent to a NIKKOR lens on a 35 mm
format camera.
Selecting this option reduces the angle of view
and increases the apparent focal length of the
lens by approximately 1.2×.
Images are recorded in DX format. To calculate
the approximate focal length of the lens in 35 mm
format, multiply by 1.5.
c
FX (36×24)
l
1.2× (30×20)
a
DX (24×16)
b
m
5 : 4 (30×24)
Pictures are recorded with an aspect ratio of 5 : 4.
1 : 1 (24×24)
Pictures are recorded with an aspect ratio of 1 : 1.
❚❚ Automatic Crop Selection
To automatically select to a DX crop when a DX lens is attached,
select On for Image area > Auto DX crop in the photo shooting
menu (0 251). The image area selected in the photo shooting
menu or with the camera controls will be used only when a nonDX lens is attached. Select Off to use the currently-selected
image area with all lenses.
D Auto DX Crop
Camera controls cannot be used to select image area when a DX lens is
attached and Auto DX crop is on (0 87).
84
❚❚ The Viewfinder Mask Display
If On is selected for Image area > Viewfinder mask display in
the photo shooting menu, the area outside the 1.2× (30×20),
DX (24×16), 5:4 (30×24), and 1:1 (24×24) crops will be shown
in gray in the viewfinder.
1.2× (30×20)
DX (24×16)
5 : 4 (30×24)
1 : 1 (24×24)
A DX Lenses
DX lenses are designed for use with DX format cameras and have a
smaller angle of view than lenses for 35 mm format cameras. If Auto
DX crop is off and an option other than DX (24×16) (DX format) is
selected for Image area when a DX lens is attached, the edges of the
image may be eclipsed. This may not be apparent in the viewfinder,
but when the images are played back you may notice a drop in
resolution or that the edges of the picture are blacked out.
A Image Area
The selected option is shown in the
information display.
85
The image area can be selected using the Image area > Choose
image area option in the photo shooting menu or by pressing a
control and rotating a command dial.
❚❚ The Image Area Menu
1 Select Image area.
Highlight Image area in the photo
shooting menu and press 2.
2 Select Choose image area.
Highlight Choose image area and
press 2.
3 Adjust settings.
Choose an option and press J. The
selected crop is displayed in the
viewfinder.
A Image Size
Image size varies with the option selected for image area.
86
❚❚ Camera Controls
1 Assign image area selection to a camera control.
Use Custom Setting f1 (Custom control assignment, 0 268)
to assign Choose image area to a control.
2 Use the selected control to choose an image area.
The image area can be selected by pressing the selected
control and rotating the main or sub-command dial until the
desired crop is displayed in the viewfinder (0 85).
The option currently selected for
image area can be viewed by
pressing the control to display the
image area in the control panel or
information display. FX format is
displayed as “36 - 24”, 1.2 × as
“30 - 20”, DX format as “24 - 16”, 5 : 4
as “30 - 24”, and 1 : 1 as “24 - 24”.
A See Also
For information on:
• The crops available for movie recording, see “Image Area: Choosing a
Movie Crop” (0 68).
• The number of pictures that can be stored at different image area
settings, see “Memory Card Capacity” (0 362).
87
Image Quality
The D850 supports the following image quality options.
Option
File type
NEF (RAW)
NEF
NEF (RAW)+
JPEG fine★/
NEF (RAW)+
JPEG fine
NEF (RAW)+
JPEG normal★/
NEF (RAW)+
JPEG normal
NEF (RAW)+
JPEG basic★/
NEF (RAW)+
JPEG basic
JPEG fine★/
JPEG fine
JPEG normal★/
JPEG normal
JPEG basic★/
JPEG basic
TIFF (RGB)
Description
RAW data from the image sensor are saved
without additional processing. Settings such
as white balance and contrast can be
adjusted after shooting.
Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW)
image and one fine-quality JPEG image.
NEF/ Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW)
JPEG image and one normal-quality JPEG image.
Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW)
image and one basic-quality JPEG image.
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of
roughly 1 : 4 (fine quality).
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of
JPEG
roughly 1 : 8 (normal quality).
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of
roughly 1 : 16 (basic quality).
Record uncompressed TIFF-RGB images at a
TIFF bit depth of 8 bits per channel (24-bit color).
(RGB) TIFF is supported by a wide variety of
imaging applications.
A See Also
For information on the number of pictures that can be stored at
different image quality and size settings, see “Memory Card Capacity”
(0 362).
88
Image quality is set by pressing the T button and rotating
the main command dial until the desired setting is displayed in
the control panel.
T button
Main command
dial
A JPEG Compression
Image quality options with a star (“★”) use compression intended to
ensure maximum quality; the size of the files varies with the scene.
Options without a star use a type of compression designed to produce
smaller files; files tend to be roughly the same size regardless of the
scene recorded.
A NEF+JPEG
When photographs taken at settings of NEF (RAW) + JPEG are viewed
on the camera with only one memory card inserted, only the JPEG
image will be displayed. If both copies are recorded to the same
memory card, both copies will be erased when the photo is deleted. If
the JPEG copy is recorded to a separate memory card using the
Secondary slot function > RAW primary - JPEG secondary option,
each copy must be deleted separately.
A The Image Quality Menu
Image quality can also be adjusted using the Image quality option in
the photo shooting menu (0 251).
89
❚❚ NEF (RAW) Compression
To choose the type of compression for NEF (RAW) images,
highlight NEF (RAW) recording > NEF (RAW) compression in
the photo shooting menu and press 2.
Option
N
O
Description
NEF images are compressed using a reversible
Lossless
algorithm, reducing file size by about 20–40% with
compressed
no effect on image quality.
NEF images are compressed using a non-reversible
Compressed algorithm, reducing file size by about 35–55% with
almost no effect on image quality.
Uncompressed NEF images are not compressed.
❚❚ NEF (RAW) Bit Depth
To choose a bit depth for NEF (RAW) images, highlight NEF
(RAW) recording > NEF (RAW) bit depth in the photo shooting
menu and press 2.
Option
q 12-bit
r 14-bit
Description
NEF (RAW) images are recorded at a bit-depth of
12 bits.
NEF (RAW) images are recorded at a bit depth of
14 bits, producing files larger than those with a bit
depth of 12 bits but increasing the color data
recorded.
A NEF (RAW) Images
JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) images can be created using Capture NX-D
or other software or the NEF (RAW) processing option in the retouch
menu (0 278).
90
Image Size
Image size is measured in pixels. Choose from # Large,
$ Medium, or % Small (note that image size varies depending
on the option selected for Image area, 0 83):
Image area
FX (36×24; FX format)
1.2× (30×20)
DX (24×16; DX format)
5 : 4 (30×24)
1 : 1 (24×24)
Option
Large
Medium
Small
Large
Medium
Small
Large
Medium
Small
Large
Medium
Small
Large
Medium
Small
Size (pixels)
8256 × 5504
6192 × 4128
4128 × 2752
6880 × 4584
5152 × 3432
3440 × 2288
5408 × 3600
4048 × 2696
2704 × 1800
6880 × 5504
5152 × 4120
3440 × 2752
5504 × 5504
4128 × 4128
2752 × 2752
91
Image size for JPEG and TIFF images can be set by pressing the
T button and rotating the sub-command dial until the
desired option is displayed in the control panel. To choose the
size of NEF (RAW) images, use the Image size > NEF (RAW)
option in the photo shooting menu.
T button
Sub-command
dial
A The Image Size Menu
Image size for JPEG and TIFF images can also
be adjusted using the Image size > JPEG/
TIFF option in the photo shooting menu
(0 251). Small and medium sized NEF (RAW)
images are recorded in lossless compressed
12-bit format, regardless of the options
selected for NEF (RAW) compression and
NEF (RAW) bit depth in the NEF (RAW) recording menu.
92
Using Two Memory Cards
When two memory cards are inserted in the camera, you can
choose one as the primary card using the Primary slot
selection item in the photo shooting menu (0 250). Select XQD
card slot to designate the card in the XQD card slot as the
primary card, SD card slot to choose the SD card. The roles
played by the primary and secondary cards can be chosen using
the Secondary slot function option in the photo shooting
menu (0 250). Choose from Overflow (the secondary card is
used only when the primary card is full), Backup (each picture is
recorded to both the primary and secondary card), and RAW
primary - JPEG secondary (as for Backup, except that the NEF/
RAW copies of photos shot at settings of NEF/RAW + JPEG are
recorded only to the primary card and the JPEG copies only to
the secondary card).
A “Backup” and “RAW Primary - JPEG Secondary”
The camera shows the number of exposures remaining on the card
with the least amount of memory. Shutter release will be disabled
when either card is full.
A Recording Movies
When two memory cards are inserted in the camera, the slot used to
record movies can be selected using the Destination option in the
movie shooting menu (0 256).
93
Focus
This section describes the focus options available when
photographs are framed in the viewfinder. Focus can be
adjusted automatically (0 94) or manually (0 111). The user can
also select the focus point for automatic or manual focus
(0 105) or use focus lock to focus and recompose photographs
after focusing (0 108).
Autofocus
To use autofocus, rotate the
focus-mode selector to AF.
Focus-mode selector
The camera focuses using 153 focus
points, of which the 55 shown by r in
the illustration can be selected by the
user (0 105).
User-selectable focus
points
94
A Cross Sensors
The availability of cross-sensor focus points varies with the lens used.
Lens
Cross sensors (cross-sensor focus
points highlighted in gray 2)
AF-S and AF-P lenses other than those
listed below with maximum apertures
of f/4 or faster 1
99 cross sensors
• AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 12–24mm
f/4G IF-ED
• AF-S Micro NIKKOR 60mm f/2.8G ED
• AF-S NIKKOR 600mm f/4G ED VR
• AF-S NIKKOR 600mm f/4E FL ED VR
63 cross sensors
• AF-S Nikkor 600mm f/4D IF-ED II
• AF-S Nikkor 600mm f/4D IF-ED
• AF-S NIKKOR 200–400mm f/4G ED VR II
• AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 200–400mm
f/4G IF-ED
• AF-S NIKKOR 500mm f/4G ED VR
• AF-S Nikkor 500mm f/4D IF-ED II
• AF-S Nikkor 500mm f/4D IF-ED
45 cross sensors
• AF-S and AF-P lenses with maximum
apertures slower than f/4 1
• Non–AF-S, non–AF-P lenses
1 At maximum zoom, in the case of zoom lenses.
2 Other focus points use line sensors, which detect horizontal lines.
95
A AF-S/AF-I Teleconverters and Available Focus Points
When an AF-S or AF-I teleconverter is attached, the focus points shown
in the illustrations can be used for autofocus and electronic
rangefinding (note that at maximum combined apertures slower than
f/5.6, the camera may not be able to focus on dark or low-contrast
subjects).
Teleconverter
TC-14E, TC-14E II, TC-14E III
TC-17E II
TC-20E, TC-20E II, TC-20E III
f/2
TC-14E, TC-14E II, TC-14E III
f/2.8
TC-17E II
TC-20E, TC-20E II, TC-20E III
f/2.8
TC-14E, TC-14E II, TC-14E III
f/4
TC-17E II
f/4
TC-800-1.25E ED
96
Max. lens Available focus points (cross-sensor
aperture 1 focus points highlighted in gray 2)
f/5.6
153 focus points (55
selectable) with 99 cross
sensors
153 focus points (55
selectable) with 45 cross
sensors
37 focus points (17
selectable) with 25 cross
sensors
Teleconverter
Max. lens Available focus points (cross-sensor
aperture 1 focus points highlighted in gray 2)
TC-20E, TC-20E II, TC-20E III
f/4
TC-14E, TC-14E II, TC-14E III
f/5.6
15 focus points (9 selectable)
with 5 cross sensors
1 At maximum zoom, in the case of zoom lenses.
2 Other focus points use line sensors, which detect horizontal
lines, but note that if there are only 5 cross sensors, only
those shown by ■ detect vertical lines.
Autofocus is not available when teleconverters are used with AF-S VR
Micro-Nikkor 105mm f/2.8G IF-ED lenses.
97
Autofocus Mode
Choose from the following autofocus modes:
Mode
AF-S
AF-C
Description
Single-servo AF: For stationary subjects. Focus locks when shutterrelease button is pressed halfway. At default settings, shutter
can only be released when in-focus indicator (I) is displayed
(focus priority; 0 260).
Continuous-servo AF: For moving subjects. Camera focuses
continuously while shutter-release button is pressed halfway; if
subject moves, camera will engage predictive focus tracking
(0 99) to predict final distance to subject and adjust focus as
necessary. At default settings, shutter can be released whether
or not subject is in focus (release priority; 0 260).
Autofocus mode can be selected by pressing the AF-mode
button and rotating the main command dial until the desired
setting is displayed in the viewfinder and control panel.
Control panel
AF-mode button Main command
dial
98
Viewfinder
A The AF-ON Button
For the purpose of focusing the camera,
pressing the AF-ON button has the same
effect as pressing the shutter-release button
halfway.
AF-ON button
A Predictive Focus Tracking
In AF-C mode, the camera will initiate predictive focus tracking if the
subject moves toward or away from the camera while the shutterrelease button is pressed halfway or the AF-ON button is pressed. This
allows the camera to track focus while attempting to predict where the
subject will be when the shutter is released.
A See Also
For information on:
• Using focus priority in continuous-servo AF, see A > Custom Setting
a1 (AF-C priority selection, 0 260).
• Using release priority in single-servo AF, see A > Custom Setting a2
(AF-S priority selection, 0 260).
• Preventing the camera from focusing when the shutter-release
button is pressed halfway, see A > Custom Setting a8 (AF activation,
0 261).
• Limiting focus-mode selection to AF-S or AF-C, see A > Custom Setting
a10 (Autofocus mode restrictions, 0 262).
• Using the sub-command dial to choose the focus mode, see A >
Custom Setting f4 (Customize command dials) > Change main/sub
(0 269).
• The autofocus options available in live view or during movie
recording, see “Autofocus” (0 41).
99
AF-Area Mode
Choose how the focus point for autofocus is selected.
• Single-point AF: Select the focus point; the camera will focus on
the subject in the selected focus point only. Use with stationary
subjects.
• Dynamic-area AF: Select the focus point. In AF-C focus mode, the
camera will focus based on information from surrounding
focus points if the subject briefly leaves the selected point. The
number of focus points varies with the mode selected:
- 9- or 25-point dynamic-area AF: Choose when there is time to
compose the photograph or when photographing subjects
that are moving predictably (e.g., runners or race cars on a
track).
- 72-point dynamic-area AF: Choose when photographing subjects
that are moving unpredictably (e.g., players at a football
game).
- 153-point dynamic-area AF: Choose when photographing
subjects that are moving quickly and cannot be easily framed
in the viewfinder (e.g., birds).
100
• 3D-tracking: Select the focus point. In AF-C focus mode, the
camera will track subjects that leave the selected focus point
and select new focus points as required. Use to quickly
compose pictures with subjects that are moving erratically
from side to side (e.g., tennis players). If the subject leaves
viewfinder, remove your finger from the shutter-release button
and recompose the photograph with the subject in the
selected focus point.
• Group-area AF: The camera focuses using a group of focus points
selected by the user, reducing the risk of the camera focusing
on the background instead of on the main subject. Choose for
subjects that are difficult to photograph using a single focus
point. If faces are detected in AF-S focus mode, the camera will
give priority to portrait subjects.
• Auto-area AF: The camera automatically
detects the subject and selects the
focus point; if a face is detected, the
camera will give priority to the portrait
subject. The active focus points are
highlighted briefly after the camera
focuses; in AF-C mode, the main focus
point is displayed after the other focus points have turned off.
101
AF-area mode can be selected by pressing the AF-mode button
and rotating the sub-command dial until the desired setting is
displayed in the viewfinder and control panel.
Control panel
AF-mode button
Sub-command
dial
Viewfinder
A 3D-tracking
When the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, the colors in the
area surrounding the focus point are stored in the camera.
Consequently 3D-tracking may not produce the desired results with
subjects that are similar in color to the background or that occupy a
very small area of the frame.
102
A AF-Area Mode
AF-area mode is shown in the control panel and viewfinder.
AF-area mode
Control panel
Viewfinder
Viewfinder focus-point
display
Single-point AF
9-point dynamicarea AF *
25-point
dynamic-area AF *
72-point
dynamic-area AF *
153-point
dynamic-area AF *
3D-tracking
Group-area AF
Auto-area AF
* Only active focus point is displayed in the viewfinder. Remaining focus points provide
information to assist focus operation.
103
A AF-S/AF-I Teleconverters
If 3D-tracking or auto-area AF is selected for AF-area mode when an
AF-S/AF-I teleconverter is used, single-point AF will automatically be
selected at combined apertures slower than f/5.6.
A See Also
For information on:
• How autofocus adjusts to changes in the distance to the subject, see
A > Custom Setting a3 (Focus tracking with lock-on, 0 260).
• Choosing whether the camera detects and focuses on faces when
3D-tracking is selected for AF-area mode, see A > Custom Settings
a4 (3D-tracking face-detection, 0 260).
• Choosing the area monitored by pressing the shutter-release button
halfway when 3D-tracking is selected for AF-area mode, see A >
Custom Settings a5 (3D-tracking watch area, 0 261).
• Choosing different focus points and/or AF-area modes for portraitand landscape-orientation photographs, see A > Custom Settings a7
(Store by orientation, 0 261).
• Limiting AF-area mode selection, see A > Custom Settings a9 (Limit
AF-area mode selection, 0 261).
• Choosing how the focus point is displayed, see A > Custom Settings
a12 (Focus point options, 0 262).
• Using the main command dial to choose the AF-area mode, see A >
Custom Settings f4 (Customize command dials) > Change main/
sub (0 269).
• The autofocus options available in live view or during movie
recording, see “Choosing an AF-Area Mode” (0 42).
104
Focus Point Selection
The camera focuses using 153 focus
points, of which 55 shown in the
illustration can be selected manually,
allowing photographs to be composed
with the main subject positioned almost
anywhere in the frame. Follow the steps below to choose the
focus point (in group-area AF, you can follow these steps to
choose a group of focus points).
1 Rotate the focus selector
lock to ●.
This allows the multi
selector to be used to
select the focus point.
Focus selector lock
2 Select the focus point.
Use the multi selector to
select the focus point in the
viewfinder while the
exposure meters are on.
The center focus point can
be selected by pressing the
center of the multi selector.
105
The focus selector lock can
be rotated to the locked (L)
position following
selection to prevent the
selected focus point from
changing when the multi
selector is pressed.
A The Sub-selector
The sub-selector can be used in
place of the multi selector to
select the focus point. Focus and
exposure lock while the center
of the sub-selector is pressed
(0 108, 137). Use the subselector as shown; pressing the Sub-selector
sides may not have the desired
effect. Be careful not to put your fingers or fingernails in your eye when
using the sub-selector.
A Auto-area AF
The focus point for auto-area AF is selected automatically; manual
focus-point selection is not available.
106
A See Also
For information on:
• Choosing the number of focus points that can be selected using the
multi selector, see A > Custom Setting a6 (Number of focus points,
0 261).
• Choosing separate focus points and/or AF-area modes for vertical
and horizontal orientations, see A > Custom Setting a7 (Store by
orientation, 0 261).
• Setting focus-point selection to “wrap around,” see A > Custom
Setting a11 (Focus point wrap-around, 0 262).
• Choosing when the focus point is illuminated, see A > Custom
Setting a12 (Focus point options, 0 262).
• Changing the role played by the sub-selector, see A > Custom
Setting f1 (Custom control assignment) > Sub-selector (0 268)
and Sub-selector center (0 268).
• Changing the role of the multi selector center button, see A >
Custom Setting f2 (Multi selector center button, 0 268).
107
Focus Lock
Focus lock can be used to change the composition after
focusing, making it possible to focus on a subject that will not be
in a focus point in the final composition. If the camera is unable
to focus using autofocus (0 110), focus lock can also be used to
recompose the photograph after focusing on another object at
the same distance as your original subject. Focus lock is most
effective when an option other than auto-area AF is selected for
AF-area mode (0 100).
1 Focus.
Position the subject in the
selected focus point and
press the shutter-release
button halfway to initiate
focus. Check that the infocus indicator (I) appears
in the viewfinder.
2 Lock focus.
AF-C focus mode (0 98): With the
shutter-release button pressed
halfway (q), press the center of the
sub-selector (w) to lock both focus
and exposure (an AE-L icon will be
displayed in the viewfinder). Focus
will remain locked while the center
of the sub-selector is pressed, even
if you later remove your finger from
the shutter-release button.
108
Shutter-release button
Sub-selector
AF-S focus mode: Focus locks automatically when the in-focus
indicator (I) appears, and remains locked until you remove
your finger from the shutter-release button. Focus can also be
locked by pressing the center of the sub-selector (see above).
3 Recompose the
photograph and shoot.
Focus will remain locked
between shots if you keep
the shutter-release button
pressed halfway (AF-S) or
keep the center of the subselector pressed, allowing several photographs in succession
to be taken at the same focus setting.
Do not change the distance between the camera and the
subject while focus lock is in effect. If the subject moves, focus
again at the new distance.
A Locking Focus with the AF-ON Button
During viewfinder photography, focus can be locked using the AF-ON
button in place of the shutter-release button (0 99). If AF-ON only is
selected for Custom Setting a8 (AF activation, 0 261), the camera will
not focus when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway; instead,
the camera will focus when the AF-ON button is pressed, at which point
focus will lock and remain locked until the AF-ON button is pressed
again.
A See Also
For information on using the shutter-release button to lock exposure,
see A > Custom Setting c1 (Shutter-release button AE-L, 0 263).
109
A Getting Good Results with Autofocus
Autofocus does not perform well under the conditions listed below.
The shutter release may be disabled if the camera is unable to focus
under these conditions, or the in-focus indicator (●) may be displayed
and the camera may sound a beep, allowing the shutter to be released
even when the subject is not in focus. In these cases, use manual focus
(0 111) or use focus lock (0 108) to focus on another subject at the
same distance and then recompose the photograph.
There is little or no contrast between the subject and
the background.
Example: Subject is the same color as the background.
The focus point contains objects at different
distances from the camera.
Example: Subject is inside a cage.
The subject is dominated by regular geometric
patterns.
Example: Blinds or a row of windows in a skyscraper.
The focus point contains areas of sharply
contrasting brightness.
Example: Subject is half in the shade.
Background objects appear larger than the subject.
Example: A building is in the frame behind the subject.
The subject contains many fine details.
Example: A field of flowers or other subjects that are small or lack
variation in brightness.
110
Manual Focus
Manual focus is available for lenses that do not support
autofocus (non-AF NIKKOR lenses) or when the autofocus does
not produce the desired results (0 110).
• AF lenses: Set the lens focus
Focus-mode selector
mode switch (if present) and
camera focus-mode selector
to M.
D AF Lenses
Do not use AF lenses with the lens focus-mode switch set to M and
the camera focus-mode selector set to AF. Failure to observe this
precaution could damage the camera or lens. This does not apply to
AF-S and AF-P lenses, which can be used in M mode without setting
the camera focus-mode selector to M.
• Manual focus lenses: Focus manually.
To focus manually, adjust the lens focus
ring until the image displayed on the
clear matte field in the viewfinder is in
focus. Photographs can be taken at any
time, even when the image is not in
focus.
111
❚❚ The Electronic Rangefinder
The viewfinder focus indicator can be
used to confirm whether the subject in
the selected focus point is in focus (the
focus point can be selected from any of
the 55 focus points). After positioning the
subject in the selected focus point, press
the shutter-release button halfway and
rotate the lens focus ring until the in-focus indicator (I) is
displayed. Note that with the subjects listed in “Getting Good
Results with Autofocus” (0 110), the in-focus indicator may
sometimes be displayed when the subject is not in focus;
confirm focus in the viewfinder before shooting. For information
on using the electronic rangefinder with optional AF-S/AF-I
teleconverters, see “AF-S/AF-I Teleconverters and Available
Focus Points” (0 96).
A AF-P Lenses
When an AF-P lens (0 281) is used in manual focus mode, the in-focus
indicator will flash in the viewfinder (or in live view, the focus point will
flash in the monitor) to warn that continuing to rotate the focus ring in
the current direction will not bring the subject into focus.
A Focal Plane Position
To determine the distance between
your subject and the camera, measure
from the focal plane mark (E) on the
camera body. The distance between the
lens mounting flange and the focal
plane is 46.5 mm (1.83 in.).
46.5 mm
Focal plane mark
112
Release Mode
Choosing a Release Mode
To choose a release mode, press the
release mode dial lock release and turn
the release mode dial so that the pointer
aligns with the desired setting.
Pointer
Mode
S
CL
CH
Q
QC
E
Description
Single frame: The camera takes one photograph each time the
shutter-release button is pressed.
Continuous low speed: While shutter-release button is held down,
camera takes photographs at frame rate selected for Custom
Setting d1 (CL mode shooting speed, 0 114, 264).
Continuous high speed: While shutter-release button is held down,
camera takes photographs at frame rate given in “Power Source
and Frame Rate” (0 114). Use for active subjects.
Quiet shutter-release: As for single frame, except that the mirror
does not click back into place while the shutter-release button is
fully pressed, allowing the user to control the timing of the click
made by the mirror, which is also quieter than in single frame
mode. In addition, a beep does not sound regardless of the
setting selected for Beep options > Beep on/off in the setup
menu (0 274).
QC (quiet continuous) shutter-release: While shutter-release button is
held down, camera records up to 3 frames per second. Camera
noise is reduced.
Self-timer: Take pictures with the self-timer (0 116).
113
Mode
Description
Mirror up: Choose this mode to minimize camera shake in
telephoto or close-up photography or in other situations in
MUP which the slightest camera movement can result in blurred
photographs (0 118).
Power Source and Frame Rate
The maximum frame advance rate varies with the power source.
The figures below are the average maximum frame rates
available with continuous-servo AF, manual or shutter-priority
auto exposure, a shutter speed of 1/250 s or faster, settings other
than Custom Setting d1 at default values, and memory
remaining in the memory buffer.
Power source
Camera with EN-EL15a battery or with
EP-5B power connector and EH-5c/
EH-5b AC adapter
Camera with MB-D18 (EN-EL15a or AA)
Camera with MB-D18 (EN-EL18c)
Maximum frame rate (fps)
CH
CL
7
1–6
7
9
1–6
1–8
The stated rates may not be available under some conditions.
Frame rate drops with some lenses, at slow shutter speeds, very
small apertures (high f-numbers), or high ISO sensitivities (Hi 0.3
to Hi 2), or when ISO sensitivity is altered via auto ISO sensitivity
control (0 121), flicker is detected with Enable selected for
Flicker reduction > Flicker reduction setting in the photo
shooting menu (0 254), vibration reduction (available with VR
lenses) is on, the battery is low, the AA batteries inserted in the
MB-D18 battery pack are low or cold, or a non-CPU lens is
attached with Aperture ring selected for Custom Setting f4
(Customize command dials) > Aperture setting (0 269).
114
A The Memory Buffer
The camera is equipped with a memory buffer for temporary storage,
allowing shooting to continue while photographs are being saved to
the memory card. Note, however, that frame rate will drop when the
buffer is full (tAA).
The approximate number of images that
can be stored in the memory buffer at
current settings is shown in the exposurecount displays in the viewfinder and
control panel while the shutter-release
button is pressed halfway, and can be
viewed in the monitor during live view. The
number may drop briefly immediately after the camera is turned on.
While photographs are being recorded to the memory card, the
memory card access lamp will light. Depending on shooting
conditions and memory card performance, recording may take from a
few seconds to a few minutes. Do not remove the memory card or
remove or disconnect the power source until the access lamp has gone
out. If the camera is switched off while data remain in the buffer, the
power will not turn off until all images in the buffer have been
recorded. If the battery is exhausted while images remain in the buffer,
the shutter release will be disabled and the images transferred to the
memory card.
A See Also
For information on:
• Choosing the order in which the photos in each burst are displayed
after shooting, see D > After burst, show (0 249).
• Choosing the maximum number of photographs that can be taken in
a single burst, see A > Custom Setting d2 (Max. continuous release,
0 264).
• The number of pictures that can be taken in a single burst, see
“Memory Card Capacity” (0 362).
115
Self-Timer Mode (E)
The self-timer can be used to reduce camera shake or for selfportraits.
1 Select self-timer mode.
Press the release mode dial lock
release and turn the release mode dial
to E.
2 Frame the photograph and focus.
In single-servo AF (0 98),
photographs can only be taken if the
in-focus (I) indicator appears in the
viewfinder.
A Close the Viewfinder Eyepiece Shutter
When taking photos without your eye to
the viewfinder, close the viewfinder
eyepiece shutter to prevent light
entering via the viewfinder from
appearing in photographs or interfering
with exposure.
116
3 Start the timer.
Press the shutter-release
button all the way down to
start the timer. The selftimer lamp will start to
flash. Two seconds before the photograph is taken, the selftimer lamp will stop flashing. The shutter will be released
about ten seconds after the timer starts.
To turn the self-timer off before a photograph is taken, turn the
release mode dial to another setting.
A See Also
For information on:
• Choosing the duration of the self-timer, the number of shots taken,
and the interval between shots, see A > Custom Setting c3 (Selftimer; 0 264).
• The beeps that sound when the self-timer is used, see B > Beep
options (0 274).
117
Mirror up Mode (MUP)
Choose this mode to minimize blurring
caused by camera movement when the
mirror is raised. To use mirror-up mode,
press the release mode dial lock release
and rotate the release mode dial to MUP
(mirror up). After pressing the shutterrelease button halfway to set focus and
exposure, press the shutter-release
button the rest of the way down to raise
the mirror. Z will be displayed in the
control panel; press the shutter-release
button all the way down again to take the picture (in live view,
there is no need to raise the mirror; the picture is taken the first
time the shutter-release button is pressed all the way down).
A beep will sound, unless Off is selected for Beep options >
Beep on/off in the setup menu (0 274). The mirror lowers when
shooting ends.
D Mirror Up
While the mirror is raised, photos cannot be framed in the viewfinder
and autofocus and metering will not be performed.
A Mirror up Mode
A picture will be taken automatically if no operations are performed for
about 30 s after the mirror is raised.
A Preventing Blur
To prevent blurring caused by camera movement, press the shutterrelease button smoothly. Use of a tripod is recommended.
A See Also
For information on using the electronic front-curtain shutter to further
reduce blur, see A > Custom Setting d6 (Electronic front-curtain
shutter, 0 265).
118
ISO Sensitivity
Manual Adjustment
The camera’s sensitivity to light can be adjusted according to the
amount of light available. Choose from settings that range from
ISO 64 and ISO 25600 in steps equivalent to 1/3 EV. Settings of
from about 0.3 to 1 EV below ISO 64 and 0.3 to 2 EV above ISO
25600 are also available for special situations. The higher the ISO
sensitivity, the less light needed to make an exposure, allowing
higher shutter speeds or smaller apertures.
ISO sensitivity can be adjusted by pressing the S (Q) button
and rotating the main command dial until the desired setting is
displayed in the control panel and viewfinder.
S (Q) button
Control panel
Viewfinder
Main command dial
A The ISO Sensitivity Menu
ISO sensitivity can also be adjusted using the
ISO sensitivity settings option in the photo
shooting menu (0 252).
119
A ISO Sensitivity
The higher the ISO sensitivity, the less light needed to make an
exposure, allowing faster shutter speeds or smaller apertures, but the
more likely the image is to be affected by noise (randomly-spaced
bright pixels, fog, or lines). Noise is particularly likely at settings
between Hi 0.3 and Hi 2.
A Hi 0.3–Hi 2
The settings Hi 0.3 through Hi 2 correspond to ISO sensitivities 0.3–
2 EV over ISO 25600 (ISO 32000–102400 equivalent).
A Lo 0.3–Lo 1
The settings Lo 0.3 through Lo 1 correspond to ISO sensitivities 0.3–
1 EV below ISO 64 (ISO 50–32 equivalent). Use for larger apertures
when lighting is bright. Contrast is slightly higher than normal; in most
cases, ISO sensitivities of ISO 64 or above are recommended.
A See Also
For information on:
• Choosing the ISO sensitivity step size, see A > Custom Setting b1
(ISO sensitivity step value; 0 262).
• Displaying ISO sensitivity in the control panel, see A > Custom
Setting d3 (ISO display; 0 264).
• Reducing noise in photos taken at high ISO sensitivities, see C >
High ISO NR (0 253).
• Reducing noise in movies shot at high ISO sensitivities, see 1 > High
ISO NR (0 258).
120
Auto ISO Sensitivity Control
If On is selected for ISO sensitivity settings > Auto ISO
sensitivity control in the photo shooting menu, ISO sensitivity
will automatically be adjusted if optimal exposure cannot be
achieved at the value selected by the user (ISO sensitivity is
adjusted appropriately when the flash is used).
1 Select Auto ISO sensitivity control.
Select ISO sensitivity settings in the
photo shooting menu, highlight Auto
ISO sensitivity control and press 2.
2 Select On.
Highlight On and press J (if Off is
selected, ISO sensitivity will remain
fixed at the value selected by the
user).
121
3 Adjust settings.
The maximum value for auto ISO
sensitivity can be selected using
Maximum sensitivity (the minimum
value for auto ISO sensitivity is
automatically set to ISO 64; note that
if the ISO sensitivity selected by the
user is higher than that chosen for Maximum sensitivity, the
value selected by the user will be used instead). In exposure
modes P and A, sensitivity will only be adjusted if
underexposure would result at the shutter speed selected for
Minimum shutter speed (1/4000–30 s, or Auto; in modes S and
M, ISO sensitivity will be adjusted for optimal exposure at the
shutter speed selected by the user). If Auto is selected, the
camera will choose the minimum shutter speed based on the
focal length of the lens; choosing fast speeds when
photographing fast-moving subjects reduces blur. Press J to
exit when settings are complete.
To choose the maximum ISO sensitivity for photos taken
using an optional flash unit, use Maximum sensitivity
with M. Selecting Same as without flash sets the maximum
ISO sensitivity for flash photography to the value currently
selected for Maximum sensitivity.
When On is selected, the viewfinder
and control panel show ISO AUTO. When
sensitivity is altered from the value
selected by the user, these indicators
flash and the altered value is shown in
the viewfinder and control panel.
122
A Minimum Shutter Speed
Auto shutter-speed selection can be fine-tuned by highlighting Auto
and pressing 2: for example, values faster than those usually selected
automatically can be used with telephoto lenses to reduce blur. Note,
however, that Auto functions only with CPU lenses; if a non-CPU lens is
used without lens data, minimum shutter speed is fixed at 1/30 s.
Shutter speeds may drop below the selected minimum if optimum
exposure cannot be achieved at the ISO sensitivity chosen for
Maximum sensitivity.
A Turning Auto ISO Sensitivity Control On or Off
You can turn auto ISO sensitivity control on or off by pressing the
S (Q) button and rotating the sub-command dial. The control panel
and viewfinder display ISO AUTO icons when auto ISO sensitivity control
is on and ISO when it is off.
A Auto ISO Sensitivity Control
When a flash is used, minimum shutter speed will be set to the value
selected for Minimum shutter speed unless this value is faster than
Custom Setting e1 (Flash sync speed, 0 266) or slower than Custom
Setting e2 (Flash shutter speed, 0 266), in which case the value
selected for Custom Setting e2 will be used instead. Note that ISO
sensitivity may be raised automatically when auto ISO sensitivity
control is used in combination with slow sync flash modes (available
with compatible optional flash units), possibly preventing the camera
from selecting slow shutter speeds.
A See Also
For information on choosing the reference used to set exposure when
a flash is used with auto ISO sensitivity control, see A > Custom Setting
e4 (Auto M ISO sensitivity control, 0 267).
123
Exposure
Metering
Metering determines how the camera sets exposure. The
following options are available:
Option
L
M
N
t
124
Description
Matrix: Produces natural results in most situations. Camera
meters wide area of the frame and sets exposure according to
tone distribution, color, composition, and, with type G, E, or D
lenses (0 281), distance information (3D color matrix metering
III; with other CPU lenses, camera uses color matrix metering III,
which does not include 3D distance information).
Center-weighted: Camera meters entire frame but assigns greatest
weight to center area (if CPU lens is attached, size of area can be
selected using Custom Setting b6, Center-weighted area,
0 263; if non-CPU or AF-S Fisheye NIKKOR 8–15mm f/3.5–4.5E
ED lens is attached, area is equivalent to circle 12 mm in
diameter). Classic meter for portraits; recommended when
using filters with an exposure factor (filter factor) over 1×.
Spot: Camera meters circle 4 mm (0.16 in.) in diameter
(approximately 1.5% of frame). Circle is centered on current
focus point, making it possible to meter off-center subjects (if
non-CPU or AF-S Fisheye NIKKOR 8–15mm f/3.5–4.5E ED lens is
used or if auto-area AF is in effect, camera will meter center
focus point). Ensures that subject will be correctly exposed,
even when background is much brighter or darker.
Highlight-weighted: Camera assigns greatest weight to highlights.
Use to reduce loss of detail in highlights, for example when
photographing spotlit performers on-stage.
To choose a metering option, press the Y button and rotate the
main command dial until the desired setting is displayed in the
viewfinder and control panel.
Control panel
Y button
Main command
dial
Viewfinder
A Non-CPU Lens Data
Specifying the focal length and maximum aperture of non-CPU lenses
using the Non-CPU lens data option in the setup menu (0 218)
allows the camera to use color matrix metering when matrix is selected
and improves the accuracy of center-weighted and spot metering.
Center-weighted metering will be used if highlight-weighted metering
is selected with non-CPU lenses or if matrix metering is selected with
non-CPU lenses for which lens data have not been supplied. Note that
center-weighted metering may also be used if highlight-weighted
metering is selected with certain CPU lenses (AI-P NIKKOR lenses and
AF lenses that are not of type G, E, or D; 0 284).
A See Also
For information on:
• Choosing whether matrix metering uses face detection, see A >
Custom Setting b5 (Matrix metering, 0 263).
• Making separate adjustments to optimal exposure for each metering
method, see A > Custom Setting b7 (Fine-tune optimal exposure,
0 263).
125
Exposure Mode
To determine how the camera sets shutter speed and aperture
when adjusting exposure, press the I button and rotate the
main command dial until the desired option appears in the
control panel.
I button
Mode
e
f
g
h
126
Main command
dial
Description
Programmed auto (0 128): Camera sets shutter speed and
aperture for optimal exposure. Recommended for snapshots
and in other situations in which there is little time to adjust
camera settings.
Shutter-priority auto (0 129): User chooses shutter speed; camera
selects aperture for best results. Use to freeze or blur motion.
Aperture-priority auto (0 130): User chooses aperture; camera
selects shutter speed for best results. Use to blur background or
bring both foreground and background into focus.
Manual (0 131): User controls both shutter speed and aperture.
Set shutter speed to Bulb (A) or Time (%) for long timeexposures.
A Lens Types
When using a CPU lens equipped with an aperture ring (0 284), lock
the aperture ring at the minimum aperture (highest f-number). Type G
and E lenses are not equipped with an aperture ring.
When using non-CPU lenses (0 218), select exposure mode A
(aperture-priority auto) or M (manual). In other modes, exposure mode
A is automatically selected when a non-CPU lens is attached (0 284).
The exposure mode indicator (P or S) will flash in the control panel and
A will be displayed in the viewfinder.
A Depth-of-Field Preview
To preview the effects of aperture, press and
hold the Pv button. The lens will be stopped
down to the aperture value selected by the
camera (modes P and S) or the value chosen
by the user (modes A and M), allowing depth
of field to be previewed in the viewfinder.
Pv button
A Custom Setting e5—Modeling Flash
This setting controls whether optional flash units that support the
Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS; 0 288) will emit a modeling flash
when the Pv button is pressed.
127
P: Programmed Auto
In this mode, the camera automatically adjusts shutter speed
and aperture according to a built-in program to ensure optimal
exposure in most situations.
A Flexible Program
In exposure mode P, different combinations
of shutter speed and aperture can be
selected by rotating the main command dial
while the exposure meters are on (“flexible
program”). All combinations produce the
same exposure. While flexible program is in
effect, an asterisk (“U”) appears in the control
Main command dial
panel. To restore default shutter speed and
aperture settings, rotate the dial until the
asterisk is no longer displayed, choose another mode, or turn the
camera off.
A See Also
For information on activating the exposure meters, see “The Standby
Timer (Viewfinder Photography)” (0 34).
128
S: Shutter-Priority Auto
In shutter-priority auto, you choose the shutter speed while the
camera automatically selects the aperture that will produce the
optimal exposure.
To choose a shutter speed, rotate the
main command dial while the exposure
meters are on. Shutter speed can be set
to “p” or to values between 30 s and
1
/8000 s. Shutter speed can be locked at the
selected setting (0 136).
Main command dial
129
A: Aperture-Priority Auto
In aperture-priority auto, you choose the aperture while the
camera automatically selects the shutter speed that will produce
the optimal exposure.
To choose an aperture between the
minimum and maximum values for the
lens, rotate the sub-command dial while
the exposure meters are on. Aperture can
be locked at the selected setting (0 136).
Sub-command dial
A Non-CPU Lenses (0 284)
Use the lens aperture ring to adjust
aperture. If the maximum aperture of the
lens has been specified using the NonCPU lens data item in setup menu
(0 218) when a non-CPU lens is attached,
the current f-number will be displayed in
the viewfinder and control panel,
rounded to the nearest full stop.
Otherwise the aperture displays will show only the number of stops
(F, with maximum aperture displayed as FA) and the f-number must
be read from the lens aperture ring.
130
M: Manual
In manual exposure mode, you control both shutter speed and
aperture. While the exposure meters are on, rotate the main
command dial to choose a shutter speed, and the sub-command
dial to set aperture. Shutter speed can be set to “p” or to
values between 30 s and 1/8000 s, or the shutter can be held open
indefinitely for a long time-exposure (A or %, 0 133).
Aperture can be set to values between the minimum and
maximum values for the lens. Use the exposure indicators to
check exposure.
Aperture
Sub-command dial
Shutter speed
Main command dial
Shutter speed and aperture can be locked at the selected setting
(0 136).
131
A AF Micro NIKKOR Lenses
Provided that an external exposure meter is used, the exposure ratio
need only be taken into account when the lens aperture ring is used to
set aperture.
A Exposure Indicators
The exposure indicators in the viewfinder and control panel show
whether the photograph would be under- or over-exposed at current
settings. Depending on the option chosen for Custom Setting b2 (EV
steps for exposure cntrl, 0 262), the amount of under- or overexposure is shown in increments of 1/3 EV, 1/2 EV, or 1 EV. If the limits of
the exposure metering system are exceeded, the displays will flash.
Custom Setting b2 set to 1/3 step
Underexposed by Overexposed by over
1/3 EV
3 EV
Optimal exposure
Control panel
Viewfinder
A See Also
For information on reversing the exposure indicators so that negative
values are displayed on the right and positive values on the left, see
A > Custom Setting f7 (Reverse indicators, 0 269).
132
Long Time-Exposures (M Mode Only)
Select the following shutter speeds for long time-exposures of
moving lights, the stars, night scenery, or fireworks.
• Bulb (A): The shutter remains open while the shutterrelease button is held down. To prevent blur, use a tripod or an
optional wireless remote controller or remote cord (0 295).
• Time (%): Start the exposure by using the shutter-release
button on the camera, optional remote cord, or wireless
remote controller. The shutter remains open until the button is
pressed a second time.
Shutter speed: A (35-second exposure)
Aperture: f/25
1 Ready the camera.
Mount the camera on a tripod or place it on a stable, level
surface.
A Long Time-Exposures
Close the viewfinder eyepiece shutter to prevent the photograph
being affected by light entering via the viewfinder (0 116). Nikon
recommends using a fully charged battery or an optional AC
adapter and power connector to prevent loss of power while the
shutter is open. Note that noise (bright spots, randomly-spaced
bright pixels or fog) may be present in long exposures. Bright spots
and fog can be reduced by choosing On for Long exposure NR in
the photo shooting menu (0 253).
133
2 Select exposure mode M.
Press the I button and rotate the main command dial until
M is displayed in the control panel.
I button
Main command
dial
3 Choose a shutter speed.
While the exposure meters are on,
rotate the main command dial to
choose a shutter speed of Bulb
(A) or Time (%). The exposure
indicators do not appear when Bulb
(A) or Time (%) is selected.
Bulb
Time
4 Open the shutter.
Bulb: After focusing, press the shutter-release button on the
camera or optional remote cord or wireless remote controller
all the way down. Keep the shutter-release button pressed
until the exposure is complete.
Time: Press the shutter-release button all the way down.
134
5 Close the shutter.
Bulb: Take your finger off the shutter-release button.
Time: Press the shutter-release button all the way down.
135
Shutter-Speed and Aperture Lock
Shutter speed lock is available in shutter-priority auto and
manual exposure modes, aperture lock in aperture-priority auto
and manual exposure modes. Shutter speed and aperture lock
are not available in programmed auto exposure mode.
1 Assign shutter speed and aperture lock to a camera control.
Assign Shutter spd & aperture lock to a control using
Custom Setting f1 (Custom control assignment, 0 268).
2 Lock shutter speed and/or aperture.
Shutter speed (exposure modes S and M):
Press the selected control and rotate
the main command dial until F icons
appear in the viewfinder and control
panel.
To unlock shutter speed, press the
control and rotate the main command dial until the F icons
disappear from the displays.
Aperture (exposure modes A and M): Press
the selected control and rotate the
sub-command dial until F icons
appear in the viewfinder and the
control panel.
To unlock aperture, press the control
and rotate the sub-command dial until the F icons disappear
from the displays.
A See Also
For information on keeping shutter speed and/or aperture locked at
the selected values, see A > Custom Setting f3 (Shutter spd &
aperture lock; 0 268).
136
Autoexposure (AE) Lock
Use autoexposure lock to recompose photographs after using
center-weighted metering and spot metering (0 124) to meter
exposure.
1 Lock exposure.
Position the subject in the selected
focus point and press the shutterrelease button halfway. With the
shutter-release button pressed
halfway and the subject positioned in
the focus point, press the center of the
sub-selector to lock exposure (if you
are using autofocus, confirm that the
I in-focus indicator appears in the
viewfinder).
Shutter-release button
Sub-selector
While exposure lock is in effect, an AE-L
indicator will appear in the viewfinder.
2 Recompose the
photograph.
Keeping the center of the
sub-selector pressed,
recompose the
photograph and shoot.
137
A Spot Metering
In spot metering, exposure will be locked at the value metered at the
selected focus point (0 124).
A Adjusting Shutter Speed and Aperture
While exposure lock is in effect, the following settings can be adjusted
without altering the metered value for exposure:
Exposure mode
Setting
P
Shutter speed and aperture (flexible program; 0 128)
S
Shutter speed
A
Aperture
The new values can be confirmed in the viewfinder and control panel.
Note that the metering cannot be changed while exposure lock is in
effect.
A See Also
For information on using the shutter-release button to lock exposure,
see A > Custom Setting c1 (Shutter-release button AE-L, 0 263). If
On (half press) is selected, exposure will lock when the shutter-release
button is pressed halfway.
138
Exposure Compensation
Exposure compensation is used to alter exposure from the value
suggested by the camera, making pictures brighter or darker. It
is most effective when used with center-weighted or spot
metering (0 124). Choose from values between –5 EV
(underexposure) and +5 EV (overexposure) in increments of
1
/3 EV. In general, positive values make the subject brighter while
negative values make it darker.
–1 EV
No exposure
compensation
+1 EV
To choose a value for exposure compensation, press the
E button and rotate the main command dial until the desired
value is displayed in the viewfinder or control panel.
E button
Main command dial
139
±0 EV
(E button pressed)
–0.3 EV
+2.0 EV
At values other than ±0.0, the 0 at the
center of the exposure indicators will
flash (except in exposure mode M) and a
E icon will be displayed in the
viewfinder and control panel after you
release the E button. The current value
for exposure compensation can be confirmed in the exposure
indicator by pressing the E button.
Normal exposure can be restored by setting exposure
compensation to ±0.0. Exposure compensation is not reset
when the camera is turned off.
A Exposure Mode M
In exposure mode M, exposure compensation affects only the
exposure indicator; shutter speed and aperture do not change.
A Using a Flash
When a flash is used, exposure compensation affects both flash level
and exposure, altering the brightness of both the main subject and the
background. Custom Setting e3 (Exposure comp. for flash, 0 266)
can be used to restrict the effects of exposure compensation to the
background only.
140
A See Also
For information on:
• Choosing the size of the increments available for exposure
compensation, see A > Custom Setting b3 (Exp./flash comp. step
value, 0 262).
• Making adjustments to exposure compensation without pressing the
E button, see A > Custom Setting b4 (Easy exposure
compensation, 0 263).
• Automatically varying exposure, flash level, white balance, or Active
D-Lighting, see “Bracketing” (0 142).
141
Bracketing
Bracketing automatically varies exposure, flash level, Active
D-Lighting (ADL), or white balance slightly with each shot,
“bracketing” the current value. Choose in situations in which
getting the right settings is difficult and there is not time to
check results and adjust settings with each shot, or to
experiment with different settings for the same subject.
Bracketing is adjusted using the Auto
bracketing set option in the photo
shooting menu, which contains the
following options:
• AE & flash bracketing: The camera varies
exposure and flash level over a series of
photographs (0 143). Note that flash
bracketing is available in i-TTL and, where supported, auto
aperture (qA) flash control modes only (0 189, 288).
• AE bracketing: The camera varies exposure over a series of
photographs.
• Flash bracketing: The camera varies flash level over a series of
photographs.
• WB bracketing: The camera creates multiple copies of each
photograph, each with a different white balance (0 148).
• ADL bracketing: The camera varies Active D-Lighting over a series
of photographs (0 152).
142
❚❚ Exposure and Flash Bracketing
To vary exposure and/or flash level over a series of photographs:
Exposure modified by:
0 EV
Exposure modified by:
–1 EV
Exposure modified by:
+1 EV
1 Choose the number of shots.
Pressing the BKT button, rotate the main command dial to
choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence. The
number of shots is shown in the control panel.
Number of shots
BKT button
Main command
dial
Exposure and flash
bracketing indicator
At settings other than zero, a M
icon and exposure and flash
bracketing indicator will appear in the control panel and BKT
will be displayed in the viewfinder.
143
2 Select an exposure increment.
Pressing the BKT button, rotate the sub-command dial to
choose the exposure increment.
Exposure increment
BKT button
Sub-command
dial
At default settings, the size of the increment can be chosen
from 0.3 (1/3), 0.7 (2/3), 1, 2, and 3 EV. The bracketing programs
with an increment of 0.3 (1/3) EV are listed below.
Control panel display
No. of shots
Bracketing order (EVs)
0
0
3
0/+0.3/+0.7
3
0/–0.7/–0.3
2
0/+0.3
2
0/–0.3
3
0/–0.3/+0.3
5
0/–0.7/–0.3/+0.3/+0.7
0/–1.0/–0.7/–0.3/+0.3/
7
+0.7/+1.0
0/–1.3/–1.0/–0.7/–0.3/
9
+0.3/+0.7/+1.0/+1.3
Note that for exposure increments of 2 EV or more, the
maximum number of shots is 5; if a higher value was selected
in Step 1, the number of shots will automatically be set to 5.
144
3 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
The camera will vary exposure and/or flash level shot-by-shot
according to the bracketing program selected. Modifications
to exposure are added to those made with exposure
compensation (0 139).
While bracketing is in effect, a bracketing progress indicator
will be displayed in the viewfinder and control panel. A
segment will disappear from the indicator after each shot.
No. shots: 3; increment: 0.7
Display after first shot
145
❚❚ Canceling Bracketing
To cancel bracketing, press the BKT button and rotate the main
command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing
sequence is zero (r) and M is no longer displayed. The
program last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing is
activated. Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a twobutton reset (0 209), although in this case the bracketing
program will not be restored the next time bracketing is
activated.
A See Also
For information on:
• Choosing the size of the increment, see A > Custom Setting b2 (EV
steps for exposure cntrl, 0 262).
• Choosing the order in which bracketing is performed, see A >
Custom Setting e7 (Bracketing order, 0 267).
• Choosing the role of the BKT button, see A > Custom Setting f1
(Custom control assignment) > BKT button + y (0 268).
146
A Exposure and Flash Bracketing
In continuous low speed, continuous high speed, and quiet
continuous modes, shooting will pause after the number of shots
specified in the bracketing program have been taken. Shooting will
resume the next time the shutter-release button is pressed.
If the memory card fills before all shots in the sequence have been
taken, shooting can be resumed from the next shot in the sequence
after the memory card has been replaced or shots have been deleted
to make room on the memory card. If the camera is turned off before
all shots in the sequence have been taken, bracketing will resume from
the next shot in the sequence when the camera is turned on.
A Exposure Bracketing
The camera modifies exposure by varying shutter speed and aperture
(programmed auto), aperture (shutter-priority auto), or shutter speed
(aperture-priority auto, manual exposure mode). If On is selected for
ISO sensitivity settings > Auto ISO sensitivity control (0 121) in
modes P, S, and A, the camera will automatically vary ISO sensitivity for
optimum exposure when the limits of the camera exposure system are
exceeded; in mode M, the camera will first use auto ISO sensitivity
control to bring exposure as close as possible to the optimum and then
bracket this exposure by varying shutter speed. Custom Setting e6
(Auto bracketing (mode M), 0 267) can be used to change how the
camera performs exposure and flash bracketing in manual exposure
mode. Bracketing can be performed by varying flash level together
with shutter speed and/or aperture, or by varying flash level alone.
147
❚❚ White Balance Bracketing
The camera creates multiple copies of each photograph, each
with a different white balance.
1 Choose the number of shots.
Pressing the BKT button, rotate the main command dial to
choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence. The
number of shots is shown in the control panel.
Number of shots
BKT button
Main command
dial
WB bracketing indicator
At settings other than zero, a W
icon and WB bracketing indicator
will appear in the control panel and BKT will be displayed in
the viewfinder.
148
2 Select a white balance increment.
Pressing the BKT button, rotate the sub-command dial to
choose the white balance adjustment. Each increment is
roughly equivalent to 5 mired.
White balance
increment
BKT button
Sub-command
dial
Choose from increments of 1 (5 mired), 2 (10 mired), or
3 (15 mired). Higher B values correspond to increased
amounts of blue, higher A values to increased amounts of
amber (0 161). The bracketing programs with an increment
of 1 are listed below.
Control panel display
No. of White balance
shots
increment
0
1
3
1B
3
1A
2
1B
2
1A
3
1 A, 1 B
5
1 A, 1 B
7
1 A, 1 B
9
1 A, 1 B
Bracketing order
0
0/1 B/2 B
0/2 A/1 A
0/1 B
0/1 A
0/1 A/1 B
0/2 A/1 A/1 B/
2B
0/3 A/2 A/1 A/
1 B/2 B/3 B
0/4 A/3 A/2 A/
1 A/1 B/2 B/3 B/
4B
149
3 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
Each shot will be processed to create the number of copies
specified in the bracketing program, and each copy will have
a different white balance. Modifications to white balance are
added to the white balance adjustment made with white
balance fine-tuning.
If the number of shots in the
bracketing program is greater than
the number of exposures
remaining, n and the icon for
the affected card will flash in the
control panel, a flashing j icon
will appear in the viewfinder, and
the shutter release will be disabled.
Shooting can begin when a new memory card is inserted.
150
❚❚ Canceling Bracketing
To cancel bracketing, press the BKT button and rotate the main
command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing
sequence is zero (r) and W is no longer displayed. The
program last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing is
activated. Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a twobutton reset (0 209), although in this case the bracketing
program will not be restored the next time bracketing is
activated.
A White Balance Bracketing
White balance bracketing is not available at an image quality of NEF
(RAW). Selecting an NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW) + JPEG option cancels
white balance bracketing.
White balance bracketing affects only color temperature (the amberblue axis in the white balance fine-tuning display, 0 161). No
adjustments are made on the green-magenta axis.
In self-timer mode, the number of copies specified in the bracketing
program will be created each time the shutter is released, regardless of
the option selected for Custom Setting c3 (Self-timer) > Number of
shots (0 264).
If the camera is turned off while the memory card access lamp is lit, the
camera will power off only after all photographs in the sequence have
been recorded.
151
❚❚ ADL Bracketing
The camera varies Active D-Lighting over a series of exposures.
1 Choose the number of shots.
Pressing the BKT button, rotate the main command dial to
choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence. The
number of shots is shown in the control panel.
Number of shots
BKT button
Main command ADL bracketing indicator
dial
At settings other than zero, a d icon and an ADL
bracketing indicator appear in the control panel and BKT will
be displayed in the viewfinder. Choose two shots to take one
photograph with Active D-Lighting off and another at a
selected value. Choose three to five shots to take a series of
photographs with Active D-Lighting set to Off, Low, and
Normal (three shots), Off, Low, Normal, and High (four
shots), or Off, Low, Normal, High, and Extra high (five shots).
If you choose more than two shots, proceed to Step 3.
152
2 Select Active D-Lighting.
Pressing the BKT button, rotate the sub-command dial to
choose Active D-Lighting.
BKT button
Sub-command dial
Active D-Lighting is shown in the control panel.
Control panel display
ADL
Y Auto
Z Extra high
P High
Q Normal
R Low
153
3 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
The camera will vary Active D-Lighting shot-by-shot
according to the bracketing program selected. While
bracketing is in effect, a bracketing progress indicator will be
displayed in the control panel. A segment will disappear from
the indicator after each shot.
No. shots: 3
154
Display after first shot
❚❚ Canceling Bracketing
To cancel bracketing, press the BKT button and rotate the main
command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing
sequence is zero (r) and d is no longer displayed. The
program last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing is
activated. Bracketing can also be cancelled by performing a twobutton reset (0 209), although in this case the bracketing
program will not be restored the next time bracketing is
activated.
A ADL Bracketing
In continuous low speed, continuous high speed, and quiet
continuous modes, shooting will pause after the number of shots
specified in the bracketing program have been taken. Shooting will
resume the next time the shutter-release button is pressed.
If the memory card fills before all shots in the sequence have been
taken, shooting can be resumed from the next shot in the sequence
after the memory card has been replaced or shots have been deleted
to make room on the memory card. If the camera is turned off before
all shots in the sequence have been taken, bracketing will resume from
the next shot in the sequence when the camera is turned on.
155
White Balance
White Balance Options
White balance ensures that colors are unaffected by the color of
the light source. Auto white balance is recommended with most
light sources. If the desired results cannot be achieved with auto
white balance, choose an option from the list below or use
preset white balance.
v
D
J
156
Option (Color temp. *)
Auto
Keep white (reduce warm colors;
3500–8000 K)
Normal (3500–8000 K)
Description
White balance is adjusted
automatically for optimal results
with most light sources. For best
results, use type G, E or D lens. If
optional flash fires, results are
adjusted appropriately. Color
Keep warm lighting colors
temperature can be viewed in the
(3500–8000 K)
playback info display after
shooting (0 229).
White balance is adjusted for
natural light, producing colors
Natural light auto (4500–8000 K)
closer to those seen by the naked
eye.
Incandescent (3000 K)
Use under incandescent lighting.
I
Option (Color temp. *)
Fluorescent
Warm-white fluorescent (3000 K)
Description
Use with:
• Sodium-vapor lighting (found in
sports venues).
• Warm-white fluorescent lights.
White fluorescent (3700 K)
• White fluorescent lights.
Sodium-vapor lamps (2700 K)
Cool-white fluorescent (4200 K)
• Cool-white fluorescent lights.
• Daylight white fluorescent
Day white fluorescent (5000 K)
lights.
Daylight fluorescent (6500 K)
• Daylight fluorescent lights.
• High color temperature light
High temp. mercury-vapor
sources (e.g. mercury-vapor
(7200 K)
lamps).
Use with subjects lit by direct
H Direct sunlight (5200 K)
sunlight.
Use with optional flash units.
N Flash (5400 K)
Use in daylight under overcast
G Cloudy (6000 K)
skies.
Use in daylight with subjects in
M Shade (8000 K)
the shade.
Choose color temp.
Choose color temperature from
K (2500–10,000 K)
list of values (0 163).
Use subject, light source, or
existing photograph as reference
L Preset manual
for white balance (0 165).
* All values are approximate and do not reflect fine-tuning (if applicable).
157
White balance can be selected by pressing the U button and
rotating the main command dial until the desired setting is
displayed in the control panel.
U button
Main command
dial
When v (Auto) or I (Fluorescent) is selected, you can choose
a sub-option by pressing the U button and rotating the subcommand dial.
U button
158
Sub-command
dial
A The Shooting Menus
White balance can also be adjusted using the White balance option in
the photo or movie shooting menu (0 252, 257), which also can be
used to fine-tune white balance (0 161) or manage white-balance
presets (0 165).
A v (“Auto”)
v (Auto) offers a choice of v0 (Keep white (reduce warm
colors)), v1 (Normal), and v2 (Keep warm lighting colors).
v0 (Keep white (reduce warm colors)) makes whites recorded
under incandescent lighting appear white, while v2 (Keep warm
lighting colors) preserves the warm tints we normally perceive under
incandescent lighting.
A D (“Natural Light Auto”)
D (Natural light auto) may not produce the desired results under
artificial light. Choose v (Auto) or an option that matches the light
source.
A Studio Flash Lighting
v (Auto) may not produce the desired results with large studio flash
units. Use preset white balance or set white balance to N (Flash) and
use fine-tuning to adjust white balance.
A See Also
For information on varying white balance to “bracket” the current
value, see “Bracketing” (0 142).
159
A Color Temperature
The perceived color of a light source varies with the viewer and other
conditions. Color temperature is an objective measure of the color of a
light source, defined with reference to the temperature to which an
object would have to be heated to radiate light in the same
wavelengths. While light sources with a color temperature in the
neighborhood of 5000–5500 K appear white, light sources with a lower
color temperature, such as incandescent light bulbs, appear slightly
yellow or red. Light sources with a higher color temperature appear
tinged with blue.
“Warmer” (redder) colors
3000
q
w
4000
e
r
“Cooler” (bluer) colors
5000
6000
tyu i
8000
o
!0
10000
!1
q I (sodium-vapor lamps): 2700 K
w J (incandescent)/I (warm-white fluorescent.): 3000 K
e I (white fluorescent): 3700 K
r I (cool-white fluorescent): 4200 K
t I (day white fluorescent): 5000 K
y H (direct sunlight): 5200 K
u N (flash): 5400 K
i G (cloudy): 6000 K
o I (daylight fluorescent): 6500 K
!0 I (high temp. mercury-vapor): 7200 K
!1 M (shade): 8000 K
Note: All figures are approximate.
160
[K]
Fine-Tuning White Balance
At settings other than K (Choose color temp.), white balance
can be “fine-tuned” to compensate for variations in the color of
the light source or to introduce a deliberate color cast into an
image.
1 Display fine-tuning options.
Highlight a white balance option and
press 2 (if a sub-menu is displayed,
select the desired option and press 2
again to display fine-tuning options;
for information on fine-tuning preset
manual white balance, see “FineTuning Preset Manual White Balance”, 0 174).
2 Fine-tune white balance.
Coordinates
Use the multi selector to fine-tune
white balance. White balance can be
fine-tuned on the amber (A)–blue (B)
axis in steps of 0.5 and the green (G)–
magenta (M) axis in steps of 0.25. The
horizontal (amber-blue) axis
corresponds to color temperature,
Adjustment
while the vertical (green-magenta)
axis has the similar effects to the corresponding color
compensation (CC) filters. The horizontal axis is ruled in
increments equivalent to about 5 mired, the vertical axis in
increments of about 0.05 diffuse density units.
161
3 Press J.
Press J to save settings and return to
the photo shooting menu. If white
balance has been fine-tuned, an
asterisk (“U”) will be displayed in the
control panel.
A Fine-Tuning in Live View
To fine-tune white balance during live view, hold the U button while
using the multi selector. Press 4 or 2 for Amber–Blue and 1 or 3 for
Green–Magenta.
U button
A White Balance Fine-Tuning
The colors on the fine-tuning axes are relative, not absolute. For
example, moving the cursor to B (blue) when a “warm” setting such as
J (Incandescent) is selected for white balance will make
photographs slightly “colder” but will not actually make them blue.
A “Mired”
Any given change in color temperature produces a greater difference
in color at low color temperatures than it would at higher color
temperatures. For example, a change of 1000 K produces a much
greater change in color at 3000 K than at 6000 K. Mired, calculated by
multiplying the inverse of the color temperature by 10 6, is a measure of
color temperature that takes such variation into account, and as such is
the unit used in color-temperature compensation filters. E.g.:
• 4000 K–3000 K (a difference of 1000 K)=83 mired
• 7000 K–6000 K (a difference of 1000 K)=24 mired
162
Choosing a Color Temperature
Follow the steps below to choose a color temperature when
K (Choose color temp.) is selected for white balance.
D Choose Color Temperature
Note that the desired results will not be obtained with flash or
fluorescent lighting. Choose N (Flash) or I (Fluorescent) for these
sources. With other light sources, take a test shot to determine if the
selected value is appropriate.
❚❚ The White Balance Menu
Color temperature can be selected using the White balance
options in the photo shooting menu. Enter values for the
amber–blue and green–magenta axes as described below.
1 Select Choose color temp.
Select White balance in the photo shooting menu, then
highlight Choose color temp. and press 2.
2 Select values for amber–blue and green–magenta.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight digits on the amber (A)–blue (B)
axis or the green (G)–magenta (M) axis and press 1 or 3 to
change.
Value for amber (A)blue (B) axis
Value for green (G)magenta (M) axis
163
3 Press J.
Press J to save changes and return to
the photo shooting menu. If a value
other than 0 is selected for the green
(G)–magenta (M) axis, an asterisk (“U”)
will be displayed in the control panel.
❚❚ The U Button
When K (Choose color temp.) is selected, the U button can
be used to select the color temperature, although only for the
amber (A)–blue (B) axis. Press the U button and rotate the subcommand dial until the desired value is displayed in the control
panel (adjustments are made in mireds; 0 162). To enter a color
temperature directly, press the U button and press 4 or 2 to
highlight a digit and press 1 or 3 to change.
U button
164
Sub-command
dial
Preset Manual
Preset manual is used to record and recall custom white balance
settings for shooting under mixed lighting or to compensate for
light sources with a strong color cast. The camera can store up to
six values for preset white balance in presets d-1 through d-6.
Two methods are available for setting preset white balance:
Method
Description
Neutral gray or white object is placed under
lighting that will be used in final photograph and
white balance is measured by camera (0 166).
Direct measurement
During live view (0 37, 59), white balance can be
measured in a selected area of the frame (spot
white balance, 0 169).
Copy from existing White balance is copied from photo on memory
photograph
card (0 172).
A White Balance Presets
Changes to white balance presets apply to all photo shooting menu
banks (0 250).
165
Viewfinder Photography
1 Light a reference object.
Place a neutral gray or white object under the lighting that
will be used in the final photograph. In studio settings, a
standard gray panel can be used as a reference object. Note
that exposure is automatically increased by 1 EV when
measuring white balance; in exposure mode M, adjust
exposure so that the exposure indicator shows ±0 (0 132).
2 Set white balance to L (Preset manual).
Press the U button and rotate the main command dial until
L is displayed in the control panel.
U button
Main command
dial
A Measuring Preset Manual White Balance (Viewfinder Photography)
Preset manual white balance cannot be measured during time-lapse
movie recording or while you are shooting an HDR photograph or
multiple exposure.
166
3 Select a preset.
Press the U button and rotate the sub-command dial until
the desired white balance preset (d-1 to d-6) is displayed in
the control panel.
U button
Sub-command
dial
4 Select direct measurement mode.
Release the U button briefly and
then press the button until the L
icon in the control panel starts to
flash. A flashing D will also
appear in the viewfinder.
5 Measure white balance.
In the few seconds before the indicators stop
flashing, frame the reference object so that it fills
the viewfinder and press the shutter-release
button all the way down. The camera will measure a value for
white balance and store it in the preset selected in Step 3. No
photograph will be recorded; white balance can be measured
accurately even when the camera is not in focus.
167
6 Check the results.
If the camera was able to measure a
value for white balance, C will
flash in the control panel, while the
viewfinder will show a flashing a.
Press the shutter-release button
halfway to exit to shooting mode.
If lighting is too dark or too bright,
the camera may be unable to
measure white balance. A flashing
b a will appear in the control
panel and viewfinder. Press the
shutter-release button halfway to
return to Step 5 and measure white
balance again.
D Direct Measurement Mode
If no operations are performed during viewfinder photography while
the displays are flashing, direct measurement mode will end in the
time selected for Custom Setting c2 (Standby timer, 0 263).
A Protected Presets
If the current preset is protected (0 174), 3 will flash in the control
panel and viewfinder if you attempt to measure a new value.
A Selecting a Preset
Selecting Preset manual for the White
balance option in the photo shooting menu
displays white balance presets; highlight a
preset and press J. If no value currently
exists for the selected preset, white balance
will be set to 5200 K, the same as Direct
sunlight.
168
Live View (Spot White Balance)
During live view (0 37, 59), white balance can be measured in a
selected area of the frame, eliminating the need to prepare a
reference object or change lenses during telephoto
photography.
1 Press the a button.
The mirror will be raised and the view through the lens will be
displayed in the camera monitor.
2 Set white balance to L (Preset manual).
Press the U button and rotate the main command dial until
L is displayed in the monitor.
U button
Main command
dial
169
3 Select a preset.
Press the U button and rotate the sub-command dial until
the desired white balance preset (d-1 to d-6) is displayed in
the monitor.
U button
Sub-command
dial
4 Select direct measurement mode.
Release the U button briefly and
then press the button until the L
icon in the monitor starts to flash. A
spot white balance target (r) will be
displayed at the selected focus point.
5 Position the target over a white or grey area.
While L flashes in the display, use
the multi selector to position the r
over a white or grey area of the
subject. To zoom the area around the
target in for more precise positioning,
press the X button. You can also
measure white balance anywhere in
the frame by tapping your subject in the monitor, in which
case there is no need to press the center of the multi selector
or the shutter-release button as described in Step 6.
170
6 Measure white balance.
Press the center of the multi selector
or press the shutter-release button all
the way down to measure white
balance. The time available to
measure white balance is that
selected for Custom Setting c4
(Monitor off delay) > Live view
(0 264).
If the camera is unable to measure
white balance, a message will be
displayed. Choose a new white
balance target and repeat the process
from Step 5.
7 Exit direct measurement mode.
Press the U button to exit direct measurement mode.
White balance presets can be viewed
by selecting Preset manual for White
balance in the photo or movie
shooting menu. The position of the
targets used to measure preset white
balance is displayed on presets
recorded during live view.
D Measuring Preset Manual White Balance (Live View)
Preset manual white balance cannot be measured while an HDR
exposure is in progress (0 182) or when None is selected for Photo
live view display WB in the i-button menu (0 45).
171
Managing Presets
❚❚ Copying White Balance from a Photograph
Follow the steps below to copy a value for white balance from an
existing photograph to a selected preset.
1 Select Preset manual.
Select White balance in the photo
shooting menu, then highlight Preset
manual and press 2.
2 Select a destination.
Highlight the destination preset (d-1
to d-6) and press the center of the
multi selector.
3 Choose Select image.
Highlight Select image and press 2.
172
4 Highlight a source image.
Highlight the source image. To view
the highlighted image full frame,
press and hold the X button.
To view images in other locations,
press W (M) and select the desired
card and folder (0 224).
5 Copy white balance.
Press J to copy the white balance value for the highlighted
photograph to the selected preset. If the highlighted
photograph has a comment (0 273), the comment will be
copied to the comment for the selected preset.
173
A Fine-Tuning Preset White Balance
The selected preset can be fine-tuned by
selecting Fine-tune and adjusting white
balance as described in “Fine-Tuning White
Balance” (0 161).
A Edit Comment
To enter a descriptive comment of up to 36
characters for the current white-balance
preset, select Edit comment in the preset
manual white balance menu and enter a
comment (0 273).
A Protect
To protect the current white-balance preset,
select Protect in the preset manual white
balance menu, then highlight On and press
J. Protected presets cannot be modified
and the Fine-tune and Edit comment
options cannot be used.
174
Image Enhancement
Picture Controls
Selecting a Picture Control
Choose a Picture Control according to the subject or type of
scene.
Option
n Auto
Q Standard
R Neutral
S Vivid
T Monochrome
o Portrait
p Landscape
q Flat
Description
The camera automatically adjusts hues and tones
based on the Standard Picture Control. The
complexions of portrait subjects will appear softer,
and such elements as the foliage and sky in
outdoor shots more vivid, than in pictures taken
with the Standard Picture Control.
Standard processing for balanced results.
Recommended for most situations.
Minimal processing for natural results. Choose for
photographs that will later be processed or
retouched.
Pictures are enhanced for a vivid, photoprint effect.
Choose for photographs that emphasize primary
colors.
Take monochrome photographs.
Process portraits for skin with natural texture and a
rounded feel.
Produces vibrant landscapes and cityscapes.
Details are preserved over a wide tone range, from
highlights to shadows. Choose for photographs
that will later be extensively processed or
retouched.
175
1 Press L (Z/Q).
A list of Picture Controls will be
displayed.
L (Z/Q) button
2 Select a Picture Control.
Highlight the desired Picture Control
and press J.
A Custom Picture Controls
Custom Picture Controls are created through modifications to existing
Picture Controls using the Manage Picture Control option in the
photo or movie shooting menu (0 252, 258). Custom Picture Controls
can be saved to a memory card for sharing among other cameras of
the same model and compatible software.
A The Picture Control Indicator
The current Picture Control is shown in the
information display when the R button is
pressed.
A The Shooting Menus
Picture Controls can also be selected using the Set Picture Control
option in the photo or movie shooting menu (0 252, 257).
176
Modifying Picture Controls
Existing preset or custom Picture Controls (0 176) can be
modified to suit the scene or the user’s creative intent. Choose a
balanced combination of settings using Quick adjust, or make
manual adjustments to individual settings.
1 Select a Picture Control.
Highlight the desired Picture Control
in the Picture Control list (0 175) and
press 2.
2 Adjust settings.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight the desired
setting and press 4 or 2 to choose a
value in increments of 1, or rotate the
sub-command dial to choose a value
in increments of 0.25 (0 178; the
options available vary with the Picture
Control selected). Repeat this step until all settings have been
adjusted, or select a preset combination of settings by
highlighting Quick adjust and pressing 4 or 2. Default
settings can be restored by pressing the O (Q) button.
3 Press J.
A Modifications to Original Picture Controls
Picture Controls that have been modified
from default settings are indicated by an
asterisk (“U”) in the Set Picture Control
menu.
177
❚❚ Picture Control Settings
Option
Manual adjustments
Description
Mute or heighten the effect of the selected Picture
Quick adjust
Control (note that this resets all manual adjustments).
Not available with custom Picture Controls (0 176).
Control the sharpness of outlines. Select A to adjust
Sharpening sharpening automatically according to the type of
scene.
Adjust clarity manually or select A to let the camera
adjust clarity automatically. Depending on the scene,
Clarity
shadows may appear around bright objects or halos may
appear around dark objects at some settings. Clarity is
not applied to movies.
Adjust contrast manually or select A to let the camera
Contrast
adjust contrast automatically.
Raise or lower brightness without loss of detail in
Brightness
highlights or shadows.
Control the vividness of colors. Select A to adjust
Saturation
saturation automatically according to the type of scene.
Hue
Adjust hue.
Filter
Simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome
effects
photographs (0 179).
Choose the tint used in monochrome photographs
Toning
(0 179).
A The “n Auto” Picture Control
If n Auto is selected for Set Picture
Control, settings can be adjusted in the
range A-2 to A+2. Rotating the subcommand dial has no effect.
D “A” (Auto)
Results for auto sharpening, clarity, contrast, and saturation vary with
exposure and the position of the subject in the frame. Use a type G, E,
or D lens for best results.
178
A Switching Between Manual and Auto
Press the X button to switch back and forth
between manual and auto (A) settings for
sharpening, clarity, contrast, and saturation.
A Previous Settings
The j indicator under the value display in
the Picture Control setting menu indicates
the previous value for the setting. Use this as
a reference when adjusting settings.
A Filter Effects (Monochrome Only)
The options in this menu simulate the effect of color filters on
monochrome photographs. The following filter effects are available:
Option
Y Yellow
Description
Enhances contrast. Can be used to tone down the
brightness of the sky in landscape photographs. Orange
O Orange
produces more contrast than yellow, red more contrast
R Red
than orange.
G Green
Softens skin tones. Can be used for portraits.
A Toning (Monochrome Only)
Pressing 3 when Toning is selected displays
saturation options. Press 4 or 2 to adjust
saturation. Saturation control is not available
when B&W (black-and-white) is selected.
A Touch Controls
Tapping the indicator displays touch
controls that can be used to adjust Picture
Control settings.
179
Preserving Detail in Highlights and
Shadows
Active D-Lighting
Active D-Lighting preserves details in highlights and shadows,
creating photographs with natural contrast. Use for high
contrast scenes, for example when photographing brightly lit
outdoor scenery through a door or window or taking pictures of
shaded subjects on a sunny day. It is most effective when used
with matrix metering (0 124).
Active D-Lighting off
Active D-Lighting: Y Auto
A “Active D-Lighting” versus “D-Lighting”
The Active D-Lighting options in the photo and movie shooting
menus adjust exposure before shooting to optimize the dynamic
range, while the D-Lighting option in the retouch menu (0 278)
brightens shadows in images after shooting.
D Active D-Lighting
Noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) may appear in
photographs taken with Active D-Lighting. Uneven shading may be
visible with some subjects. Active D-Lighting does not apply at high
ISO sensitivities (Hi 0.3–Hi 2).
180
To use Active D-Lighting:
1 Select Active D-Lighting.
Highlight Active D-Lighting in the
photo shooting menu and press 2.
2 Choose an option.
Highlight the desired option and
press J. If Y Auto is selected, the
camera will automatically adjust
Active D-Lighting according to
shooting conditions (in exposure
mode M, however, Y Auto is
equivalent to Q Normal).
A Active D-Lighting and Movies
If Same as photo settings is selected for Active D-Lighting in the
movie shooting menu and Auto is selected in the photo shooting
menu, movies will be shot at a setting equivalent to Normal. Active
D-Lighting does not apply at frame sizes of 1920 × 1080 (slow-mo) and
3840 × 2160.
A See Also
For information on varying Active D-Lighting over a series of shots, see
“Bracketing” (0 142).
181
High Dynamic Range (HDR)
Used with high-contrast subjects, High Dynamic Range (HDR)
preserves details in highlights and shadows by combining two
shots taken at different exposures. HDR is most effective when
used with matrix metering (0 124; with spot or center-weighted
metering and a non-CPU lens, an exposure differential of Auto is
equivalent to about 2 EV). It cannot be combined with some
camera features, including NEF (RAW) recording, flash lighting
(0 187), bracketing (0 142), multiple exposure, focus shift, time
lapse, and shutter speeds of A and %.
+
First exposure (darker)
Second exposure
(brighter)
1 Select HDR (high dynamic range).
Highlight HDR (high dynamic range)
in the photo shooting menu and
press 2.
182
Combined HDR image
2 Select a mode.
Highlight HDR mode and press 2.
Highlight one of the following and
press J.
• To take a series of HDR photographs, select
0 On (series). HDR shooting will
continue until you select Off for
HDR mode.
• To take one HDR photograph, select On
(single photo). Normal shooting will resume automatically
after you have created a single HDR photograph.
• To exit without creating additional HDR photographs, select Off.
If On (series) or On (single photo) is
selected, a y icon will be displayed
in the control panel.
183
3 Choose the exposure differential.
To choose the difference in exposure
between the two shots, highlight
Exposure differential and press 2.
Exposure differential options will be
displayed. Highlight an option and
press J. Choose higher values for
high-contrast subjects, but note that
choosing a value higher than required
may not produce the desired results; if
Auto is selected, the camera will
automatically adjust exposure to suit the scene.
4 Choose the amount of smoothing.
To choose how much the boundaries
between the two images are
smoothed, highlight Smoothing and
press 2.
Smoothing options will be displayed.
Highlight an option and press J.
Higher values produce a smoother
composite image. Uneven shading
may be visible with some subjects.
184
5 Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
The camera takes two exposures
when the shutter-release button is
pressed all the way down.
“l y” will flash in the control
panel and l u in the
viewfinder while the images are
combined; no photographs can be
taken until recording is complete.
Regardless of the option currently selected for release mode,
only one photograph will be taken each time the shutterrelease button is pressed.
If On (series) is selected, HDR will only turn off when Off is
selected for HDR mode; if On (single photo) is selected, HDR
turns off automatically after the photograph is taken. The y
icon clears from the display when HDR shooting ends.
D Framing HDR Photographs
The edges of the image will be cropped out. The desired results may
not be achieved if the camera or subject moves during shooting. Use
of a tripod is recommended. Depending on the scene, shadows may
appear around bright objects or halos may appear around dark
objects; this effect can be reduced by adjusting the amount of
smoothing.
185
A The BKT Button
If HDR (high dynamic range) is selected for
Custom Setting f1 (Custom control
assignment) > BKT button + y (0 268),
you can select the HDR mode by pressing
the BKT button and rotating the main
command dial and the exposure differential
by pressing the BKT button and rotating the
sub-command dial. The mode and exposure
differential are shown in the control panel:
the icons representing the mode are a for
Off, B for On (single photo), and b for On (series), while the icons for
exposure differential are respectively 6, 7, 8, and 9 for 1 EV, 2 EV,
3 EV, and Auto.
A Interval Timer Photography
If On (series) is selected for HDR mode before interval timer shooting
begins, the camera will continue to shoot HDR photographs at the
selected interval (if On (single photo) is selected, interval timer
shooting will end after a single shot).
A Photo Shooting Menu Banks
HDR settings can be adjusted separately for each bank (0 250), but
switching to a bank in which HDR is active during multiple exposure or
interval timer shooting disables HDR. HDR is also disabled if you switch
to a bank in which an NEF (RAW) option is selected for image quality.
186
Optional Flash Units
To take photos with a flash, attach an optional flash unit (0 288)
to the camera accessory shoe. For information on using flash
units, see the documentation provided with the device.
Information on using multiple remote flash units may be found
in a Menu Guide available on Nikon websites (0 i).
Using a Flash
Follow the steps below to mount an optional flash unit on the
camera and take photographs using the flash.
1 Mount the unit on the accessory
shoe.
See the manual provided with the unit
for details.
2 Turn on the camera and flash unit.
The flash will begin charging; the flash-ready indicator (c) will
be displayed in the viewfinder when charging is complete.
187
3 Adjust flash settings.
Choose the flash mode (0 192) and flash control mode
(0 190).
4 Adjust shutter speed and aperture.
5 Take pictures.
D Use Only Nikon Flash Accessories
Use only Nikon flash units. Negative voltages or voltages over 250 V
applied to the accessory shoe could not only prevent normal
operation, but damage the sync circuitry of the camera or flash. Before
using a Nikon flash unit not listed in this section, contact a Nikonauthorized service representative for more information.
A Shutter Speed
Shutter speed can be set as follows when an optional flash unit is used:
Mode
Shutter speed
P, A
Set automatically by camera (1/250 s–1/60 s) *
S
Value selected by user (1/250 s–30 s)
M
Value selected by user (1/250 s–30 s, Bulb (A), Time (%))
* Shutter speed may be set as slow as 30 s if slow sync, slow rear-curtain sync, or slow sync
with red-eye reduction is selected for flash mode.
A The Sync Terminal
A sync cable can be connected to the sync
terminal as required. Do not connect
another flash unit via a sync cable when
performing rear-curtain sync flash
photography with a flash unit mounted on
the camera accessory shoe.
188
A i-TTL Flash Control
When a CLS-compatible flash unit is set to TTL, the camera
automatically selects one of the following types of flash control:
• i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR: Flash unit emits series of nearly
invisible preflashes (monitor preflashes) immediately before main
flash. Preflashes reflected from objects in all areas of frame are picked
up by RGB sensor with approximately 180K (180,000) pixels and are
analyzed in combination with range information from matrix
metering system to adjust flash output for natural balance between
main subject and ambient background lighting. If type G, E, or D lens
is used, distance information is included when calculating flash
output. Precision of calculation can be increased for non-CPU lenses
by providing lens data (focal length and maximum aperture; 0 218).
Not available when spot metering is used.
• Standard i-TTL fill-flash for digital SLR: Flash output adjusted to bring
lighting in frame to standard level; brightness of background is not
taken into account. Recommended for shots in which main subject is
emphasized at expense of background details, or when exposure
compensation is used. Standard i-TTL fill-flash for digital SLR is
activated automatically when spot metering is selected.
189
On-Camera Flash Photography
When a flash unit that supports unified
flash control (an SB-5000, SB-500, SB-400,
or SB-300) is mounted on the camera, the
flash control mode, flash level, and other
flash settings can be adjusted using the
Flash control > Flash control mode
item in the photo shooting menu (in the
case of the SB-5000, these settings can also be adjusted using
the controls on the flash unit). The options available vary with
the flash used (0 288), while the options displayed under Flash
control mode vary with the mode selected. Settings for other
flash units can only be adjusted using flash unit controls.
• TTL: i-TTL mode. In the cases of the SB-500, SB-400, and SB-300,
flash compensation can be adjusted using the W (M) button
(0 194).
• Auto external flash: In this mode, output is adjusted automatically
according to the amount of light reflected by the subject; flash
compensation is also available. Auto external flash supports
“auto aperture” (qA) and “non-TTL auto” (A) modes; non-TTL
auto is selected automatically if a non-CPU lens is attached
without specifying the focal length and maximum aperture
using the Non-CPU lens data option in the setup menu
(0 218). See the flash unit manual for details.
• Distance-priority manual: Choose the distance to the subject; flash
output will be adjusted automatically. Flash compensation is
also available.
190
• Manual: Choose the flash level manually.
• Repeating flash: The flash fires repeatedly while the shutter is
open, producing a multiple-exposure effect. Choose the flash
level (Output), the maximum number of times the unit fires
(Times), and the number of times the flash fires per second
(Frequency, measured in Hertz). The options available for
Times vary depending on the options selected for Output and
Frequency; see the documentation provided with the flash
unit for details.
A Unified Flash Control
Unified flash control allows the camera and flash unit to share settings.
If a flash unit that supports unified flash control is mounted on the
camera, changes to flash settings made with either the camera or flash
unit are reflected on both devices, as are changes made using optional
Camera Control Pro 2 software.
191
Flash Modes
The camera supports the following flash modes:
Flash mode
Description
This mode is recommended for most situations. In
programmed auto and aperture-priority auto modes,
shutter speed will automatically be set to values
Front-curtain
between 1/250 and 1/60 s (1/8000 to 1/60 s with Auto FP Highsync
Speed Sync; 0 266).
If flash unit supports red-eye reduction, choose this
mode to reduce “red-eye” effect sometimes caused by
flash. Not recommended with moving subjects or in
Red-eye
other situations in which quick shutter response is
reduction
required. Do not move camera during shooting.
Combines red-eye reduction with slow sync. Use for
portraits taken against a backdrop of night scenery.
This mode is only available in programmed auto and
Red-eye
aperture-priority auto exposure modes. Use of tripod
reduction with
is recommended to prevent blurring caused by camera
slow sync
shake.
Flash is combined with shutter speeds as slow as 30 s
to capture both subject and background at night or
under dim light. This mode is only available in
programmed auto and aperture-priority auto
Slow sync
exposure modes. Use of tripod is recommended to
prevent blurring caused by camera shake.
In shutter-priority auto or manual exposure mode,
flash fires just before the shutter closes. Use to create
effect of a stream of light behind moving objects. In
programmed auto and aperture-priority auto, slow
Rear-curtain
rear-curtain sync is used to capture both subject and
sync
background. Use of tripod is recommended to prevent
blurring caused by camera shake.
Flash off
192
Flash does not fire.
❚❚ Choosing a Flash Mode
To choose the flash mode, press
the W (M) button and rotate
the main command dial until
the desired flash mode is
selected in the control panel:
W (M) button
Main command
dial
Front-curtain sync
Red-eye reduction 1
Red-eye reduction
with slow sync 1, 2
Flash off
Rear-curtain sync 4
Slow sync 3
1 Y icon flashes if flash unit does not support red-eye reduction.
2 Red-eye reduction with slow sync is available only in exposure modes P and A. In modes S and
M, red-eye reduction with slow sync becomes red-eye reduction.
3 Available only in exposure modes P and A. In modes S and M, slow sync becomes front-curtain
sync.
4 In exposure modes P and A, flash-sync mode will be set to slow rear-curtain sync
when the W (M) button is released.
A Studio Flash Systems
Rear-curtain sync cannot be used with studio flash systems, as the
correct synchronization cannot be obtained.
193
Flash Compensation
Flash compensation is used to alter flash output by from –3 EV to
+1 EV in increments of 1/3 EV, changing the brightness of the
main subject relative to the background. Flash output can be
increased to make the main subject appear brighter, or reduced
to prevent unwanted highlights or reflections. In general,
choose positive values to make the main subject brighter,
negative values to make it darker.
To choose a value for flash
compensation, press the
W (M) button and rotate the
sub-command dial until the
desired value is displayed in the
control panel.
W (M) button
±0 EV
(W/M button pressed)
–0.3 EV
Sub-command
dial
+1.0 EV
At values other than ±0.0, a Y icon will be displayed in the
control panel and viewfinder after you release the W (M) button.
The current value for flash compensation can be confirmed by
pressing the W (M) button.
Normal flash output can be restored by setting flash
compensation to ±0.0. Flash compensation is not reset when the
camera is turned off.
194
A See Also
For information on:
• Choosing the size of the increments available for flash compensation,
see A > Custom Setting b3 (Exp./flash comp. step value, 0 262).
• Choosing whether flash compensation is applied in addition to
exposure compensation when the flash is used, see A > Custom
Setting e3 (Exposure comp. for flash, 0 266).
• Automatically varying flash level over a series of shots, see
“Bracketing” (0 142).
195
FV Lock
This feature is used to lock flash output, allowing photographs to
be recomposed without changing the flash level and ensuring
that flash output is appropriate to the subject even when the
subject is not positioned in the center of the frame. Flash output
is adjusted automatically for any changes in ISO sensitivity and
aperture. FV lock is available with CLS compatible flash units
only (0 288).
To use FV lock:
1 Assign FV lock to a camera control.
Assign FV lock to a control using
Custom Setting f1 (Custom control
assignment, 0 268).
2 Attach a CLS-compatible flash unit.
Mount a CLS-compatible flash unit (0 288) on the camera
accessory shoe.
3 Set the flash unit to the appropriate mode.
Turn the flash unit on and set the flash mode to TTL, monitor
pre-flash qA, or monitor pre-flash A. See the documentation
provided with the flash unit for details.
4 Focus.
Position the subject in the
center of the frame and
press the shutter-release
button halfway to focus.
196
5 Lock flash level.
After confirming that the
flash-ready indicator (M) is displayed in the viewfinder, press
the control selected in Step 1. The flash will emit a monitor
preflash to determine the appropriate flash level. Flash
output will be locked at this level and FV lock icon (e) will
appear in the viewfinder.
6 Recompose the photograph.
7 Take the photograph.
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to
shoot. If desired, additional pictures can be taken without
releasing FV lock.
8 Release FV lock.
Press the control selected in Step 1 to release FV lock. Confirm
that the FV lock icon (e) is no longer displayed in the
viewfinder.
197
Flash Info for Shoe-Mounted Units
The camera can display flash info for flash units that support
unified flash control (the SB-5000, SB-500, SB-400, and SB-300)
mounted on the camera accessory shoe. To view flash info, press
the R button in the information display (0 203). The
information displayed varies with the flash control mode.
❚❚ TTL
123
4
5
6
7
8
9
1 Flash-ready indicator................. 187
2 Bounce icon (displayed if flash
head is tilted upwards)
3 Zoom head position warning
(displayed if zoom head position
is not correct)
4 Flash control mode .................... 190
FP indicator.................................. 266
5 Flash compensation (TTL)
.............................................. 190, 194
6 Flash mode .................................. 192
7 Flash control mode .................... 201
8 FV lock indicator ......................... 196
9 Flash compensation .................. 194
❚❚ Auto External Flash
1
2
198
1 Flash control mode .................... 190
FP indicator.................................. 266
2 Flash compensation (auto
aperture) ............................ 190, 194
❚❚ Distance-Priority Manual
1
2
3
1 Flash control mode .................... 190
FP indicator .................................. 266
2 Flash compensation (distancepriority manual)................ 190, 194
3 Distance ........................................ 190
❚❚ Manual
1
2
1 Flash control mode .................... 190
FP indicator .................................. 266
2 Flash level..................................... 190
❚❚ Repeating Flash
1
2
3
1 Flash control mode .................... 190
2 Flash level (output) .................... 190
3 Number emitted (times)........... 190
Frequency..................................... 190
199
A Flash Info and Camera Settings
The flash information display shows
selected camera settings, including
exposure mode, shutter speed, aperture,
and ISO sensitivity.
A Changing Flash Settings
Flash settings can be changed by pressing
the i button in the flash info display. The
options available vary with the flash unit
and the settings selected. You can also testfire the flash.
200
A Flash Control Mode
The information display shows the flash
control mode for optional flash units
attached to the camera accessory shoe as
follows:
Flash sync
Auto FP (0 266)
i-TTL
Auto aperture (qA)
Non-TTL auto flash (A)
Distance-priority
manual (GN)
Manual
Repeating flash
—
Advanced wireless
lighting
201
Remote Flash Units
The Menu Guide available on Nikon websites (0 i) offers
information on:
• Controlling remote flash units with optical signals
from an optional flash unit mounted on the accessory
shoe
• Using radio-controlled remote flash units
• Using radio-controlled remote flash units
simultaneously with a shoe-mounted flash
• Using radio-controlled remote flash units and
optically-controlled remote flash units
simultaneously
Radio flash control is available only when the camera is
connected to a WR-R10 using a WR-A10 adapter. Consult the
“Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS)” for additional
information on flash features (0 288).
202
Other Shooting Options
The R Button
During viewfinder photography, you can press the R button to
view an information display in the monitor listing such data as
shutter speed, aperture, number of exposures remaining, and
AF-area mode.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
15
16
12
17
14
1 Bluetooth connection indicator
.......................................................275
Airplane mode.............................275
2 Wi-Fi connection indicator .......275
Eye-Fi connection indicator .....276
3 Satellite signal indicator............222
4 Long exposure noise reduction
indicator.......................................253
5 Vignette control indicator ........253
6 Auto distortion control..............253
7 Electronic front-curtain shutter
.......................................................265
8 Exposure delay mode ................264
13
9 Interval timer indicator ............. 255
Time-lapse indicator.................. 259
& (“clock not set”) indicator
.............................................. 206, 271
10 “Beep” indicator.......................... 274
11 Camera battery indicator............ 30
MB-D18 battery type display... 276
MB-D18 battery indicator......... 299
12 White balance.............................. 156
13 Picture Control indicator........... 175
14 Color space................................... 253
15 Photo shooting menu bank..... 250
16 Image area indicator.................... 83
17 Active D-Lighting indicator...... 180
203
18 19 20
27
28
29
30
31
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
204
Flash sync indicator.................... 266
Shutter-speed lock icon............ 136
Shutter speed ..................... 129, 131
Aperture stop indicator............. 130
Aperture (f-number)......... 130, 131
Aperture (number of stops)..... 130
Exposure indicator ..................... 132
Exposure compensation
display.......................................... 139
Bracketing progress indicator:
Exposure and flash
bracketing........................... 143
WB bracketing....................... 148
Image comment indicator ....... 273
Copyright information
indicator ...................................... 273
i icon............................................. 208
21 22
23
24
25
26
27 Flexible program indicator....... 128
28 Exposure mode........................... 126
29 Position of current frame in
bracketing sequence ...... 143, 148
ADL bracketing amount .......... 152
HDR exposure differential ........ 182
HDR (series) indicator................ 182
Number of exposures
(multiple exposure) .................. 254
Multiple exposure (series)
indicator ...................................... 254
30 Exposure and flash
bracketing indicator ................. 143
WB bracketing indicator........... 148
ADL bracketing indicator ......... 152
HDR indicator .............................. 182
Multiple exposure indicator .... 254
31 Release mode.............................. 113
36
32
33
34
35
37
38
39
44 43 42 41
40
32 Exposure compensation
39 Number of exposures
indicator.......................................139
remaining ............................ 31, 362
Manual lens number.................. 218
Exposure compensation value ...139
33 Flash compensation indicator
40 Image quality ................................ 88
.......................................................194
Secondary slot function.............. 93
Flash compensation value........194
Image size....................................... 91
XQD card icon..........................16, 93
34 FV lock indicator..........................196
SD card icon .............................16, 93
35 Metering .......................................124
41
Autofocus mode ........................... 98
36 Aperture lock icon ......................136
37 ISO sensitivity ..............................119 42 AF-area mode ..................... 100, 103
ISO sensitivity indicator.............119 43 Flash control mode .................... 190
Auto ISO sensitivity indicator ...121 44 Flash mode................................... 192
38 “k” (appears when memory
remains for over 1000
exposures)..................................... 31
Note: Display shown with all indicators lit for illustrative purposes.
205
A Turning the Monitor Off
To clear shooting or flash information from the monitor, press the R
button or press the shutter-release button halfway. The monitor will
turn off automatically if no operations are performed for about
10 seconds. For information on choosing how long the monitor remains
on before turning off automatically, see A > Custom Setting c4
(Monitor off delay, 0 264).
A The & Indicator
The camera clock is powered by an independent, rechargeable power
source, which is charged as necessary when the main battery is
installed or the camera is powered by an optional power connector
and AC adapter. Two days of charging will power the clock for about
three months. If the & icon flashes in the information display, the clock
has been reset and the date and time recorded with any new
photographs will not be correct. Set the clock to the correct time and
date using the Time zone and date > Date and time option in the
setup menu (0 271).
A See Also
For information on changing the color of the lettering in the
information display, see B > Information display (0 272).
206
Using the Command Dials
The settings in the information display
can be adjusted by keeping one of the
following buttons pressed while rotating
a command dial:
• T (0 88, 91)
• U (0 156; to fine-tune white balance,
keep the button pressed and use the
multi selector)
• I (0 126)
• Y (0 124)
• E (0 139)
• S (0 119)
• W/M (0 192, 194)
• BKT (0 142)
• AF-mode (0 98, 100)
• Any of the buttons that can be assigned a function using
Custom Setting f1 (Custom control assignment, 0 268) or f10
(Assign MB-D18 buttons, 0 270), provided the button can be
used in combination with the command dials
A White Balance
Press the U button to adjust white balance
settings in the information display. Rotate
the main command dial to choose the white
balance mode and rotate the sub-command
dial to choose a sub-option for v (auto) or
I (fluorescent) mode, the color
temperature (mode K, “choose color
temperature”), or white balance preset (preset manual mode). In
modes other than K (“choose color temperature”) and preset manual,
you can use the multi-selector to fine-tune white balance on the
amber (A)–blue (B) and green (G)–magenta (M) axes.
207
The i button
To access the options below, press the
i button during viewfinder
photography. Use the touch screen or
navigate the menu using the multi
selector and J button, pressing 1 or 3
to highlight items and J to view options.
To return to shooting mode, press the
shutter-release button halfway.
Option
Photo shooting menu bank
Custom settings bank
Custom control assignment
Active D-Lighting
Choose image area
Long exposure NR
High ISO NR
208
0
250
260
268
180
86
253
253
i button
Two-Button Reset: Restoring Default
Settings
The camera settings listed
below can be restored to
default values by holding the
T and E buttons down
together for more than two
seconds (these buttons are
marked by a green dot). The
control panel turns off briefly
while settings are reset.
T button
E button
209
❚❚ Settings Accessible from the Photo Shooting Menu 1
Option
Default
Extended photo menu banks
Off
Image quality
JPEG normal
Image size
JPEG/TIFF
Large
NEF (RAW)
Large
ISO sensitivity settings
ISO sensitivity
100
Auto ISO sensitivity control
Off
White balance
Auto > Keep white (reduce warm colors)
Fine-tuning
A-B: 0, G-M: 0
Picture Control settings 2
Unmodified
Flicker reduction
Flicker reduction setting
Disable
Flicker reduction indicator
On
Multiple exposure
Off 3
HDR (high dynamic range)
Off 4
Silent live view photography
Off
1 With the exception of multiple exposure, only settings in the bank currently selected using the
Photo shooting menu bank option will be reset (0 250). Settings in the remaining
banks are unaffected.
2 Current Picture Control only.
3 If multiple exposure is currently in progress, shooting will end and multiple exposure will be
created from exposures recorded to that point. Overlay mode, number of shots, and Keep all
exposures are not reset.
4 Exposure differential and smoothing are not reset.
❚❚ Settings Accessible from the Movie Shooting Menu
Option
ISO sensitivity settings
ISO sensitivity (mode M)
White balance
Active D-Lighting
Electronic VR
210
Default
100
Same as photo settings
Off
Off
❚❚ Other Settings
Option
Focus point 1
Preset focus point
Exposure mode
Flexible program
Exposure compensation
AE lock hold
Exposure preview
Shutter speed lock
Aperture lock
Autofocus mode
AF-area mode
Viewfinder
Live view
Photo live view display WB
Multi-selector power aperture
Multi selector exposure comp.
Highlight display
Headphone volume
Metering
Bracketing
Flash mode
Flash compensation
FV lock
Exposure delay mode
Default
Center
Center
Programmed auto
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
AF-S
Single-point AF
Normal-area AF
None
Disable
Disable
Off
15
Matrix metering
Off 2
Front-curtain sync
Off
Off
Off 3
1 Focus point not displayed if auto-area AF is selected for AF-area mode.
2 Number of shots is reset to zero. Bracketing increment is reset to 1EV (exposure/flash
bracketing) or 1 (white balance bracketing). Y Auto is selected for the second shot of twoshot ADL bracketing programs.
3 Only settings in the bank currently selected using the Custom settings bank option
will be reset (0 260). Settings in the remaining banks are unaffected.
211
Focus Shift Photography
During focus shift, the camera automatically varies focus over a
series of photographs. This feature can be used to take photos
that can later be copied to a computer and combined using
third-party focus-stacking software.
D Before Shooting
Use an AF-S or AF-P lens. After mounting the appropriate lens, rotate
the focus mode selector to AF and choose a release mode other than E.
For best results, we recommend that you choose an exposure mode of
A or M so that aperture does not change during shooting, stop aperture
down two or three stops from the maximum, and disable auto ISO
sensitivity control so that ISO sensitivity does not change while
shooting is in progress. After adjusting settings, take a test shot and
view the results in the monitor. Once settings have been adjusted to
your satisfaction, close the viewfinder eyepiece shutter to prevent light
entering via the viewfinder interfering with photographs and
exposure.
We recommend using a tripod and disabling lens vibration reduction
(VR). Mount the camera on a tripod before shooting begins. To ensure
that shooting is not interrupted, be sure the camera battery is fully
charged. If in doubt, charge the battery before use or use an AC
adapter and power connector (available separately).
❚❚ Focus Shift Photography
1 Select Focus shift shooting.
Highlight Focus shift shooting in the photo shooting menu
and press 2 to display focus shift options.
212
2 Adjust focus shift settings.
Adjust focus shift settings as described below.
• To choose the number of shots:
Highlight No. of shots and
press 2.
Choose the number of shots
(max. 300) and press J.
We recommend taking more shots than you think you’ll
need and winnowing them down during focus stacking.
More than 100 shots may be required for photographs of
insects or other small objects, while only a few are needed
to photograph a landscape from front to back with a wideangle lens.
• To choose the amount the focus distance changes with each shot:
Highlight Focus step width and
press 2.
Press 4 to reduce the focus step
width, 2 to increase. Press J to
proceed.
A value of 5 or less is recommended, as higher settings
increase the risk that some areas will be out of focus when
the shots are stacked. Try experimenting with different
settings before shooting.
213
• To choose the interval between shots:
Highlight Interval until next
shot and press 2.
Choose the number of seconds
between shots and press J.
Select 00 to take photos at approximately 5 fps (release
modes S, CL, CH, and MUP) or 3 fps (release modes Q and QC). A
setting of 00 is recommended when shooting without a
flash; to ensure the correct exposure when using a flash,
choose an interval long enough for the flash to charge.
• To enable or disable exposure smoothing:
Highlight Exposure smoothing
and press 2.
Highlight an option and
press J.
Selecting On allows the camera to adjust exposure to match
previous shot in modes other than M (note that exposure
smoothing only takes effect in mode M if auto ISO sensitivity
control is on). Large changes in subject brightness during
shooting may result in apparent variations in exposure, in
which case it may be necessary to shorten the interval
between shots. Off is recommended if lighting and other
conditions will not change during shooting, On when
photographing landscapes and the like under variable
lighting.
214
• To enable or disable silent photography:
Highlight Silent photography
and press 2.
Highlight an option and
press J.
Select On to silence the shutter during shooting.
• Choose start folder options:
Highlight Starting storage
folder and press 2.
Highlight options and press 2
to select or deselect. Press J to
proceed.
Select New folder to create a new folder for each new
sequence, Reset file numbering to reset file numbering to
0001 whenever a new folder is created.
A Close-ups
Because depth of focus is reduced at short focus distances, we
recommend choosing smaller focus steps and increasing the number
of shots when photographing subjects close to the camera.
215
3 Start shooting.
Highlight Start and press J. Shooting
starts after about 3 s. The camera
takes photographs at the selected
interval, starting at the focus distance
selected at the start of shooting and
progressing out toward infinity by the
selected focus step distance with each shot. Shooting ends
when the selected number of shots has been taken or focus
reaches infinity. To end shooting before all shots have been
taken, select Off for Focus shift shooting in the photo
shooting menu or press the shutter-release button halfway or
press the J button between shots.
A During Shooting
During focus shift photography, the Q
icon will flash in the control panel.
Immediately before the next shot, the
shutter speed display will show the number
of shots remaining. Regardless of the option
selected for Custom Setting c2 (Standby timer, 0 263), the standby
timer will not expire during shooting.
Settings can be adjusted, the menus used, and pictures played back
while focus shift photography is in progress. The monitor will turn off
automatically about four seconds before each shot. Note that
changing camera settings while focus shift photography is in progress
may cause shooting to end.
216
D Focus Shift Photography
If you are using a flash, choose an interval longer than the time needed
for the flash to charge. If the interval is too short, the flash may fire at
less than the power needed for full exposure. Focus shift is available
only when an AF-S or AF-P lens is attached and cannot be used when
the camera clock is not set or a memory card is not inserted. It cannot
be combined with some camera features, including live view (0 37),
movie recording (0 59), time-lapse movies, bracketing, the self-timer
(0 116), long time-exposures (bulb or time photography; 0 133), HDR
(high dynamic range), multiple exposure, and interval timer
photography. Note that because the shutter speed and time needed to
record images may vary from one shot to the next, the time between
the end of one interval and the beginning of the next may vary. If
shooting cannot proceed at current settings (for example, if shutter
speed is set to A or %), a warning will be displayed in the monitor.
A Silent Photography
Selecting On for Silent photography disables some camera features,
including:
• ISO sensitivities of Hi 0.3 through Hi 2 (0 119)
• Flash photography (0 187)
• Exposure delay mode (0 264)
• Flicker reduction (0 258)
217
Non-CPU Lenses
Non-CPU lenses can be used in exposure modes A and M, with
aperture set using the lens aperture ring. By specifying lens data
(lens focal length and maximum aperture), the user can gain
access to the following CPU lens functions.
If the focal length of the lens is known:
• Power zoom can be used with optional flash units
• Lens focal length is listed (with an asterisk) in the playback
photo info display
If the maximum aperture of the lens is known:
• The aperture value is displayed in the control panel and
viewfinder
• Flash level is adjusted for changes in aperture if the flash unit
supports qA (auto aperture) mode
• Aperture is listed (with an asterisk) in the playback photo info
display
Specifying both the focal length and maximum aperture of the lens:
• Enables color matrix metering (note that it may be necessary to
use center-weighted or spot metering to achieve accurate
results with some lenses, including Reflex-NIKKOR lenses)
• Improves the precision of center-weighted and spot metering
and i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR
218
To enter or edit data for a non-CPU lens:
1 Select Non-CPU lens data.
Highlight Non-CPU lens data in the
setup menu and press 2.
2 Select a lens number.
Highlight Lens number and press 4
or 2 to choose a lens number.
3 Enter the focal length and aperture.
Highlight Focal length (mm) or
Maximum aperture and press 4 or
2 to edit the highlighted item.
4 Save settings and exit.
Press J. The specified focal length and aperture will be
stored under the chosen lens number.
219
To recall lens data when using a non-CPU lens:
1 Assign non-CPU lens number selection to a camera control.
Assign Choose non-CPU lens number to a control using
Custom Setting f1 (Custom control assignment, 0 268).
2 Use the selected control to choose a lens number.
Press the selected control and rotate the main or subcommand dial until the desired lens number is displayed in
the control panel.
Focal length
Main command dial
Maximum aperture
Lens number
A Focal Length Not Listed
If the correct focal length is not listed, choose the closest value greater
than the actual focal length of the lens.
A Teleconverters and Zoom Lenses
The maximum aperture for teleconverters is the combined maximum
aperture of the teleconverter and the lens. Note that lens data are not
adjusted when non-CPU lenses are zoomed in or out. The data for
different focal lengths can be entered as separate lens numbers, or the
data for the lens can be edited to reflect the new values for lens focal
length and maximum aperture each time zoom is adjusted.
220
Location Data
The GP-1/GP-1A GPS unit (available separately) can be
connected to the camera’s ten-pin remote terminal (0 295)
using the cable supplied with the GP-1/GP-1A, allowing
information on the camera’s current position to be recorded
when photographs are taken and viewed in the playback photo
info display (0 229). Turn the camera off before connecting the
GP-1/ GP-1A; for more information, see the GP-1/GP-1A manual.
❚❚ Setup Menu Options
The Location data item in the setup menu contains the options
listed below.
• Position: The current latitude, longitude, altitude, and
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).
• External GPS device options > Standby timer: Choose whether or not
the standby timer is enabled when a GPS unit is attached.
Option
Enable
Disable
Description
Standby timer enabled. The timer expires automatically if
no operations are performed for the period specified in
Custom Setting c2 (Standby timer, 0 263), reducing the
drain on the battery. If a GP-1 or GP-1A unit is connected,
the unit will remain active for a set period after the timer
expires; to allow the camera time to acquire location data,
the delay is extended by up to one minute after exposure
meters are activated or the camera is turned on.
Standby timer disabled, ensuring uninterrupted recording
of location data.
• External GPS device options > Set clock from satellite: Select Yes to
synchronize the camera clock with the time reported by the
GPS device.
221
A The o Icon
Connection status is shown by the o icon:
• o (static): Location data acquired.
• o (flashing): The GP-1/GP-1A is searching for
a signal. Pictures taken while the icon is
flashing do not include location data.
• No icon: No new location data have been
received from the GP-1/GP-1A for at least
two seconds. Pictures taken when the o
icon is not displayed do not include location data.
A Smart Devices
To download location data from a smart device and embed it in
subsequent photographs, establish a wireless connection, enable the
location data feature in the SnapBridge app, and select Yes for
Location data > Download from smart device in the camera setup
menu (0 274).
A Coordinated Universal Time (UTC)
UTC data is provided by the GPS device and is independent of the
camera clock.
222
More About Playback
Viewing Images
W
W
W
X
X
X
Full-frame
playback
Thumbnail playback
Full-Frame Playback
To play photographs back, press the K
button. The most recent photograph will
be displayed in the monitor. Additional
pictures can be displayed by flicking left
or right or pressing 4 or 2; to view
additional information on the current
K button
photograph, press 1 or 3 (0 229).
Thumbnail Playback
To view multiple images, press the W (M)
button when a picture is displayed full
frame. The number of images displayed
increases from 4 to 9 to 72 each time the
W (M) button is pressed, and decreases
with each press of the X button. Slide a
finger over the touch screen to scroll up W (M) button
or down or use the multi selector to
highlight images.
223
Playback Controls
1
2
3
4
5
6
1 O (Q): Delete the current
picture.......................................... 245
2 G: View the menus ............... 248
3 L (Z/Q): Protect the current
picture.......................................... 240
4 X: Zoom in ................................... 238
5 W (M): View multiple images ... 223
6 J: Use in combination with the
multi selector as described below
❚❚ Using the J Button with the Multi Selector
J+
Display slot/folder selection dialog. To choose card and
folder from which pictures are played back, highlight
slot and press 2 to display list of folders, then highlight
folder and press J.
J+
Create retouched copy of current photograph (0 278).
J+
Upload photographs over a wireless or Ethernet network
when a WT-7 is attached to the camera (0 295).
A Two Memory Cards
If two memory cards are inserted, you can select a memory card for
playback by pressing the W (M) button when 72 thumbnails are
displayed.
224
A Rotate Tall
To display “tall” (portrait-orientation)
photographs in tall orientation, select On for
the Rotate tall option in the playback menu
(0 249).
A Image Review
When On is selected for Image review in the playback menu (0 249),
photographs are automatically displayed in the monitor after shooting
(because the camera is already in the correct orientation, images are
not rotated automatically during image review). In continuous release
mode, display begins when shooting ends, with the first photograph in
the current series displayed.
A See Also
For information on:
• Choosing how long the monitor will remain on when no operations
are performed, see A > Custom Setting c4 (Monitor off delay,
0 264).
• Choosing the role played by the center of the multi selector,
see A > Custom Setting f2 (Multi selector center button, 0 268).
• Using the command dials for image or menu navigation,
see A > Custom Setting f4 (Customize command dials) > Menus
and playback (0 269).
225
Using the Touch Screen
During playback, the touch-sensitive monitor can be used to:
Flick left or right to view
other images.
View other
images
In full frame view, you can
touch the bottom of the
display to display a frame
advance bar, then slide your
finger left or right to scroll
rapidly to other images.
Scroll rapidly to
other images
Frame advance bar
Use stretch and pinch
gestures to zoom in and out
and slide to scroll (0 238).
Zoom in (photos
You can also give the display
only)
two quick taps to zoom in
from full-frame playback or
cancel zoom.
226
To “zoom out” to a
thumbnail view (0 223), use
a pinch gesture in full-frame
View thumbnails playback. Use pinch and
stretch to choose the
number of images displayed
from 4, 9, and 72 frames.
Tap the on-screen guide to
start movie playback
(movies are indicated by a 1
icon). Tap the display to
pause or resume, or tap Z to
exit to full-frame playback
(note that some of the icons
View movies
in the movie playback
display do not respond to
touch-screen operations).
Guide
227
The i Button
Pressing the i button during full-frame
or thumbnail playback displays the
options listed below. Select options
using the touch screen or the multi
selector and J button.
• Rating: Rate the current picture (0 241).
i button
• Select to send to smart device/deselect
(photographs only): Select photos for
upload to a smart device.
• Retouch (photographs only): Use the
options in the retouch menu (0 278) to
create a retouched copy of the current
photograph.
• Volume control (movies only): Adjust
playback volume for movies.
• Trim movie (movies only): Trim unwanted footage from movies
(0 78). Movies can also be edited by pressing the i button
when movie playback is paused.
• Choose slot and folder: Choose a folder for playback. Highlight a
slot and press 2 to list the folders on the selected card, then
highlight a folder and press J to view the pictures in the
highlighted folder.
To exit the i-button menu and return to playback, press the
i button again.
228
Photo Information
Photo information is superimposed on images displayed in fullframe playback. Press 1 or 3 to cycle through photo
information as shown below. Note that “image only”, shooting
data, RGB histograms, highlights, and overview data are only
displayed if corresponding option is selected for Playback
display options (0 248). Location data are only displayed if
embedded in the picture (0 221).
File information
None (image only)
Overview data
Highlights
Location data
RGB histogram
Shooting data
229
❚❚ File Information
12 3
4
5
15
14
13
12
6
7
11
10
Protect status............................... 240
Retouch indicator ....................... 278
Upload marking.......................... 243
Focus point * ...........................94, 105
Frame number/total number of
frames
6 AF area brackets * .............................9
7 Image quality .................................88
9 8
8 Image size .......................................91
9 Image area ......................................83
10 Time of recording.................21, 271
11 Date of recording .................21, 271
12 Current card slot ..................... 35, 93
13 Rating............................................ 241
14 Folder name................................. 250
15 File name...................................... 250
* Displayed only if Focus point is selected for Playback display options (0 248)
and selected photograph was taken using viewfinder.
1
2
3
4
5
230
❚❚ Highlights
1
2
3
*
1 Image highlights
2 Folder number–frame number
3 Current channel *
* Flashing areas indicate highlights (areas that may be
overexposed) for current channel. Hold the W (M)
button and press 4 or 2 to cycle through channels
as follows:
W (M) button
RGB
(all channels)
R
(red)
G
(green)
B
(blue)
231
❚❚ RGB Histogram
5
1
6
2
7
3
4
8
1 Image highlights *
5 Histogram (RGB channel). In all
histograms, horizontal axis gives
2 Folder number–frame number
pixel brightness, vertical axis
3 White balance ............................. 156
number of pixels.
Color temperature ............... 163
6 Histogram (red channel)
White balance fine-tuning
............................................... 161 7 Histogram (green channel)
Preset manual ....................... 165 8 Histogram (blue channel)
4 Current channel *
* Flashing areas indicate highlights (areas that may be
overexposed) for current channel. Hold the W (M)
button and press 4 or 2 to cycle through channels
as follows:
W (M) button
RGB
(all channels)
R
(red)
G
(green)
Highlight display off
232
B
(blue)
A Playback Zoom
To zoom in on the photograph when the
histogram is displayed, press X. Use the X
and W (M) buttons to zoom in and out and
scroll the image with the multi selector. The
histogram will be updated to show only the
data for the portion of the image visible in
the monitor.
A Histograms
Camera histograms are intended as a guide only and may differ from
those displayed in imaging applications. Some sample histograms are
shown below:
If the image contains
objects with a wide range of
brightnesses, the
distribution of tones will be
relatively even.
If the image is dark, tone
distribution will be shifted
to the left.
If the image is bright, tone
distribution will be shifted
to the right.
Increasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution of tones to
the right, while decreasing exposure compensation shifts the
distribution to the left. Histograms can provide a rough idea of overall
exposure when bright ambient lighting makes it difficult to see
photographs in the monitor.
233
❚❚ Shooting Data
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1 Metering ....................................... 124 6 Focus mode ............................. 41, 94
Shutter speed .................... 129, 131
Lens VR (vibration reduction) 3
Aperture............................... 130, 131 7 White balance 4 ........................... 156
2 Exposure mode ........................... 126 8 White balance fine-tuning....... 161
ISO sensitivity 1 ............................ 119 9 Color space .................................. 253
3 Exposure compensation ........... 139 10 Camera name
Optimal exposure tuning 2 ....... 263
11 Image area ......................................83
4 Focal length ................................. 218
12 Folder number–frame number
5 Lens data ...................................... 218
13
14
15
16
13 Flash type 5
16 Flash control mode 5 .................. 190
Flash compensation 5 ................ 194
14 Remote flash control 5 ............... 202
5
15 Flash mode ................................. 192
234
17
17 Picture Control 6...........................175
18
19
20
21
22
23
18 High ISO noise reduction..........253 20 HDR exposure differential ........ 182
Long exposure noise
HDR smoothing........................... 182
reduction .....................................253 21 Vignette control .......................... 253
19 Active D-Lighting........................180 22 Retouch history........................... 278
23 Image comment ......................... 273
235
24
25
24 Name of photographer 7 ........... 273 25 Copyright holder 7 ...................... 273
1 Displayed in red if photo was taken with auto ISO sensitivity control on.
2 Displayed if Custom Setting b7 (Fine-tune optimal exposure, 0 263) has been set
to a value other than zero for any metering method.
3 Displayed only if VR lens is attached.
4 Also includes color temperature of photos taken using auto white balance.
5 Displayed only if optional flash unit (0 187) is used.
6 The items displayed vary with the Picture Control selected when the picture was taken.
7 Copyright information is only displayed if recorded with the photograph using the
Copyright information option in the setup menu.
❚❚ Location Data
The latitude, longitude, and other location data are supplied by
and vary with the GPS or smart device (0 221). In the case of
movies, the data give the location at the start of recording.
236
❚❚ Overview Data
1 2 345
17
6
18 19 20 21 22
7
8 30
29
9
16
28
27 26
23
24
25
15 14 13 12 11 10
1 Frame number/total number of
17 Rating ............................................ 241
frames
18 Metering ....................................... 124
2 Upload marking ..........................243 19 Exposure mode ........................... 126
3 Protect status...............................240 20 Shutter speed ..................... 129, 131
4 Retouch indicator .......................278 21 Aperture............................... 130, 131
5 Camera name
22 ISO sensitivity 1 ............................ 119
6 Image comment indicator........273 23 Focal length ................................. 218
7 Location data indicator .............221 24 Active D-Lighting ....................... 180
8 Histogram showing the
25 Picture Control ............................ 175
distribution of tones in the image 26 Color space................................... 253
(0 233).
27 Flash mode 2 ................................. 192
9 Image quality................................. 88
28 White balance.............................. 156
10 Image size....................................... 91
Color temperature ............... 163
11 Image area...................................... 83
White balance fine-tuning
............................................... 161
12 File name ......................................250
Preset manual ....................... 165
13 Time of recording ................ 21, 271
14 Folder name .................................250 29 Flash compensation 2 ................. 194
Commander mode 2
15 Date of recording................. 21, 271
30
Exposure compensation ........... 139
16 Current card slot......................35, 93
1 Displayed in red if photo was taken with auto ISO sensitivity control on.
2 Displayed only if photo was taken with optional flash unit (0 187).
237
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom
To zoom in on an image displayed in fullframe playback, press the X button or the
center of the multi selector or give the
display two quick taps. The following
operations can be performed while zoom
is in effect:
X button
To
Description
Press X or use stretch
gestures to zoom in to
maximum of approximately
32× (large images in FX/
36 × 24 format), 24×
(medium images) or 16×
Zoom in or out/ (small images). Press W (M)
or use pinch gestures to zoom out. While photo is
view other
areas of image zoomed in, use multi selector or slide finger over
screen to view areas of image not visible in monitor.
Keep multi selector pressed to scroll rapidly to other
areas of frame. Navigation window is displayed when
zoom ratio is altered; area currently visible in monitor
is indicated by yellow border. Bar under navigation
window shows zoom ratio, turning green at 1 : 1.
To create crop image to area currently visible in
monitor, press i, highlight Quick crop and press J.
Crop image
Note that Quick crop is not available when RGB
histogram is displayed (0 233).
238
To
Select faces
Description
Faces detected during
On-screen guide
zoom are indicated by
white borders in navigation
window. Rotate subcommand dial or tap onscreen guide to view other
faces.
Rotate main command dial or tap e or f icons at
bottom of display to view same location in other
photos at current zoom ratio. Playback zoom is
cancelled when a movie is displayed.
Change protect Press L (Z/Q) to protect or remove protection from
status
images (0 240).
Press the shutter-release button halfway or press the
Return to
shooting mode K button to exit to shooting mode.
Display menus Press G to view the menus (0 248).
View other
images
239
Protecting Photographs from Deletion
In full-frame, zoom, and thumbnail playback, the L (Z/Q)
button can be used to protect photographs from accidental
deletion. Protected files cannot be deleted using the O (Q)
button or the Delete option in the playback menu. Note that
protected images will be deleted when the memory card is
formatted (0 271).
To protect a photograph:
1 Select an image.
Display the image in full-frame playback or playback zoom or
highlight it in the thumbnail list.
2 Press the L (Z/Q) button.
The photograph will be marked with a
P icon. To remove protection from
the photograph so that it can be
deleted, display the photograph or
highlight it in the thumbnail list and
then press the L (Z/Q) button.
L (Z/Q) button
A Removing Protection from All Images
To remove protection from all images in the folder or folders currently
selected in the Playback folder menu, press the L (Z/Q) and O (Q)
buttons together for about two seconds during playback.
240
Rating Pictures
Rate pictures or mark them as candidates for later deletion.
Ratings can also be viewed in ViewNX-i and Capture NX-D.
Rating is not available with protected images.
1 Select an image.
Display the image or highlight it in the thumbnail list in
thumbnail playback.
2 Display playback options.
Press the i button to display playback
options.
i button
3 Select Rating.
Highlight Rating and press 2.
4 Choose a rating.
Press 4 or 2 to choose a rating of
from zero to five stars, or select d to
mark the picture as a candidate for
later deletion. Press J to complete
the operation.
241
A Rating Pictures with the Fn2 Button
If Rating is selected for Custom Setting f1 (Custom control
assignment) > Fn2 button, pictures can be rated by keeping the Fn2
button pressed and pressing 4 or 2 (0 268).
242
Selecting Photos for Upload
Follow the steps below to select photos for upload to the smart
device. Movies cannot be selected for upload; photos are
uploaded at a size of 2 megapixels.
Selecting Individual Photos
1 Select a photo.
Display the photo or highlight it in the thumbnail list in
thumbnail playback.
2 Display playback options.
Press the i button to display playback
options.
i button
3 Choose Select to send to smart
device/deselect.
Highlight Select to send to smart
device/deselect and press J.
Pictures selected for upload are
indicated by a W icon; to deselect,
display or highlight the image and
repeat Steps 2 and 3.
243
Selecting Multiple Photos
Follow the steps below to change the upload status of multiple
photos.
1 Choose Select image(s).
In the playback menu, select Select to
send to smart device, then highlight
Select image(s) and press 2.
2 Select photos.
Use the multi selector to highlight photos and press the
center of the multi selector to select or deselect (to view the
highlighted picture full screen, press and hold the X button).
Selected photos are marked by a W icon.
3 Press J.
Press J to complete the operation.
A Deselecting All Photos
To deselect all photos, select Select to send to smart device in the
playback menu, highlight Deselect all, and press J. A confirmation
dialog will be displayed; highlight Yes and press J to remove upload
marking from all photos on the memory card.
244
Deleting Photographs
To delete the current photograph, press the O (Q) button. To
delete multiple selected photographs, use the Delete option in
the playback menu. Once deleted, photographs cannot be
recovered. Note that pictures that are protected or hidden
cannot be deleted.
During Playback
Press the O (Q) button to delete the current photograph.
1 Press the O (Q) button.
A confirmation dialog will be
displayed.
O (Q) button
2 Press the O (Q) button again.
To delete the photograph, press the
O (Q) button. To exit without
deleting the photograph, press the K
button.
O (Q) button
A See Also
For information on choosing the image displayed after an image is
deleted, see D > After delete (0 249).
245
The Playback Menu
The Delete option in the playback menu contains the following
options. Note that depending on the number of images, some
time may be required for deletion.
Option
Q Selected
R All
Description
Delete selected pictures.
Delete all pictures in the folder currently selected for
playback (0 248). If two cards are inserted, you can
select the card from which pictures will be deleted.
❚❚ Selected: Deleting Selected Photographs
1 Choose Delete > Selected.
Select Delete in the playback menu.
Highlight Selected and press 2.
2 Highlight a picture.
Use the multi selector to
highlight a picture (to view
the highlighted picture full
screen, press and hold the
X button).
246
3 Select the highlighted
picture.
Press the center of the
multi selector to select the
highlighted picture.
Selected pictures are
marked by a O icon. Repeat
steps 2 and 3 to select additional pictures; to deselect a
picture, highlight it and press the center of the multi selector.
4 Press J to complete the operation.
A confirmation dialog will be
displayed; highlight Yes and press J.
247
Menu List
This section lists the options available in the camera menus. For
more information, see the Menu Guide available from Nikon
websites (0 i).
D The Playback Menu: Managing Images
Delete
Selected
All
Playback folder
(Folder name)
All
Current
Hide image
Select/set
Deselect all
Playback display options
Basic photo info
Focus point
Additional photo info
None (image only)
Highlights
RGB histogram
Shooting data
Overview
248
Delete multiple images (0 246).
(defaults to All)
Choose a folder for playback.
Hide or reveal images. Hidden images
are displayed only in the “Hide image”
menu and cannot be played back.
Choose the information available in the
playback photo information display
(0 229).
Copy image(s)
Select source
Select image(s)
Select destination folder
Copy image(s)?
Image review
On
Off
After delete
Show next
Show previous
Continue as before
After burst, show
First image in burst
Last image in burst
Auto image rotation
On
Off
Rotate tall
On
Off
Slide show
Start
Image type
Frame interval
Select to send to smart device
Select image(s)
Deselect all
Copy pictures from one memory card to
another. This option is only available
when two memory cards are inserted in
the camera.
(defaults to Off)
Choose whether pictures are
automatically displayed in the monitor
immediately after shooting (0 225).
(defaults to Show next)
Choose the picture displayed after an
image is deleted.
(defaults to Last image in burst)
Choose whether the camera displays
the first or the last photo in the burst
after photos are taken in continuous
release mode.
(defaults to On)
Choose whether to record camera
orientation when taking photographs.
(defaults to On)
Choose whether to rotate “tall”
(portrait-orientation) pictures for
display during playback (0 225).
View a slide show of the pictures in the
current playback folder.
Select photos for upload to a smart
device (0 244).
249
C The Photo Shooting Menu:
Shooting Options
Photo shooting menu bank
A–D
Extended photo menu banks
On
Off
Storage folder
Rename
Select folder by number
Select folder from list
File naming
File naming
Primary slot selection
XQD card slot
SD card slot
Secondary slot function
Overflow
Backup
RAW primary - JPEG secondary
250
Recall photo shooting menu settings
previously stored in a photo shooting
menu bank. Changes to settings are
stored in the current bank.
(defaults to Off)
Choose whether photo shooting menu
banks store exposure mode, shutter
speed (exposure modes S and M),
aperture (modes A and M), and flash
mode.
Select the folder in which subsequent
images will be stored.
Choose the three-letter prefix used in
naming the image files in which
photographs are stored. The default
prefix is “DSC”.
(defaults to XQD card slot)
Choose the slot that serves as the
primary slot when two memory cards
are inserted.
(defaults to Overflow)
Choose the role played by the card in
the secondary slot when two memory
cards are inserted (0 93).
Flash control
Flash control mode
Wireless flash options
Remote flash control
Radio remote flash info
Image area
Choose image area
Auto DX crop
Viewfinder mask display
Image quality
NEF (RAW) + JPEG fine★
NEF (RAW) + JPEG fine
NEF (RAW) + JPEG normal★
NEF (RAW) + JPEG normal
NEF (RAW) + JPEG basic★
NEF (RAW) + JPEG basic
NEF (RAW)
JPEG fine★
JPEG fine
JPEG normal★
JPEG normal
JPEG basic★
JPEG basic
TIFF (RGB)
Image size
JPEG/TIFF
NEF (RAW)
Choose the flash control mode for
optional flash units mounted on the
camera accessory shoe or adjust
settings for off-camera flash
photography (0 190).
Choose the image area (0 83) and
enable or disable the viewfinder mask
display (0 85).
(defaults to JPEG normal)
Choose a file format and compression
ratio (image quality, 0 88). The
compression for options indicated by a
star (“★”) prioritizes quality, while that
for images without a star gives priority
to reducing file size.
Choose the image size, in pixels (0 91).
Separate options are available for JPEG/
TIFF and for NEF (RAW) images.
251
NEF (RAW) recording
NEF (RAW) compression
NEF (RAW) bit depth
ISO sensitivity settings
ISO sensitivity
Auto ISO sensitivity control
White balance
Auto
Natural light auto
Incandescent
Fluorescent
Direct sunlight
Flash
Cloudy
Shade
Choose color temp.
Preset manual
Set Picture Control
Auto
Standard
Neutral
Vivid
Monochrome
Portrait
Landscape
Flat
Manage Picture Control
Save/edit
Rename
Delete
Load/save
252
Choose the type of compression and
the bit depth for NEF (RAW) images
(0 90).
Adjust ISO sensitivity settings for
photographs (0 119, 121).
(defaults to Auto)
Match white balance to the light source
(0 156).
(defaults to Auto)
Choose how new photos will be
processed. Select according to the type
of scene or your creative intent (0 175).
Create custom Picture Controls.
Color space
sRGB
Adobe RGB
Active D-Lighting
Auto
Extra high
High
Normal
Low
Off
Long exposure NR
On
Off
High ISO NR
High
Normal
Low
Off
Vignette control
High
Normal
Low
Off
Auto distortion control
On
Off
(defaults to sRGB)
Choose a color space for photographs.
(defaults to Off)
Preserve details in highlights and
shadows, creating photographs with
natural contrast (0 180).
(defaults to Off)
Reduce “noise” (bright spots or fog) in
photos taken at slow shutter speeds.
(defaults to Normal)
Reduce “noise” (randomly-spaced
bright pixels) in photos taken at high
ISO sensitivities.
(defaults to Normal)
Reduce the drop in brightness at the
edges of photographs when using type
G, E, and D lenses (PC lenses excluded).
The effect is most noticeable at
maximum aperture.
(defaults to Off)
Reduce barrel distortion when shooting
with wide-angle lenses and to reduce
pin-cushion distortion when shooting
with long lenses.
253
Flicker reduction
Flicker reduction setting
Flicker reduction indicator
Auto bracketing set
AE & flash bracketing
AE bracketing
Flash bracketing
WB bracketing
ADL bracketing
Multiple exposure
Multiple exposure mode
Number of shots
Overlay mode
Keep all exposures
Select first exposure (NEF)
HDR (high dynamic range)
HDR mode
Exposure differential
Smoothing
254
These options take effect during
viewfinder photography. Select Enable
for Flicker reduction setting to adjust
shot timing to reduce the effects of
flicker under fluorescent or mercury
vapor lighting. Flicker reduction
indicator controls the display of the
FLICKER icon in the viewfinder: if On is
selected, the icon will be displayed if
flicker is detected when the shutterrelease button is pressed halfway and
will flash if flicker is detected with
Disable is selected for Flicker
reduction setting (to enable flicker
reduction, select Enable).
(defaults to AE & flash bracketing)
Choose the setting or settings
bracketed when auto bracketing is in
effect (0 142).
Record from two to ten NEF (RAW)
exposures as a single photograph; if
desired, an existing photo can be
chosen as the first exposure using
Select first exposure (NEF), but note
that only large-size (size L) NEF (RAW)
images can be selected. More
information can be found in the Menu
Guide available for download from the
Nikon website (0 i).
Preserve details in highlights and
shadows when photographing highcontrast scenes (0 182).
Interval timer shooting
Start
Choose start day/time
Interval
Intervals×shots/interval
Exposure smoothing
Silent photography
Interval priority
Starting storage folder
Focus shift shooting
Start
No. of shots
Focus step width
Interval until next shot
Exposure smoothing
Silent photography
Starting storage folder
Silent live view photography
On (Mode 1)
On (Mode 2)
Off
Take photographs at the selected
interval until the specified number of
shots has been recorded. More
information can be found in the Menu
Guide available for download from the
Nikon website (0 i).
Automatically vary focus over a series of
photographs (0 212).
(defaults to Off)
Eliminate the sound of the shutter
during live view photography (0 49).
255
1 The Movie Shooting Menu:
Movie Shooting Options
Reset movie shooting menu
Yes
No
File naming
Destination
XQD card slot
SD card slot
Image area
Choose image area
Auto DX crop
Frame size/frame rate
3840×2160; 30p
3840×2160; 25p
3840×2160; 24p
1920×1080; 60p
1920×1080; 50p
1920×1080; 30p
1920×1080; 25p
1920×1080; 24p
1280× 720; 60p
1280× 720; 50p
1920×1080; 30p ×4 (slow-mo)
1920×1080; 25p ×4 (slow-mo)
1920×1080; 24p ×5 (slow-mo)
256
Select Yes to restore movie shooting
menu options to their default values.
Choose the three-letter prefix used in
naming the image files in which movies
are stored. The default prefix is “DSC”.
(defaults to XQD card slot)
Choose the slot to which movies are
recorded.
Choose the image area (0 68).
(defaults to 1920×1080; 60p)
Choose movie frame size (in pixels) and
frame rate (0 69).
Movie quality
High quality
Normal
Movie file type
MOV
MP4
ISO sensitivity settings
Maximum sensitivity
Auto ISO control (mode M)
ISO sensitivity (mode M)
White balance
Same as photo settings
Auto
Natural light auto
Incandescent
Fluorescent
Direct sunlight
Cloudy
Shade
Choose color temp.
Preset manual
Set Picture Control
Same as photo settings
Auto
Standard
Neutral
Vivid
Monochrome
Portrait
Landscape
Flat
(defaults to High quality)
Choose movie quality (0 69).
(defaults to MOV)
Choose the movie file type.
Adjust ISO sensitivity settings for
movies.
(defaults to Same as photo settings)
Choose the white balance for movies
(0 156). Select Same as photo
settings to use the option currently
selected for photos.
(defaults to Same as photo settings)
Choose a Picture Control for movies
(0 175). Select Same as photo
settings to use the option currently
selected for photos.
257
Manage Picture Control
Save/edit
Rename
Delete
Load/save
Active D-Lighting
Same as photo settings
Extra high
High
Normal
Low
Off
High ISO NR
High
Normal
Low
Off
Flicker reduction
Auto
50 Hz
60 Hz
Microphone sensitivity
Auto sensitivity
Manual sensitivity
Microphone off
258
Create custom Picture Controls.
(defaults to Off)
Preserve details in highlights and
shadows, creating movies with natural
contrast (0 180). Select Same as photo
settings to use the option currently
selected for photos.
(defaults to Normal)
Reduce “noise” (randomly-spaced
bright pixels) in movies recorded at high
ISO sensitivities.
(defaults to Auto)
Reduce flicker and banding caused by
fluorescent or mercury-vapor lighting
during live view (0 37) and movie
recording (0 59).
(defaults to Auto sensitivity)
Turn the built-in or external
microphones (0 295) on or off or adjust
microphone sensitivity.
Attenuator
Enable
Disable
Frequency response
Wide range
Vocal range
Wind noise reduction
On
Off
Electronic VR
On
Off
Time-lapse movie
Start
Interval
Shooting time
Exposure smoothing
Silent photography
Image area
Frame size/frame rate
Interval priority
(defaults to Disable)
Reduce microphone gain and prevent
audio distortion when recording
movies in loud environments.
(defaults to Wide range)
Choose the frequency response for the
built-in and external microphones
(0 295).
(defaults to Off)
Choose whether to enable the built-in
microphone’s low-cut filter to reduce
wind noise.
(defaults to Off)
Choose whether to enable electronic
vibration reduction in movie mode.
The camera automatically takes photos
at selected intervals to create a silent
time-lapse movie. More information can
be found in the Menu Guide available for
download from the Nikon website (0 i).
259
A Custom Settings:
Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Custom settings bank
A–D
a Autofocus
a1 AF-C priority selection
Release
Focus + release
Release + focus
Focus
a2 AF-S priority selection
Release
Focus
a3 Focus tracking with lock-on
Blocked shot AF response
Subject motion
a4 3D-tracking face-detection
On
Off
260
Recall Custom Settings previously
stored in a Custom Settings menu bank.
Changes to settings are stored in the
current bank.
(defaults to Release)
When AF-C is selected for viewfinder
photography, this option controls
whether photographs can be taken
whenever the shutter-release button is
pressed (release priority) or only when
the camera is in focus (focus priority).
(defaults to Focus)
When AF-S is selected for viewfinder
photography, this option controls
whether photographs can be taken only
when the camera is in focus (focus
priority) or whenever the shutter-release
button is pressed (release priority).
Control how autofocus adjusts to
changes in the distance to the subject
when AF-C is selected for viewfinder
photography.
(defaults to Off)
Choose whether the camera detects
and focuses on faces when 3D-tracking
is selected for AF-area mode (0 100).
a5 3D-tracking watch area
Wide
Normal
a6 Number of focus points
55 points
15 points
a7 Store by orientation
Focus point
Focus point and AF-area mode
Off
a8 AF activation
Shutter/AF-ON
AF-ON only
a9 Limit AF-area mode selection
Single-point AF
Dynamic-area AF (9 points)
Dynamic-area AF (25 points)
Dynamic-area AF (72 points)
Dynamic-area AF (153 points)
3D-tracking
Group-area AF
Auto-area AF
(defaults to Normal)
Choose the area monitored by pressing
the shutter-release button halfway
when 3D-tracking is selected for
AF-area mode (0 100).
(defaults to 55 points)
Choose the number of focus points
available for manual focus-point
selection in the viewfinder.
(defaults to Off)
Choose whether the viewfinder stores
the focus points and AF-area mode for
vertical and horizontal orientations
separately.
(defaults to Shutter/AF-ON)
Choose whether the camera focuses
when the shutter-release button is
pressed halfway. If AF-ON only is
selected, the camera will not focus
when the shutter-release button is
pressed halfway.
Choose the AF-area modes that can be
selected using the AF-mode button and
sub-command dial in viewfinder
photography (0 100).
261
a10 Autofocus mode restrictions
AF-S
AF-C
No restrictions
a11 Focus point wrap-around
Wrap
No wrap
a12 Focus point options
Focus point illumination
Manual focus mode
Dynamic-area AF assist
a13 Manual focus ring in AF mode
Enable
Disable
b Metering/exposure
b1 ISO sensitivity step value
1/3 step
1/2 step
1 step
b2 EV steps for exposure cntrl
1/3 step
1/2 step
1 step
b3 Exp./flash comp. step value
1/3 step
1/2 step
1 step
262
(defaults to No restrictions)
Choose the autofocus modes available
in viewfinder photography (0 98).
(defaults to No wrap)
Choose whether viewfinder focus-point
selection “wraps around” from one
edge of the display to another.
Adjust settings for the focus-point
display in the viewfinder.
(defaults to Enable)
This option is available with compatible
lenses. Select Disable to disable focus
using the focus ring in autofocus mode.
(defaults to 1/3 step)
Select the increments used when
making adjustments to ISO sensitivity.
(defaults to 1/3 step)
Select the increments used when
making adjustments to shutter speed,
aperture, and bracketing.
(defaults to 1/3 step)
Select the increments used when
making adjustments to exposure and
flash compensation.
b4 Easy exposure compensation
On (Auto reset)
On
Off
b5 Matrix metering
Face detection on
Face detection off
b6 Center-weighted area
 8 mm– 20 mm, Average
b7 Fine-tune optimal exposure
Yes
No
c Timers/AE lock
c1 Shutter-release button AE-L
On (half press)
On (burst mode)
Off
c2 Standby timer
4 s–30 min, No limit
(defaults to Off)
Choose whether exposure
compensation can be adjusted solely by
rotating a command dial, without
pressing the E button.
(defaults to Face detection on)
Choose Face detection on to enable
face detection when shooting portraits
with matrix metering during viewfinder
photography (0 124).
(defaults to  12 mm)
Choose the size of the area given the
most weight when center-weighted
metering is used in viewfinder
photography. If a non-CPU or AF-S
Fisheye NIKKOR 8–15mm f/3.5–4.5E ED
lens is attached, the size of the area is
fixed at 12 mm.
(defaults to No)
Fine-tune exposure for each metering
method. Higher values produce
brighter exposures, lower values darker
exposures.
(defaults to Off)
Choose whether exposure locks when
the shutter-release button is pressed.
(defaults to 6 s)
Choose how long the camera continues
to meter exposure when no operations
are performed (0 34).
263
c3 Self-timer
Self-timer delay
Number of shots
Interval between shots
c4 Monitor off delay
Playback
Menus
Information display
Image review
Live view
d Shooting/display
d1 CL mode shooting speed
6 fps–1 fps
d2 Max. continuous release
1–200
d3 ISO display
Show ISO sensitivity
Show frame count
d4 Sync. release mode options
Sync
No sync
d5 Exposure delay mode
3 s–0.2 s, Off
264
Choose the length of the shutter release
delay, the number of shots taken, and
the interval between shots in self-timer
mode.
Choose how long the monitor remains
on when no operations are performed.
(defaults to 5 fps)
Choose the frame advance rate for
CL mode. Note that the rate may change
depending on the power source
(0 114).
(defaults to 200)
Choose the maximum number of shots
that can be taken in a single burst in
continuous release mode.
(defaults to Show frame count)
Choose whether ISO sensitivity is
displayed in the control panel in place
of the number of exposures remaining.
(defaults to Sync)
Choose whether the shutter releases on
remote cameras synchronize with the
shutter release on the master camera.
(defaults to Off)
In situations in which the slightest
camera movement can blur pictures,
shutter release can be delayed until
approximately 0.2 to 3 seconds after the
mirror is raised.
d6 Electronic front-curtain shutter
(defaults to Disable)
Enable
Enable or disable the electronic frontcurtain shutter in Q, QC, or MUP mode,
Disable
eliminating blur caused by shutter
motion. A mechanical shutter is used in
other release modes, regardless of the
option selected.
d7 File number sequence
(defaults to On)
On
Choose how the camera assigns file
numbers.
Off
Reset
d8 Peaking highlight color
(defaults to Red)
Red
Choose the highlight color for focus
peaking. Peaking can be turned on or
Yellow
off and its sensitivity adjusted by
Blue
pressing the i button during live view
White
and selecting Peaking level (0 45, 65).
d9 Viewfinder grid display
(defaults to Off)
On
Choose whether to display a framing
grid in the viewfinder.
Off
d10 LCD illumination
(defaults to Off)
On
Choose whether the control panel and
button backlights are illuminated while
Off
the standby timer is active.
A The Electronic Front-Curtain Shutter
A type G, E, or D lens is recommended; select Disable if you notice
lines or fog when shooting with other lenses. The fastest shutter
speed and maximum ISO sensitivity available with the electronic
front-curtain shutter are 1/2000 s and ISO 25600, respectively.
265
d11 Live view in continuous mode
On
Off
d12 Optical VR
On
Off
e Bracketing/flash
e1 Flash sync speed
1/250 s (Auto FP), 1/250 s–1/60 s
e2 Flash shutter speed
1/60 s–30 s
e3 Exposure comp. for flash
Entire frame
Background only
(defaults to On)
Choose whether full-frame playback is
available during burst shooting (release
modes CL, CH, and QC) in live view (0 37).
If Off is selected, not only the monitor
but also the monitor backlight will turn
off during exposures.
(defaults to On)
Enable or disable vibration reduction on
compatible AF-P lenses not equipped
with a vibration reduction switch.
(defaults to 1/250 s)
Choose a flash sync speed.
(defaults to 1/60 s)
Choose the slowest shutter available
when the flash is used in modes P and A.
(defaults to Entire frame)
Choose how the camera adjusts flash
level when exposure compensation is
used.
A Fixing Shutter Speed at the Flash Sync Speed Limit
To fix shutter speed at the sync speed limit in shutter-priority auto or
manual exposure modes, select the next shutter speed after the
slowest possible shutter speed (30 s or %). An X (flash sync indicator)
will be displayed in the viewfinder and control panel.
A Auto FP High-Speed Sync
Auto FP high-speed sync allows the flash to be used at the highest
shutter speed supported by the camera, making it possible to choose
the maximum aperture for reduced depth of field even when the
subject is backlit in bright sunlight. The information display flash
mode indicator shows “FP” when auto FP high-speed sync is active.
266
e4 Auto M ISO sensitivity control
Subject and background
Subject only
e5 Modeling flash
On
Off
e6 Auto bracketing (mode M)
Flash/speed
Flash/speed/aperture
Flash/aperture
Flash only
e7 Bracketing order
MTR > under > over
Under > MTR > over
(defaults to Subject and background)
Choose whether auto ISO sensitivity
control for flash photography is
adjusted to correctly expose both the
subject and background or the main
subject only.
(defaults to On)
Choose whether optional CLScompatible flash units (0 288) emit a
modeling flash when the camera
Pv button is pressed during viewfinder
photography.
(defaults to Flash/speed)
Choose the settings affected when
exposure/flash bracketing is enabled in
exposure mode M.
(defaults to MTR > under > over)
Choose the bracketing order for
exposure, flash, and white balance
bracketing.
267
f Controls
f1 Custom control assignment
Preview button
Preview button + y
Fn1 button
Fn1 button + y
Fn2 button
AF-ON button
Sub-selector
Sub-selector center
Sub-selector center + y
BKT button + y
Movie record button + y
Lens focus function buttons
f2 Multi selector center button
Shooting mode
Playback mode
Live view
f3 Shutter spd & aperture lock
Shutter speed lock
Aperture lock
268
Choose the roles assigned to camera
controls, either alone or in combination
with the command dials.
Choose the role played by the center of
the multi selector.
Lock shutter speed at the value
currently selected in mode S or M, or
aperture at the value currently selected
in mode A or M.
f4 Customize command dials
Reverse rotation
Change main/sub
Aperture setting
Menus and playback
Sub-dial frame advance
f5 Multi selector
Restart standby timer
Do nothing
f6 Release button to use dial
Yes
No
f7 Reverse indicators
Choose the roles played by the main
and sub-command dials.
(defaults to Do nothing)
Choose whether using the multi
selector activates the standby timer
(0 34).
(defaults to No)
Selecting Yes allows adjustments that
are normally made by holding a button
and rotating a command dial to be
made by rotating the command dial
after the button is released. Setting
ends when the button is pressed again,
the shutter-release button is pressed
halfway, or the standby timer expires.
(defaults to
)
If
(W) is selected, the
exposure indicators in the control panel,
viewfinder, and information display are
displayed with negative values on the
left and positive values on the right.
Select
(V) to display
positive values on the left and negative
values on the right.
269
f8 Live view button options
Enable
Enable (standby timer active)
Disable
f9 D switch
LCD backlight (D)
D and information display
f10 Assign MB-D18 buttons
Fn button
Fn button + y
AF-ON button
Multi selector
g Movie
g1 Custom control assignment
Preview button
Preview button + y
Fn1 button
Fn1 button + y
Fn2 button
Sub-selector center
Sub-selector center + y
Shutter-release button
g2 Highlight brightness
255–180
270
(defaults to Enable)
The a button can be disabled to
prevent live view starting accidentally.
(defaults to LCD backlight (D))
Choose displays illuminated by rotating
the power switch to D.
Choose the functions assigned to the
controls on the optional MB-D18 multipower battery pack (0 299).
Choose the roles assigned to camera
controls, either alone or in combination
with the command dials, when the live
view selector is rotated to 1 in live view.
Note that if Record movies is selected
for Shutter-release button, the
shutter-release button cannot be used
for any operation other than recording
movies.
(defaults to 248)
Choose the brightness needed to
trigger the movie highlight display. The
lower the value, the greater the range of
brightnesses that will be shown as
highlights. If 255 is selected, the
highlight display will show only areas
that are potentially overexposed.
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup
Format memory card
XQD card slot
SD card slot
Language
See page 345.
Time zone and date
Time zone
Date and time
Sync with smart device
Date format
Daylight saving time
Monitor brightness
Menus/playback
Live view
To begin formatting, choose a memory
card slot and select Yes. Note that
formatting permanently deletes all
pictures and other data on the card in the
selected slot. Before formatting, be sure
to make backup copies as required.
Choose a language for camera menus
and messages.
Change time zones, set the camera
clock, synchronize the clock with the
clock on a smart device, choose the date
display order, and turn daylight saving
time on or off. If On is selected for Sync
with smart device and synchronization
is enabled in the SnapBridge app, the
camera clock can be set to the time
provided by the smart device.
Adjust the brightness of the menu,
playback, and live view displays.
A Formatting Memory Cards
Do not turn the camera off or remove the battery or memory cards
during formatting.
In addition to the Format memory card option in the setup menu,
memory cards can be formatted using the S (Q) and O (Q) buttons:
keep both buttons pressed simultaneously until formatting indicators
are displayed and then press the buttons again to format the card. If
two memory cards are inserted when the buttons are first pressed, the
card to be formatted will be shown by a flashing icon. Rotate the main
command dial to choose a different slot.
271
Monitor color balance
Adjust monitor color balance.
Virtual horizon
Information display
Auto
Manual
AF fine-tune
AF fine-tune (On/Off)
Saved value
Default
List saved values
Non-CPU lens data
Lens number
Focal length (mm)
Maximum aperture
Clean image sensor
Clean now
Clean at startup/shutdown
Lock mirror up for cleaning
View a virtual horizon based on
information from the camera tilt sensor.
(defaults to Auto)
Adjust the information display for
different viewing conditions.
Fine-tune focus for different lens types.
AF tuning is not recommended in most
situations and may interfere with
normal focus; use only when required.
Auto fine-tuning is available in live view;
more information is available in a Menu
Guide that can be downloaded from the
Nikon website (0 i).
Record the focal length and maximum
aperture of non-CPU lenses, allowing
them to be used with functions
normally reserved for CPU lenses
(0 218).
Vibrate the image sensor to remove
dust (0 312).
Lock the mirror up so that dust can be
removed from the image sensor with a
blower (0 315). Not available when the
battery is low (J or lower) or when the
camera is connected to a smart device
via Bluetooth or to other devices via
USB.
272
Image Dust Off ref photo
Start
Clean sensor and then start
Image comment
Attach comment
Input comment
Acquire reference data for the Image
Dust Off option in Capture NX-D (0 ii).
Add a comment to new photographs as
they are taken. Comments can be
viewed as metadata in ViewNX-i or
Capture NX-D (0 ii).
Copyright information
Attach copyright information
Artist
Copyright
Add copyright information to new
photographs as they are taken.
Copyright information can be viewed as
metadata in ViewNX-i or Capture NX-D
(0 ii).
A Text Entry
A keyboard is displayed when text entry is required. Enter text by
tapping the characters on the touch screen (to cycle through the
upper- and lower-case and symbol keyboards, tap the keyboard
selection button). You can also use the multi selector to highlight the
desired character in the keyboard area and press the center of the
multi selector to insert the highlighted character at the current cursor
position (note that if a character is entered when the field is full, the
last character in the field will be deleted). To delete the character under
the cursor, press the O (Q) button. To move the cursor to a new
position, tap the display or hold the W (M) button and press 4 or 2.
To complete entry and return to the previous menu, press J.
Text display area
Keyboard area
Keyboard selection
273
Beep options
Beep on/off
Volume
Pitch
Touch controls
Enable/disable touch controls
Full-frame playback flicks
HDMI
Output resolution
External recording control
Advanced
Location data
Download from smart device
Position
External GPS device options
Wireless remote (WR) options
LED lamp
Link mode
Assign remote (WR) Fn button
Preview
FV lock
AE/AF lock
AE lock only
AE lock (Reset on release)
AF lock only
AF-ON
MDisable/enable
+ NEF (RAW)
Live view
None
274
Choose the pitch and volume of the
beep.
Adjust touch control settings (0 12).
Adjust settings for connection to HDMI
devices.
Adjust location data settings (0 221).
Adjust LED lamp and link mode settings
for optional wireless remote controllers.
(defaults to None)
Choose the role played by the Fn button
on optional wireless remote controllers.
Airplane mode
Enable
Disable
Connect to smart device
Start
Password protection
Send to smart device (auto)
On
Off
Wi-Fi
Network settings
Current settings
Reset connection settings
Bluetooth
Network connection
Paired devices
Send while off
Network
Choose hardware
Network settings
Options
(defaults to Disable)
Enable airplane mode to disable the
wireless features of Eye-Fi cards and
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi connections to
smart devices. Connections to other
devices using a wireless transmitter can
only be disabled by removing the
transmitter from the camera.
Pair the camera to a smart device
running the SnapBridge app as
described in the supplied SnapBridge
Connection Guide (for D-SLR Cameras).
(defaults to Off)
Select On to upload photos to a smart
device as they are taken.
Adjust Wi-Fi (wireless LAN) settings for
connection to smart devices.
Adjust settings for Bluetooth
connections to smart devices. The
camera can be paired with up to
five smart devices but can only connect
to one at a time.
Adjust ftp and network settings for
Ethernet and wireless LANs using a
WT-7. This option is available only when
a WT-7 is attached.
275
Eye-Fi upload
Enable
Disable
(defaults to Enable)
Upload pictures to a preselected
destination. This option is displayed
only when a supported Eye-Fi card is
inserted.
Conformity marking
MB-D18 battery type
LR6 (AA alkaline)
HR6 (AA Ni-MH)
FR6 (AA lithium)
Battery order
Use MB-D18 batteries first
Use camera battery first
View a selection of the standards with
which the camera complies.
(defaults to LR6 (AA alkaline))
To ensure that the camera functions as
expected when the optional MB-D18
multi-power battery pack is used with
AA batteries, match the option selected
in this menu to the type of batteries
inserted in the battery pack.
(defaults to Use MB-D18 batteries first)
Choose whether the battery in the
camera or the batteries in the battery
pack are used first when an optional
MB-D18 multi-power battery pack is
attached.
Battery info
Slot empty release lock
Release locked
Enable release
276
View information on the battery
currently inserted in the camera.
(defaults to Enable release)
Choose whether the shutter can be
released when no memory card is
inserted.
Save/load settings
Save settings
Load settings
Reset all settings
Reset
Do not reset
Save camera settings to or load camera
settings from a memory card. Settings
files can be shared with other D850
cameras.
Reset all settings apart from the options
selected for Language and Time zone
and date in the setup menu.
Firmware version
View the current camera firmware
version.
D Reset All Settings
Copyright information and other user-generated entries are also reset.
We recommend that you save settings using the Save/load settings
option in the setup menu before performing a reset.
277
N The Retouch Menu:
Creating Retouched Copies
NEF (RAW) processing
Select image(s)
Select date
Select all images
Choose destination
Trim
Create JPEG copies of NEF (RAW)
photographs.
Create a cropped copy of the selected
photograph.
Resize
Select image(s)
Choose destination
Choose size
D-Lighting
Create small copies of selected
photographs.
Brighten shadows. Choose for dark or
backlit photographs.
Red-eye correction
Correct “red-eye” in photos taken with a
flash.
Straighten
Create straightened copies. Copies can
be straightened by up to 5° in
increments of approximately 0.25°.
Distortion control
Auto
Manual
278
Create copies with reduced peripheral
distortion. Use to reduce barrel
distortion in photos taken with wideangle lenses or pin-cushion distortion in
photos taken with telephoto lenses.
Select Auto to let the camera correct
distortion automatically.
Perspective control
Create copies that reduce the effects of
perspective taken from the base of a tall
object.
Filter effects
Skylight
Warm filter
Monochrome
Black-and-white
Sepia
Cyanotype
Image overlay
Create the effects of the following
filters:
• Skylight: A skylight filter effect
• Warm filter: A warm tone filter effect
Copy photographs in Black-and-white,
Sepia, or Cyanotype (blue and white
monochrome).
Image overlay combines two existing
NEF (RAW) photographs to create a
single picture that is saved separately
from the originals. Image overlay can
only be selected by pressing G and
selecting N tab.
Trim movie
Trim footage to create edited copies of
movies (0 78).
Side-by-side comparison
Compare retouched copies to the
original photographs. Side-by-side
comparison is only available if the
retouch menu is displayed by pressing
2 while pressing and holding the J
button or by pressing i and selecting
Retouch in full-frame playback when a
retouched image or original is
displayed.
279
O My Menu/m Recent Settings
Add items
PLAYBACK MENU
PHOTO SHOOTING MENU
MOVIE SHOOTING MENU
CUSTOM SETTING MENU
SETUP MENU
RETOUCH MENU
Remove items
Create a custom menu of up to 20 items
selected from the playback, photo
shooting, movie shooting, Custom
Setting, setup, and retouch menus.
Delete items from My Menu.
Rank items
Choose tab
MY MENU
RECENT SETTINGS
280
Rank items in My Menu.
(defaults to MY MENU)
Choose the menu displayed in the “My
Menu/Recent Settings” tab. Select
RECENT SETTINGS to display a menu
listing the 20 most recently-used
settings.
Technical Notes
Read this chapter for information on compatible accessories,
cleaning and storing the camera, and what to do if an error
message is displayed or you encounter problems using the
camera.
Compatible Lenses
Camera setting
CPU lenses 6
Lens/accessory
Type G, E, or D 7;
AF-S, AF-P, AF-I
PC NIKKOR 19mm
f/4E ED
PC-E NIKKOR series 10
PC Micro 85mm
f/2.8D 10, 11
AF-S / AF-I
Teleconverter 13
Other AF NIKKOR
(except lenses for
F3AF)
AI-P NIKKOR
Focus mode
Exposure
mode
Metering system
L2
AF
M (with
electronic
rangefinder) 1
P
S
A
M
3D Color
M3 t5
N4
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔8
—
✔9
✔9 ✔9 ✔9
— ✔ 8, 9 ✔ 9
—
✔9
✔9 ✔9 ✔9
— ✔ 8, 9 ✔ 9
—
✔9
— ✔ 12 ✔ 9
— ✔ 8, 9 ✔ 9
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔8
✔
✔ 14
✔ 14
✔
✔
—
✔
✔8
—
—
✔ 15
✔
✔
—
✔
✔8
—
—
✔
281
Camera setting
Non-CPU lenses 16
Lens/accessory
AI-, AI-modified
NIKKOR or Nikon Series
E lenses 17
Medical-NIKKOR
120mm f/4
Reflex-NIKKOR
PC-NIKKOR
AI-type
Teleconverter 23
PB-6 Bellows Focusing
Attachment 25
Auto extension rings
(PK-series 11A, 12, or
13; PN-11)
Focus mode
Exposure
mode
Metering system
L2
AF
M (with
electronic
rangefinder) 1
—
✔ 15
— ✔ 18 —
✔ 19 ✔ 20
—
—
✔
— ✔ 21 —
—
—
—
—
—
—
✔9
— ✔ —
— ✔ 22 —
—
—
20
✔
✔
—
—
—
✔ 24
— ✔ 18 —
✔ 19 ✔ 20
—
—
✔ 24
— ✔ 26 —
—
✔
—
—
✔ 24
— ✔ 18 —
—
✔
—
P
S
A
M
3D Color
18
M3 t5
N4
1 Manual focus is available with all lenses.
2 Matrix.
3 Center-weighted.
4 Spot.
5 Highlight-weighted.
6 IX-NIKKOR lenses cannot be used.
7 Vibration Reduction (VR) supported with VR lenses.
8 Spot metering meters selected focus point (0 124).
9 Cannot be used with shifting or tilting.
10 Fog, lines, and other image artifacts (“noise”) may appear in photos taken with the electronic
front-curtain shutter. This can be prevented by selecting Disable for Custom Setting d6
(Electronic front-curtain shutter, 0 265).
11 The camera’s exposure metering and flash control systems do not work properly when shifting
and/or tilting the lens, or when an aperture other than the maximum aperture is used.
12 Manual exposure mode only.
282
13 For information on the focus points available for autofocus and electronic rangefinding, see
“AF-S/AF-I Teleconverters and Available Focus Points” (0 96).
14 When focusing at minimum focus distance with AF 80–200mm f/2.8,
AF 35–70mm f/2.8, AF 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5 <New>, or AF 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5 lens at
maximum zoom, in-focus indicator may be displayed when image on matte screen in
viewfinder is not in focus. Adjust focus manually until image in viewfinder is in focus.
15 With maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster.
16 Some lenses cannot be used; see “Incompatible Accessories and Non-CPU Lenses” (0 285).
17 Range of rotation for AI 80–200mm f/2.8 ED tripod mount is limited by camera body. Filters
cannot be exchanged while AI 200–400mm f/4 ED is mounted on camera.
18 If maximum aperture is specified using Non-CPU lens data (0 218), aperture value
will be displayed in viewfinder and control panel.
19 Can be used only if lens focal length and maximum aperture are specified using Non-CPU
lens data (0 218). Use spot or center-weighted metering if desired results are not
achieved.
20 For improved precision, specify lens focal length and maximum aperture using Non-CPU
lens data (0 218).
21 Can be used in manual exposure mode at shutter speeds slower than flash sync speed by one
step or more.
22 Exposure determined by presetting lens aperture. In aperture-priority auto exposure mode,
preset aperture using lens aperture ring before performing AE lock and shifting lens. In manual
exposure mode, preset aperture using lens aperture ring and determine exposure before
shifting lens.
23 Exposure compensation required when used with AI 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5,
AI 35–105mm f/3.5–4.5, AI 35–135mm f/3.5–4.5, or AF-S 80–200mm f/2.8D.
24 With maximum effective aperture of f/5.6 or faster.
25 Requires PK-12 or PK-13 auto extension ring. PB-6D may be required depending on camera
orientation.
26 Use preset aperture. In aperture-priority auto exposure mode, set aperture using focusing
attachment before determining exposure and taking photograph.
• PF-4 Reprocopy Outfit requires PA-4 Camera Holder.
• Noise in the form of lines may appear during autofocus at high ISO sensitivities. Use manual
focus or focus lock. Lines may also appear at high ISO sensitivities when aperture is adjusted
during movie recording or live view photography.
283
A Recognizing CPU and Type G, E, and D Lenses
CPU lenses (particularly types G, E, and D) are recommended, but note
that IX-NIKKOR lenses cannot be used. CPU lenses can be identified by
the presence of CPU contacts, type G, E, and D lenses by a letter on the
lens barrel. Type G and E lenses are not equipped with a lens aperture
ring.
CPU contacts
CPU lens
Aperture ring
Type G/E lens
Type D lens
A Lens f-number
The f-number given in lens names is the maximum aperture of the
lens.
A Compatible Non-CPU Lenses
Non-CPU lens data (0 218) can be used to enable many of the
features available with CPU lenses, including color matrix metering; if
no data are provided, center-weighted metering will be used in place
of color matrix metering, while if the maximum aperture is not
provided, the camera aperture display will show the number of stops
from maximum aperture and the actual aperture value must be read
off the lens aperture ring.
284
D Incompatible Accessories and Non-CPU Lenses
The following CANNOT be used with the D850:
• TC-16A AF teleconverter
• AF lenses for the F3AF (AF 80mm f/2.8,
• Non-AI lenses
AF 200mm f/3.5 ED,
• Lenses that require the AU-1 focusing unit
AF Teleconverter TC-16)
(400mm f/4.5, 600mm f/5.6, 800mm f/8,
• PC 28mm f/4 (serial number 180900 or
1200mm f/11)
earlier)
• Fisheye (6mm f/5.6, 7.5mm f/5.6, 8mm f/8, • PC 35mm f/2.8 (serial numbers 851001–
OP 10mm f/5.6)
906200)
• 2.1cm f/4
• PC 35mm f/3.5 (old type)
• Extension Ring K2
• Reflex 1000mm f/6.3 (old type)
• 180–600mm f/8 ED (serial numbers
• Reflex 1000mm f/11 (serial numbers
174041–174180)
142361–143000)
• 360–1200mm f/11 ED (serial numbers
• Reflex 2000mm f/11 (serial numbers
174031–174127)
200111–200310)
• 200–600mm f/9.5 (serial numbers
280001–300490)
A VR Lenses
The lenses listed below are not recommended for long exposures or
photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities, as due to the design of the
vibration reduction (VR) control system the resulting photos may be
marred by fog. We recommend turning vibration reduction off when
using other VR lenses.
• AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 24–120mm
• AF-S NIKKOR 400mm f/2.8G ED VR
f/3.5–5.6G IF-ED
• AF-S NIKKOR 500mm f/4G ED VR
• AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 70–200mm f/2.8G
• AF-S DX VR Zoom-Nikkor 18–200mm
IF-ED
f/3.5–5.6G IF-ED
• AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 70–300mm
• AF-S DX NIKKOR 16–85mm f/3.5–5.6G ED
f/4.5–5.6G IF-ED
VR
• AF-S VR Nikkor 200mm f/2G IF-ED
• AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–200mm
• AF-S VR Nikkor 300mm f/2.8G IF-ED
f/3.5–5.6G ED VR II
• AF-S NIKKOR 16–35mm f/4G ED VR
• AF-S DX Micro NIKKOR 85mm f/3.5G ED VR
• AF-S NIKKOR 24–120mm f/4G ED VR
• AF-S DX NIKKOR 55–300mm
• AF-S NIKKOR 28–300mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR
f/4.5–5.6G ED VR
285
A Calculating Angle of View
The camera can be used with Nikon lenses for 35 mm (135) format
cameras. If a 35 mm format lens is attached, the angle of view will be
the same as a frame of 35 mm film (35.9 × 23.9 mm).
If desired, the Image area option in the photo shooting menu can be
used to choose an angle of view different from that of the current lens.
If a 35 mm format lens is attached, you can reduce the angle of view by
1.5× or 1.2× by selecting DX (24×16) or 1.2× (30×20) to expose a
smaller area, or change the aspect ratio by selecting 5 : 4 (30×24) or
1 : 1 (24×24). The sizes of the areas exposed by different Image area
options are shown below.
2
1
6
7
8
2
1
6
11
12
286
3
4
1 Lens
2 FX (36×24) picture size
(35.9 × 23.9 mm, equivalent
to 35 mm format camera)
3 1.2× (30×20) picture size
(29.9 × 19.9 mm)
5
4 DX (24×16) picture size
(23.5 × 15.7 mm, equivalent
to DX format camera)
5 Picture diagonal
6 Angle of view (FX (36×24);
35 mm format)
7 Angle of view
(1.2× (30×20))
8 Angle of view (DX (24×16);
DX format)
9
10 9 5 : 4 (30×24) picture size
(29.9 × 23.9 mm)
5
10 1 : 1 (24×24) picture size
(23.9 × 23.9 mm)
11 Angle of view (5 : 4 (30×24))
12 Angle of view (1 : 1 (24×24))
A Calculating Angle of View (Continued)
The DX (24×16) angle of view is about 1.5 times smaller than the
35 mm format angle of view, while the 1.2× (30×20) angle of view is
about 1.2 times smaller, the 5 : 4 (30×24) angle of view is about
1.1 times smaller, and the 1 : 1 (24×24) angle of view is about 1.3 times
smaller. To calculate the focal length of lenses in 35 mm format,
multiply the focal length of the lens by about 1.5 when DX (24×16) is
selected, by about 1.2 when 1.2× (30×20) is selected, by about 1.1
when 5 : 4 (30×24) is selected, or by about 1.3 when 1 : 1 (24×24) is
selected (for example, the effective focal length of a 50mm lens in
35 mm format would be approximately 75 mm when DX (24×16) is
selected, 60 mm when 1.2× (30×20) is selected, 55 mm when
5 : 4 (30×24) is selected, or 65 mm when 1 : 1 (24×24) is selected).
287
The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS)
Nikon’s advanced Creative Lighting System (CLS) offers
improved communication between the camera and compatible
flash units for improved flash photography.
❚❚ CLS-Compatible Flash Units
The following features are available with CLS-compatible flash
units:
SU-800
SB-R200
SB-400
SB-300
288
SB-500
M
RPT
SB-600
GN
SB-700
Single flash
qA
A
SB-910, SB-900,
SB-800
SB-5000
i-TTL
i-TTL balanced
✔
fill-flash for
digital SLR 1
Standard i-TTL
fill-flash for
✔2
digital SLR
Auto aperture
✔
Non-TTL auto
—4
Distance-priority
✔
manual
Manual
✔
Repeating flash
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
— —
✔
✔
✔2
✔ ✔2 ✔
— —
✔
✔
✔3
✔3
— — — — — — —
— — — — — — —
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔ ✔ ✔5 — — ✔5 ✔5
— — — — — — —
— — — — — —
✔
—
✔
— — ✔6 — — —
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
—7
✔
✔
✔
—
—
✔
—
✔
—
—
—
—
✔
—
—
✔5
—
✔
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
✔
—
—
—
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
— —
✔8
✔8
— — — — — — —
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔9
—
— — — — — — —
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
— —
—
—
— —
✔
— — — —
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔ 13
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ —
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
✔ ✔ — ✔ 12 — —
✔ ✔ ✔ — — ✔
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ —
— — ✔ — — ✔
✔ — ✔ — — —
✔
✔
✔
✔
SB-300
— ✔5 ✔ — — —
— ✔5 — — — —
SB-400
SB-600
✔
✔
SB-R200
SB-700
✔
✔
SU-800
SB-910, SB-900,
SB-800
✔
✔
SB-500
SB-5000
Remote
Master
Optical Advanced Wireless Lighting
Remote flash control
i-TTL i-TTL
Quick wireless
[A:B]
flash control
qA Auto aperture
A Non-TTL auto
M Manual
RPT Repeating flash
i-TTL i-TTL
Quick wireless
[A:B]
flash control
Auto aperture/
qA/A
Non-TTL auto
M Manual
RPT Repeating flash
Radio-controlled Advanced Wireless
Lighting
Color Information Communication
(flash)
Color Information Communication
(LED light)
Auto FP High-Speed Sync 10
FV lock 11
AF-assist for multi-area AF
Red-eye reduction
Camera modeling illumination
Unified flash control
Camera flash unit firmware update
—
—
—
—
—
— ✔ — —
— — — —
✔
✔
—
✔
—
—
—
✔
✔
289
1 Not available with spot metering.
2 Can also be selected with flash unit.
3 qA/A mode selection performed on flash unit using custom settings. Unless lens data have
been provided using the Non-CPU lens data option in the setup menu, “A” will be
selected when a non-CPU lens is used.
4 Unless lens data have been provided using the Non-CPU lens data option in the setup
menu, non-TTL auto will be selected when a non-CPU lens is used.
5 Can only be selected using camera Flash control option.
6 Available only during close-up photography.
7 Unless lens data have been provided using the Non-CPU lens data option in the setup
menu, non-TTL auto (A) is used with non-CPU lenses, regardless of mode selected with flash
unit.
8 Choice of qA and A depends on the option selected with master flash.
9 Supports the same features as remote flash units with optical AWL.
10 Available only in i-TTL, qA, A, GN, and M flash-control modes.
11 Available only in i-TTL flash control mode or when flash is set to emit monitor pre-flashes in
qA or A flash control mode.
12 Available only in commander mode.
13 Firmware updates for the SB-910 and SB-900 can be performed from the camera.
The SU-800 Wireless Speedlight Commander: When mounted on a CLScompatible camera, the SU-800 can be used as a commander for
SB-5000, SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, SB-500, or
SB-R200 flash units in up to three groups. The SU-800 itself is not
equipped with a flash.
A Modeling Illumination
CLS-compatible flash units emit a modeling flash when the camera Pv
button is pressed. This feature can be used with Advanced Wireless
Lighting to preview the total lighting effect achieved with multiple
flash units. Modeling illumination can be turned off using Custom
Setting e5 (Modeling flash, 0 267).
290
❚❚ Other Flash Units
The following flash units can be used in non-TTL auto and
manual modes.
SB-80DX,
SB-30, SB-27 1,
SB-28DX,
SB-22S, SB-22, SB-23, SB-29 2,
SB-28, SB-26,
SB-20, SB-16B,
SB-21B 2,
SB-25, SB-24 SB-50DX
SB-15
SB-29S 2
Flash mode
A Non-TTL auto
✔
—
✔
—
M Manual
✔
✔
✔
✔
G Repeating flash
✔
—
—
—
REAR Rear-curtain sync 3
✔
✔
✔
✔
1 Flash mode is automatically set to TTL and shutter-release is disabled. Set flash unit to A (nonTTL auto flash).
2 Autofocus is available with AF-S VR Micro-Nikkor 105mm f/2.8G IF-ED and AF-S Micro NIKKOR
60mm f/2.8G ED lenses only.
3 Available when camera is used to select flash mode.
Flash unit
A Using FV Lock with Optional Flash Units
FV lock (0 196) is available with optional flash units in TTL and (where
supported) monitor pre-flash qA and monitor pre-flash A flash control
modes (see the manual provided with the flash unit for more
information). Note that when Advanced Wireless Lighting is used to
control remote flash units, you will need to set the flash control mode
for the master or at least one remote group to TTL, qA, or A.
A Metering
The metering areas for FV lock when using optional flash unit are as
follows:
Flash unit
Stand-alone flash
unit
Used with other flash
units (Advanced
Wireless Lighting)
Flash mode
i-TTL
qA
i-TTL
qA
A
Metered area
6-mm circle in center of frame
Area metered by flash exposure
meter
Entire frame
Area metered by flash exposure
meter
291
D Notes on Optional Flash Units
Refer to the flash unit manual for detailed instructions. If the unit
supports CLS, refer to the section on CLS-compatible digital SLR
cameras. The D850 is not included in the “digital SLR” category in the
SB-80DX, SB-28DX, and SB-50DX manuals.
i-TTL flash control can be used at ISO sensitivities between 64 and
12800. At values over 12800, the desired results may not be achieved
at some ranges or aperture settings. If the flash-ready indicator (M)
flashes for about three seconds after a photograph is taken in i-TTL or
non-TTL auto mode, the flash has fired at full power and the
photograph may be underexposed (CLS-compatible flash units only).
When an SC-series 17, 28, or 29 sync cable is used for off-camera flash
photography, correct exposure may not be achieved in i-TTL mode. We
recommend that you select standard i-TTL fill-flash. Take a test shot
and view the results in the monitor.
In i-TTL, use the flash panel or bounce adapter provided with the flash
unit. Do not use other panels such as diffusion panels, as this may
produce incorrect exposure.
In exposure mode P, the maximum aperture (minimum f-number) is
limited according to ISO sensitivity, as shown below:
64
3.5
100
4
Maximum aperture at ISO equivalent of:
200
400
800
1600
3200
5
5.6
7.1
8
10
6400
11
12800
13
If the maximum aperture of the lens is smaller than given above, the
maximum value for aperture will be the maximum aperture of the lens.
Noise in the form of lines may appear in flash photographs taken with
an SD-9 or SD-8A high-performance battery pack attached directly to
the camera. Reduce ISO sensitivity or increase the distance between
the camera and the power pack.
292
A Notes on Optional Flash Units (Continued)
The SB-5000, SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, SB-500, and
SB-400 provide red-eye reduction, while the SB-5000, SB-910, SB-900,
SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, and SU-800 provide AF-assist illumination
with the following restrictions:
• SB-5000: AF-assist illumination is available when 24–135 mm AF lenses are
used with the focus points shown below.
Focal length
50–84 mm
24–49 mm
85–135 mm
• SB-910 and SB-900: AF-assist illumination is available when 17–135 mm
AF lenses are used with the focus points shown below.
Focal length
17–19 mm
20–135 mm
• SB-800, SB-600, and SU-800: AF-assist illumination is available when 24–
105 mm AF lenses are used with the focus points shown below.
24–34 mm
Focal length
35–49 mm
50–105 mm
293
• SB-700: AF-assist illumination is available when 24–135 mm AF lenses
are used with the focus points shown below.
Focal length
24–27 mm
28–135 mm
Depending on the lens used and scene recorded, the in-focus indicator
(I) may be displayed when the subject is not in focus, or the camera
may be unable to focus and the shutter release will be disabled.
A Optional Flash Units
In i-TTL and auto aperture (qA) flash control modes, the flash
compensation selected with the optional flash unit or the Flash
control option in the photo shooting menu is added to the flash
compensation selected with the W (M) button and command dial.
294
Other Accessories
A variety of accessories are available for the D850.
Power sources • EN-EL15b/EN-EL15a/EN-EL15 Rechargeable Li-ion
Batteries (0 14, 347); note that fewer pictures can be
taken on a single charge with an EN-EL15 than with an
EN-EL15b/EN-EL15a (0 365)
• MH-25a Battery Charger (0 14, 347)
• MB-D18 Multi-Power Battery Pack
• EP-5B Power Connector, EH-5c and EH-5b AC Adapters
Wireless
transmitters WT-7 Wireless Transmitter
(0 275)
Wireless
• WR-1 Wireless Remote Controller
remote
• WR-R10 Wireless Remote Controller (requires WR-A10
controllers
WR Adapter)
• WR-T10 Wireless Remote Controller
Viewfinder
• DK-19 Rubber Eyecup
eyepiece
• DK-17C Diopter-Adjustment Viewfinder Lens
accessories
• DK-17M Magnifying Eyepiece
• DG-2 Eyepiece Magnifier (requires DK-18 Eyepiece
Adapter)
• DK-14 Antifog Finder Eyepiece/DK-17A Antifog Finder
Eyepiece
• DK-17F Fluorine-Coated Finder Eyepiece
• DR-5 Right-Angle Viewing Attachment/DR-4 RightAngle Viewing Attachment
HDMI cables HC-E1 HDMI Cable
Accessory shoe
BS-3 Accessory Shoe Cover/BS-1 Accessory Shoe Cover
covers
Body caps
BF-1B Body Cap/BF-1A Body Cap
295
Software
Remote
terminal
accessories
Camera Control Pro 2
• MC-22 Remote Cord/MC-22A Remote Cord (length 1 m/
3 ft 4 in.*)
• MC-30 Remote Cord/MC-30A Remote Cord (length
80 cm/2 ft 8 in.*)
• MC-36 Remote Cord/MC-36A Remote Cord (length
85 cm/2 ft 10 in.*)
• MC-21 Extension Cord/MC-21A Extension Cord (length
3 m/9 ft 11 in.*)
• MC-23 Connecting Cord/MC-23A Connecting Cord
(length 40 cm/1 ft 4 in.*)
• MC-25 Adapter Cord/MC-25A Adapter Cord (length
20 cm/8 in.*)
• WR-A10 WR Adapter
• GP-1 GPS Unit/GP-1A GPS Unit (0 221) †
• ML-3 Modulite Remote Control Set
* All values are approximate.
† Note that production of GP-1/GP-1A units has ended.
• ME-1 Stereo Microphone
• ME-W1 Wireless Microphone
Microphones
(0 67)
Connector
UF-4 USB Connector Cover
covers
Availability may vary with country or region. See our website or brochures for the latest
information.
296
A Attaching and Removing the Accessory Shoe Cover
The accessory shoe cover (available
separately) slides into the accessory shoe as
shown.
To remove the cover, hold the camera firmly,
press the cover down with a thumb and slide
it in the direction shown.
A Attaching and Removing the Supplied Eyepiece
After closing the eyepiece shutter and
releasing the latch (q), lightly grasp the
supplied DK-17F eyepiece in two fingers and
rotate and remove as shown (w). To
reattach, rotate the eyepiece in the opposite
direction. Optional eyepieces can be
attached and removed in the same fashion.
297
A The HDMI/USB Cable Clip
To prevent accidental disconnection, attach the supplied clip to HDMI
cables or to the supplied USB cable as shown (the illustration shows
the USB cable; note that the clip may not fit all third-party HDMI
cables). Keep the monitor in the storage position when using the
cable clip.
HDMI cable goes
here
HDMI cable goes
here
HDMI cable goes
here
USB cable
298
HDMI cable and USB
cable used
simultaneously
Optional MB-D18 Battery Packs
The MB-D18 takes one EN-EL15a or EN-EL18c rechargeable
battery or eight AA batteries (alkaline, Ni-MH, or lithium) and
features controls for taking pictures in “tall” (portrait)
orientation: shutter-release, AF-ON, and Fn buttons, a multi
selector, and main and sub-command dials.
Parts of the MB-D18
11
1
12
13
10
14
2
15
3
9
4
6
16
5
7
8
Contact cover holder .................302
AF-ON button ................................301
Main command dial ...................301
Multi selector ...............................301
Attachment wheel......................302
Holder power connector
cover .............................................307
7 Battery-chamber cover .............304
8 Battery chamber .........................304
1
2
3
4
5
6
17
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Battery-chamber latch .............. 304
Power/signal contacts............... 302
Contact cap .................................. 302
Mounting screw.......................... 302
Fn button ...................................... 301
Shutter-release button.............. 301
Control lock.................................. 301
Sub-command dial .................... 301
Tripod socket
299
20
22
21
18
19
18 MS-D12EN holder
21 MS-D12 holder
for EN-EL15a batteries * ............ 304
for AA batteries.......................... 304
19 Power terminals.......................... 304 22 Power terminals
(MS-D12 battery holder) ......... 304
20 Power terminals
(MS-D12EN battery holder) .... 304
* The MS-D12EN is inserted in the MB-D18 at shipment.
A Using an AC Adapter and Power Connector
The optional EH-5c/EH-5b AC adapter and EP-5B power connector can
be used with the MB-D18 to provide a reliable power source when the
camera is used for extended periods (0 307). Insert the EP-5B power
connector in the MS-D12EN battery holder and connect the AC
adapter. For more information, see the Menu Guide available on Nikon
websites (0 i).
300
❚❚ The Shutter-Release Button, Multi Selector, and Command Dials
These controls perform the
same functions as the
matching controls on the
camera body, with the
exception that, regardless
of the option chosen for
Custom Setting f5 (Multi
selector, 0 269), the
MB-D18 multi selector
cannot be used to start the
standby timer.
Shutter-release
button
Sub-command
dial
Multi selector
Main command
dial
❚❚ The Fn and AF-ON Buttons
The functions performed by
these controls can be
selected using Custom
Setting f10 (Assign
MB-D18 buttons, 0 270).
Fn button
AF-ON button
❚❚ The MB-D18 Control Lock
The control lock locks the
controls on the MB-D18 to
prevent unintended use.
Before using these controls
to take photographs in “tall”
(portrait) orientation,
Locked
Unlocked
release the lock as shown.
The control lock is not a
power switch. Use the camera power switch to turn the camera
on and off.
301
Using the Battery Pack
❚❚ Attaching the Battery Pack
Before attaching the battery pack, be
sure that the camera is off and that the
MB-D18 control lock is in the L position.
1 Remove the contact cap from the
battery pack.
2 The contacts for the MB-D18 are in the base of the camera,
where they are protected by a contact cover. Remove the
contact cover (q) and place it in the contact cover holder
on the MB-D18 (w).
302
3 Position the MB-D18, keeping the MB-D18 mounting screw
(w) aligned with the camera tripod socket (q), and tighten
the attachment wheel by rotating it in the direction shown
by the LOCK arrow.
There is no need to remove the battery from the camera
before connecting the MB-D18. At default settings, the
battery inserted in the camera will be used only after the
battery in the MB-D18 is exhausted. The Battery order
option in the camera setup menu can be used to change the
order in which the batteries are used.
D Attaching the Battery Pack
Be sure to place the camera contact cover in the contact cover holder
and to keep the MB-D18 contact cap in a safe place to prevent loss. A
PB-6D bellows spacer and PK-13 auto extension ring are required
when using PB-6 bellows focusing attachment with the MB-D18.
303
❚❚ Removing the Battery Pack
To remove the MB-D18, turn the camera off and set the control
lock on the MB-D18 to L, then loosen the attachment wheel by
rotating it in the direction opposite to that shown by the LOCK
arrow and remove the MB-D18.
❚❚ Inserting Batteries
The MB-D18 can be used with one EN-EL15a or EN-EL18c
rechargeable battery or with eight AA batteries. Before inserting
batteries, be sure that the camera is off and that the MB-D18
control lock is in the L position.
1 Unlatch the MB-D18 by rotating the battery-chamber latch
to A and remove the battery holder.
304
2 Ready the batteries as described below.
EN-EL15a: Matching the indentations
on the battery to the projections on
the MS-D12EN holder, insert the
battery with the arrow (E) on the
battery toward the battery holder
power terminals (q). Press the battery
lightly downward and slide it in the
direction of the arrow until the power
terminals click into place (w).
EN-EL18c: If the battery
release on the optional
BL-5 battery-chamber
cover is positioned so
that the arrow G is
visible, slide the battery
release to cover the
arrow (q). Insert the two
projections on the
battery into the
matching slots on the
BL-5 (w) and confirm
that the battery release
has slid aside to reveal
the arrow (e).
Battery release
305
AA batteries: Place eight AA batteries in
the MS-D12 battery holder as shown,
making sure that the batteries are in
the correct orientation.
3 Insert the battery holder or EN-EL18c in the MB-D18 and
latch the battery-chamber cover. Make sure the holder or
battery is inserted before turning the latch; power will only
be supplied if the cover is securely latched.
306
4 Turn the camera on and check the battery level in the
control panel or viewfinder (0 30). If the camera does not
turn on, check that the battery is correctly inserted.
Match the option selected for MB-D18 battery type in the
setup menu to the type of battery inserted in the battery
pack (0 276). Information about the batteries can be
displayed by selecting Battery info in the setup menu
(0 276).
A The EP-5B Power Connector
When using the EP-5B power connector,
insert it into the MS-D12EN holder with the
arrow (E) on the connector toward the
battery holder power terminals (q). Press
the connector lightly downward and slide it
in the direction of the arrow until the power
terminals click into place (w). Open the
holder power connector cover and pass the
EP-5B power cable through the opening
(e).
307
❚❚ Removing Batteries
Be careful not to drop batteries or the holder.
1 Unlatch the MB-D18 by rotating the battery-chamber latch
to A and remove the battery or battery holder.
2 Remove the battery or batteries from the holder or BL-5
battery-chamber cover.
EN-EL15a: While pressing the holder PUSH button, slide the
battery toward the button. The battery can then be removed
as shown.
The procedure for removing the EP-5B power connector is
the same as that for the EN-EL15a.
308
EN-EL18c: Slide the battery
release in the direction
indicated by the arrow (G)
and remove the BL-5.
AA batteries: Remove the batteries as shown. Be careful not to
drop the batteries when removing them from the holder.
309
Specifications
Power source
Operating temperature
Dimensions (W × H × D)
Weight (approx.)
One EN-EL15a or EN-EL18c rechargeable Li-ion
battery, eight alkaline (1.5 V) or lithium (1.5 V)
AA batteries, eight Ni-MH (1.2 V) rechargeable
AA batteries, or an EH-5c/EH-5b AC adapter
(requires EP-5B power connector); EN-EL15,
EN-EL15b, EN-EL18, EN-EL18a, and EN-EL18b
batteries are also supported, but note that
fewer pictures may sometimes be taken on a
single charge with an EN-EL15 than with an
EN-EL15b/EN-EL15a, and that fewer pictures
can be taken on a single charge with an
EN-EL18 than with an EN-EL18c/EN-EL18b/
EN-EL18a (0 365), and that EN-EL18c,
EN-EL18b, EN-EL18a, and EN-EL18 batteries
require an MH-26a or MH-26 battery charger
and BL-5 battery-chamber cover (both available
separately)
0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)
Approx. 152 × 51 × 79 mm (6.0 × 2.1 × 3.2 in.)
• 355 g (12.6 oz) with MS-D12EN and optional
EN-EL15a battery
• 450 g (15.9 oz) with MS-D12 and eight AA
batteries (available separately from thirdparty suppliers)
• 305 g (10.8 oz) with MS-D12EN and optional
EP-5B power connector
• 435 g (15.4 oz) with optional BL-5 and
EN-EL18c battery
• 280 g (9.9 oz) with MS-D12EN
• 265 g (9.4 oz) with MS-D12
Nikon reserves the right to change the appearance and specifications of the hardware and
software described in this manual at any time and without prior notice. Nikon will not be held
liable for damages that may result from any mistakes that this manual may contain.
310
Caring for the Camera
Storage
When the camera will not be used for an extended period,
remove the battery and store it in a cool, dry area with the
terminal cover in place. To prevent mold or mildew, store the
camera in a dry, well-ventilated area. Do not store your camera
with naphtha or camphor moth balls or in locations that:
• are poorly ventilated or subject to humidities of over 60%
• are next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic
fields, such as televisions or radios
• are exposed to temperatures above 50 °C (122 °F) or below
–10 °C (14 °F)
Cleaning
Camera body
Lens, mirror,
and
viewfinder
Monitor
Use a blower to remove dust and lint, then wipe gently
with a soft, dry cloth. After using the camera at the beach
or seaside, wipe off sand or salt with a cloth lightly
dampened in distilled water and dry thoroughly.
Important: Dust or other foreign matter inside the camera
may cause damage not covered under warranty.
These glass elements are easily damaged. Remove dust
and lint with a blower. If using an aerosol blower, keep the
can vertical to prevent the discharge of liquid. To remove
fingerprints and other stains, apply a small amount of
lens cleaner to a soft cloth and clean with care.
Remove dust and lint with a blower. When removing
fingerprints and other stains, wipe the surface lightly
with a soft cloth or chamois leather. Do not apply
pressure, as this could result in damage or malfunction.
Do not use alcohol, thinner, or other volatile chemicals.
311
Image Sensor Cleaning
If you suspect that dirt or dust on the image sensor is appearing
in photographs, you can clean the sensor using the Clean image
sensor option in the setup menu. The sensor can be cleaned at
any time using the Clean now option, or cleaning can be
performed automatically when the camera is turned on or off.
❚❚ “Clean Now”
Holding the camera base down, select
Clean image sensor in the setup menu,
then highlight Clean now and press J.
The camera will check the image sensor
and then begin cleaning. 1 flashes
in the control panel and other operations
cannot be performed while cleaning is in
progress. Do not remove or disconnect
the power source until cleaning ends and
the setup menu is displayed.
312
❚❚ “Clean at Startup/Shutdown”
Choose from the following options:
Option
5
6
7
Description
The image sensor is automatically cleaned each
Clean at startup
time the camera is turned on.
The image sensor is automatically cleaned
Clean at
during shutdown each time the camera is turned
shutdown
off.
Clean at startup & The image sensor is cleaned automatically at
shutdown
startup and at shutdown.
Cleaning off
Automatic image sensor cleaning off.
1 Select Clean at startup/shutdown.
Display the Clean image sensor
menu as described in “Clean
Now”(0 312). Highlight Clean at
startup/shutdown and press 2.
2 Select an option.
Highlight an option and press J.
313
D Image Sensor Cleaning
Using camera controls during startup interrupts image sensor
cleaning.
If dust cannot be fully removed using the options in the Clean image
sensor menu, clean the image sensor manually (0 315) or consult a
Nikon-authorized service representative.
If image sensor cleaning is performed several times in succession,
image sensor cleaning may be temporarily disabled to protect the
camera’s internal circuitry. Cleaning can be performed again after a
short wait.
314
❚❚ Manual Cleaning
If foreign matter cannot be removed from the image sensor
using the Clean image sensor (0 312) option in the setup
menu, the sensor can be cleaned manually as described below.
Note, however, that the sensor is extremely delicate and easily
damaged; we recommend that manual cleaning be performed
only by a Nikon-authorized service representative.
1 Charge the battery or connect an AC adapter.
A reliable power source is required when inspecting or
cleaning the image sensor. Turn the camera off and insert a
fully-charged battery or connect an optional AC adapter and
power connector. The Lock mirror up for cleaning option is
only available in the setup menu if the battery level is over
J and the camera is not connected to a smart device via
Bluetooth or other devices via USB.
2 Remove the lens.
Turn the camera off and remove the lens.
3 Select Lock mirror up for cleaning.
Turn the camera on and highlight
Lock mirror up for cleaning in the
setup menu and press 2.
315
4 Press J.
A message will be displayed in the
monitor and a row of dashes will
appear in the control panel and
viewfinder. To restore normal
operation without inspecting the
image sensor, turn the camera off.
5 Raise the mirror.
Press the shutter-release
button all the way down.
The mirror will be raised
and the shutter curtain
will open, revealing the image sensor. The display in the
viewfinder will turn off and the row of dashes in the control
panel will flash.
6 Examine the image sensor.
Holding the camera so that light falls
on the image sensor, examine the
sensor for dust or lint. If no foreign
objects are present, proceed to Step 8.
316
7 Clean the sensor.
Remove any dust and lint from the
sensor with a blower. Do not use a
blower-brush, as the bristles could
damage the sensor. Dirt that cannot
be removed with a blower can only be
removed by Nikon-authorized service
personnel. Under no circumstances should you touch or wipe
the sensor.
8 Turn the camera off.
The mirror will return to the down position and the shutter
curtain will close. Replace the lens or body cap.
D Use a Reliable Power Source
The shutter curtain is delicate and easily damaged. If the camera
powers off while the mirror is raised, the curtain will close
automatically. To prevent damage to the curtain, observe the
following precautions:
• Do not turn the camera off or remove or disconnect the power source
while the mirror is raised.
• If the battery runs low while the mirror is raised, a beep will sound
and the self-timer lamp will flash to warn that the shutter curtain will
close and the mirror will be lowered after about two minutes. End
cleaning or inspection immediately.
317
D Foreign Matter on the Image Sensor
Foreign matter entering the camera when lenses or body caps are
removed or exchanged (or in rare circumstances lubricant or fine
particles from the camera itself) may adhere to the image sensor,
where it may appear in photographs taken under certain conditions.
To protect the camera when no lens is in place, be sure to replace the
body cap provided with the camera, being careful to first remove all
dust and other foreign matter that may be adhering to the camera
mount, lens mount, and body cap. Avoid attaching the body cap or
exchanging lenses in dusty environments.
Should foreign matter find its way onto the image sensor, use the
image sensor cleaning option as described in “Image Sensor Cleaning”
(0 312). If the problem persists, clean the sensor manually (0 315) or
have the sensor cleaned by authorized Nikon service personnel.
Photographs affected by the presence of foreign matter on the sensor
can be retouched using the clean image options available in some
imaging applications.
D Servicing the Camera and Accessories
The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing. Nikon
recommends that the camera be inspected by the original retailer or a
Nikon-authorized service representative once every one to two years,
and that it be serviced once every three to five years (note that fees
apply to these services). Frequent inspection and servicing are
particularly recommended if the camera is used professionally. Any
accessories regularly used with the camera, such as lenses or optional
flash units, should be included when the camera is inspected or
serviced.
318
Caring for the Camera and Battery:
Cautions
Do not drop: The product may malfunction if subjected to strong shocks or
vibration.
Keep dry: This product is not waterproof, and may malfunction if
immersed in water or exposed to high levels of humidity. Rusting of the
internal mechanism can cause irreparable damage.
Avoid sudden changes in temperature: Sudden changes in temperature, such
as those that occur when entering or leaving a heated building on a cold
day, can cause condensation inside the device. To prevent condensation,
place the device in a carrying case or plastic bag before exposing it to
sudden changes in temperature.
Keep away from strong magnetic fields: Do not use or store this device in the
vicinity of equipment that generates strong electromagnetic radiation
or magnetic fields. Static charges or the magnetic fields produced by
equipment such as radio transmitters could interfere with the monitor,
damage data stored on the memory card, or affect the product’s internal
circuitry.
Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun: Do not leave the lens pointed at the
sun or other strong light source for an extended period. Intense light
may cause the image sensor to deteriorate or produce a white blur effect
in photographs.
Turn the product off before removing or disconnecting the power source: Do not
unplug the product or remove the battery while the product is on or
while images are being recorded or deleted. Forcibly cutting power in
these circumstances could result in loss of data or in damage to product
memory or internal circuitry. To prevent an accidental interruption of
power, avoid carrying the product from one location to another while
the AC adapter is connected.
319
Cleaning: When cleaning the camera body, use a blower to gently remove
dust and lint, then wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth. After using the
camera at the beach or seaside, wipe off any sand or salt using a cloth
lightly dampened in pure water and then dry the camera thoroughly. In
rare instances, static electricity may cause the LCD displays to light up or
go dark. This does not indicate a malfunction, and the display will soon
return to normal.
The lens and mirror are easily damaged. Dust and lint should be gently
removed with a blower. When using an aerosol blower, keep the can
vertical to prevent discharge of liquid. To remove fingerprints and other
stains from the lens, apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth
and wipe the lens carefully.
See “Image Sensor Cleaning” (0 312) for information on cleaning the
image sensor.
Lens contacts: Keep the lens contacts clean.
Do not touch the shutter curtain: The shutter curtain is extremely thin and
easily damaged. Under no circumstances should you exert pressure on
the curtain, poke it with cleaning tools, or subject it to powerful air
currents from a blower. These actions could scratch, deform, or tear the
curtain.
The shutter curtain may appear to be unevenly colored, but this has no
affect on pictures and does not indicate a malfunction.
320
Storage: To prevent mold or mildew, store the camera in a dry, wellventilated area. If you are using an AC adapter, unplug the adapter to
prevent fire. If the product will not be used for an extended period,
remove the battery to prevent leakage and store the camera in a plastic
bag containing a desiccant. Do not, however, store the camera case in a
plastic bag, as this may cause the material to deteriorate. Note that
desiccant gradually loses its capacity to absorb moisture and should be
replaced at regular intervals.
To prevent mold or mildew, take the camera out of storage at least once
a month. Turn the camera on and release the shutter a few times before
putting it away.
Store the battery in a cool, dry place. Replace the terminal cover before
putting the battery away.
Notes on the monitor: The monitor is constructed with extremely high
precision; at least 99.99% of pixels are effective, with no more than 0.01%
being missing or defective. Hence while these displays may contain
pixels that are always lit (white, red, blue, or green) or always off (black),
this is not a malfunction and has no effect on images recorded with the
device.
Images in the monitor may be difficult to see in a bright light.
Do not apply pressure to the monitor, as this could cause damage or
malfunction. Dust or lint on the monitor can be removed with a blower.
Stains can be removed by wiping lightly with a soft cloth or chamois
leather. Should the monitor break, care should be taken to avoid injury
from broken glass and to prevent liquid crystal from the monitor
touching the skin or entering the eyes and mouth.
321
The battery and charger: Batteries may leak or explode if improperly
handled. Observe the following precautions when handling batteries
and chargers:
• Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment.
• Do not expose the battery to flame or excessive heat.
• Keep the battery terminals clean.
• Turn the product off before replacing the battery.
• Remove the battery from the camera or charger when not in use and
replace the terminal cover. These devices draw minute amounts of
charge even when off and could draw the battery down to the point
that it will no longer function. If the battery will not be used for some
time, insert it in the camera and run it flat before removing it from the
camera for storage. The battery should be stored in a cool location with
an ambient temperature of 15 °C to 25 °C (59 °F to 77 °F; avoid hot or
extremely cold locations). Charge and discharge the battery at least
once every six months.
• Turning the camera on or off repeatedly when the battery is fully
discharged will shorten battery life. Batteries that have been fully
discharged must be charged before use.
• The internal temperature of the battery may rise while the battery is in
use. Attempting to charge the battery while the internal temperature is
elevated will impair battery performance, and the battery may not
charge or charge only partially. Wait for the battery to cool before
charging.
• Charge the battery indoors at ambient temperatures of 5 °C–35 °C
(41 °F–95 °F). Do not use the battery at ambient temperatures below
0 °C (32 °F) or above 40 °C (104 °F); failure to observe this precaution
could damage the battery or impair its performance. Capacity may be
reduced and charging times increase at battery temperatures from 0 °C
(32 °F) to 15 °C (59 °F) and from 45 °C (113 °F) to 60 °C (140 °F). The
battery will not charge if its temperature is below 0 °C (32 °F) or above
60 °C (140 °F).
322
• If the CHARGE lamp flashes quickly (about eight times a second) during
charging, confirm that the temperature is in the correct range and then
unplug the charger and remove and reinsert the battery. If the problem
persists, cease use immediately and take battery and charger to your
retailer or a Nikon-authorized service representative.
• Do not move the charger or touch the battery during charging. Failure
to observe this precaution could in very rare instances result in the
charger showing that charging is complete when the battery is only
partially charged. Remove and reinsert the battery to begin charging
again.
• Battery capacity may temporarily drop if the battery is charged at low
temperatures or used at a temperature below the temperature at
which it was charged. If the battery is charged at a temperature below
5 °C (41 °F), the battery life indicator in the Battery info (0 276) display
may show a temporary decrease.
• Continuing to charge the battery after it is fully charged can impair
battery performance.
• A marked drop in the time a fully charged battery retains its charge
when used at room temperature indicates that it requires replacement.
Purchase a new battery.
• The supplied power cable and AC wall adapter are for use with the
MH-25a only. Use the charger with compatible batteries only. Unplug
when not in use.
• Do not short the charger terminals. Failure to observe this precaution
could result in overheating and damage to the charger.
• Charge the battery before use. When taking photographs on important
occasions, ready a spare battery and keep it fully charged. Depending
on your location, it may be difficult to purchase replacement batteries
on short notice. Note that on cold days, the capacity of batteries tends
to decrease. Be sure the battery is fully charged before taking
photographs outside in cold weather. Keep a spare battery in a warm
place and exchange the two as necessary. Once warmed, a cold battery
may recover some of its charge.
• Used batteries are a valuable resource; recycle in accord with local
regulations.
323
Troubleshooting
If the camera fails to function as expected, check the list of
common problems below before consulting your retailer or
Nikon-authorized service representative.
Battery/Display
The camera is on but does not respond: Wait for recording to end. If the
problem persists, turn the camera off. If the camera does not turn off,
remove and reinsert the battery or, if you are using an AC adapter,
disconnect and reconnect the AC adapter. Note that although any data
currently being recorded will be lost, data that have already been
recorded will not be affected by removing or disconnecting the power
source.
Viewfinder is out of focus: Adjust viewfinder focus (0 9). If this does not
correct the problem, select single-servo AF (AF-S; 0 98), single-point AF
(0 100), and the center focus point (0 105), and then frame a highcontrast subject in the center focus point and press the shutter-release
button halfway to focus the camera. With the camera in focus, use the
diopter adjustment control to bring the subject into clear focus in the
viewfinder. If necessary, viewfinder focus can be further adjusted using
optional corrective lenses (0 295).
Viewfinder is dark: Insert a fully-charged battery (0 14, 30).
Displays turn off without warning: Choose longer delays for Custom Setting
c2 (Standby timer; 0 263) or c4 (Monitor off delay; 0 264).
Displays in control panel or viewfinder are unresponsive and dim: The response
times and brightness of these displays vary with temperature.
The viewfinder display turns red when a focus point is highlighted: This is normal
for this type of viewfinder and does not indicate a malfunction.
324
Shooting
Camera takes time to turn on: Delete files or folders.
Shutter-release disabled:
• Memory card is locked (SD cards only; 0 17), full, or not inserted
(0 31).
• Release locked is selected for Slot empty release lock in the setup
menu (0 276) and no memory card is inserted (0 16).
• Aperture ring for CPU lens not locked at highest f-number (does not
apply to type G and E lenses). If B is displayed in the control panel,
select Aperture ring for Custom Setting f4 (Customize command
dials) > Aperture setting to use lens aperture ring to adjust aperture
(0 269).
• Exposure mode S selected with A or % selected for shutter speed
(0 129, 133).
Camera is slow to respond to shutter-release button: Select Off for Custom
Setting d5 (Exposure delay mode; 0 264).
Only one shot taken each time shutter-release button is pressed in continuous release
mode: Turn HDR off (0 182).
Photos are out of focus:
• Rotate focus-mode selector to AF (0 94).
• Camera unable to focus using autofocus: use manual focus or focus
lock (0 108, 111).
Beep does not sound:
• Off is selected for Beep options > Beep on/off in setup menu (0 274).
• AF-C is selected for AF mode (0 98).
Full range of shutter speeds not available: Flash in use. Flash sync speed can be
selected using Custom Setting e1 (Flash sync speed); when using
compatible flash units, choose 1/250 s (Auto FP) for full range of shutter
speeds (0 266).
Focus does not lock when shutter-release button is pressed halfway: Camera is in
focus mode AF-C: use the center of the sub-selector to lock focus (0 108).
325
Cannot select focus point:
• Unlock focus selector lock (0 105).
• Auto-area AF selected, or face-priority AF selected in live view; choose
another mode (0 42, 100).
• Camera is in playback mode (0 223) or menus are in use (0 248).
• Press shutter-release button halfway to start standby timer (0 34).
Cannot select AF mode: Select No restrictions for Custom Setting a10
(Autofocus mode restrictions, 0 262).
Camera is slow to record photos: Turn long exposure noise reduction off
(0 253).
Noise (bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) appear in photos:
• Bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, and lines can be
reduced by lowering ISO sensitivity.
• Use the Long exposure NR option in the photo shooting menu to limit
the occurrence of bright spots or fog in photos taken at shutter speeds
slower than 1 s (0 253).
• Fog and bright spots may indicate that the camera’s internal
temperature has become elevated due to high ambient temperatures,
long exposures, or similar causes: turn the camera off and wait for it to
cool before resuming shooting.
• At high ISO sensitivities, lines may appear in photos taken with some
optional flash units; if this occurs, choose a lower value.
• At high ISO sensitivities, including high values selected with auto ISO
sensitivity control, randomly-spaced bright pixels can be reduced by
selecting High, Normal, or Low for High ISO NR in the photo or movie
shooting menu (0 253, 258).
• At high ISO sensitivities, bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels,
fog, or lines may be more noticeable in long exposures, multiple
exposures, and photos taken at high ambient temperatures or with
Active D-Lighting enabled, Flat selected for Set Picture Control
(0 175) or extreme values selected for Picture Control parameters
(0 178).
Photographs and movies do not appear to have the same exposure as the preview
shown in the monitor during live view: Changes to monitor brightness during
live view have no effect on images recorded with the camera (0 45).
326
Flicker or banding appears in movie mode: Select Flicker reduction in the
movie shooting menu and choose an option that matches the frequency
of the local AC power supply (0 258).
Bright regions or bands appear in live view: A flashing sign, flash, or other light
source with brief duration was used during live view.
Smudges appear in photographs: Clean front and rear lens elements. If
problem persists, perform image sensor cleaning (0 312).
Live view ends unexpectedly or does not start: Live view may end automatically
to prevent damage to the camera’s internal circuits if:
• The ambient temperature is high
• The camera has been used for extended periods in live view or to
record movies
• The camera has been used in continuous release modes for extended
periods
If live view does not start when you press the a button, wait for the
internal circuits to cool and then try again. Note that the camera may feel
warm to the touch, but this does not indicate a malfunction.
Image artifacts appear during live view: “Noise” (randomly-spaced bright
pixels, fog, or lines) and unexpected colors may appear if you zoom in on
the view through the lens (0 40) during live view; in movies, the amount
and distribution of randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, and bright spots
are affected by frame size and rate (0 69). Randomly-spaced bright
pixels, fog, or bright spots may also arise as a result of increases in the
temperature of the camera’s internal circuits during live view; exit live
view when the camera is not in use.
Cannot measure white balance: Subject is too dark or too bright (0 166).
Image cannot be selected as source for preset white balance: Image was not
created with D850 (0 172).
White balance bracketing unavailable:
• NEF (RAW) or NEF+JPEG image quality option selected for image
quality (0 88).
• Multiple exposure mode is in effect (0 254).
327
Effects of Picture Control differ from image to image: Auto is selected for Set
Picture Control, a Picture Control based on Auto is selected, or A (auto)
is selected for sharpening, clarity, contrast, or saturation. For consistent
results over a series of photographs, choose another setting (0 177).
Metering cannot be changed: Autoexposure lock is in effect (0 138).
Exposure compensation cannot be used: Choose exposure mode P, S, or A
(0 126, 139).
Noise (reddish areas or other artifacts) appears in long time-exposures: Enable long
exposure noise reduction (0 253).
Sound is not recorded with movies: Microphone off is selected for
Microphone sensitivity in the movie shooting menu (0 258).
Playback
NEF (RAW) image is not played back: Photo was taken at image quality of NEF
+ JPEG (0 89).
Cannot view pictures recorded with other cameras: Pictures recorded with other
makes of camera may not be displayed correctly.
Some photos are not displayed during playback: Select All for Playback folder
(0 248).
“Tall” (portrait) orientation photos are displayed in “wide” (landscape) orientation:
• Photo was taken with Off selected for Auto image rotation (0 249).
• Select On for Rotate tall (0 249).
• Photo is displayed in image review (0 249).
• Camera was pointed up or down when photo was taken.
Cannot delete photo: Picture is protected. Remove protection (0 240).
Cannot retouch picture: Photo cannot be further edited with this camera.
The camera displays a message stating that the folder contains no images: Select All
for Playback folder (0 248).
Cannot print photos: NEF (RAW) and TIFF photos cannot be printed by direct
USB connection. Transfer photos to computer and print using
Capture NX-D (0 ii). NEF (RAW) photos can be saved in JPEG format
using NEF (RAW) processing (0 278).
328
Photo is not displayed on high-definition video device: Confirm that HDMI cable
(available separately) is connected.
Image Dust Off option in Capture NX-D does not have desired effect: Image sensor
cleaning changes the position of dust on the image sensor. Dust off
reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is performed
cannot be used with photographs taken after image sensor cleaning is
performed. Dust off reference data recorded after image sensor cleaning
is performed cannot be used with photographs taken before image
sensor cleaning is performed.
Computer displays NEF (RAW) images differently from camera: Third-party
software does not display effects of Picture Controls, Active D-Lighting,
or vignette control. Use Capture NX-D (0 ii).
Cannot transfer photos to computer: OS not compatible with camera or
transfer software. Use card reader to copy photos to computer.
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi (Wireless Networks)
Smart devices do not display the camera SSID (network name):
• Confirm that Disable is selected for Airplane mode in the camera
setup menu (0 275).
• Confirm that Enable is selected for Bluetooth > Network connection
in the camera setup menu.
• Try turning the smart device Wi-Fi off and then on again.
Cannot connect to wireless printers and other wireless devices: This camera can
connect only to devices to which the SnapBridge app has been installed.
Miscellaneous
Date of recording is not correct: The camera clock is less accurate than most
watches and household clocks. Check the clock regularly against more
accurate timepieces and reset as necessary.
Menu item cannot be selected: Some options are not available at certain
combinations of settings or when no memory card is inserted. Note that
Battery info option is not available when camera is powered by an
optional power connector and AC adapter.
329
Error Messages
This section lists the indicators and error messages that appear
in the viewfinder, control panel, and monitor.
Indicator
Control Viewpanel finder
B
(flashes)
H
d
Problem
Lens aperture ring is
not set to minimum
aperture.
Low battery.
• Battery exhausted.
Solution
Set ring to minimum aperture
(highest f-number; 0 127).
Ready a fully-charged spare
battery (0 14, 30).
• Recharge or replace battery
(0 14, 30, 295).
• Contact Nikon-authorized
service representative.
• Replace the battery, or
recharge the battery if the
rechargeable Li-ion battery is
exhausted.
• Battery cannot be
used.
• An extremely
exhausted
rechargeable Li-ion
H
d
battery or a third(flashes) (flashes) party battery is
inserted either in the
camera or in the
optional MB-D18
multi-power battery
pack.
• High battery
• Remove battery and wait for
temperature.
it to cool.
330
Indicator
Control Viewpanel finder
Problem
No lens attached, or
non-CPU lens attached
without specifying
F
maximum aperture.
Aperture shown in
stops from maximum
aperture.
F H Camera unable to focus
—
(flashes) using autofocus.
Solution
Aperture value will be
displayed if maximum
aperture is specified (0 218).
Change composition or focus
manually (0 32, 111).
• Use a lower ISO sensitivity
(0 119).
• Use optional ND filter. In
Subject too bright;
exposure mode:
photo will be
S Increase shutter speed
overexposed.
(0 129)
(Exposure
A Choose a smaller aperture
indicators and
(higher f-number; 0 130)
shutter speed or
• Use a higher ISO sensitivity
aperture display
(0 119).
flash)
• Use optional flash (0 187). In
Subject too dark; photo exposure mode:
will be underexposed.
S Lower shutter speed
(0 129)
A Choose a larger aperture
(lower f-number; 0 130)
331
Indicator
Control Viewpanel finder
Problem
A
(flashes)
A selected in
exposure mode S.
%
(flashes)
% selected in exposure
mode S.
Solution
Change shutter speed or select
manual exposure mode
(0 129, 131).
Change shutter speed or select
manual exposure mode
(0 129, 131).
Wait until processing is
complete.
Check photo in monitor; if
underexposed, adjust settings
and try again.
1 k
Processing in progress.
(flashes) (flashes)
If indicator flashes for 3s
c
—
after flash fires, photo
(flashes)
may be underexposed.
Flash unit that does not
support red-eye
Change flash sync mode or use
Y
— reduction attached and flash unit that supports red(flashes)
flash sync mode set to eye reduction (0 193, 288).
red-eye reduction.
• Reduce quality or size (0 88,
91).
Memory insufficient to
• Delete photographs after
record further photos at
copying important images to
n j
current settings, or
computer or other device
(flashes) (flashes)
camera has run out of
(0 245).
file or folder numbers.
• Insert new memory card
(0 16).
Release shutter. If error persists
O
or appears frequently, consult
Camera malfunction.
(flashes)
Nikon-authorized service
representative.
332
Indicator
Monitor
No memory card.
Control
panel
Problem
Camera cannot
S detect memory
card.
• Error accessing
memory card.
Cannot access this W,
memory card.
R
Insert another card. (flashes)
m
W,
O
(flashes)
Memory card is
W,
locked. Slide lock to X
“write” position.
(flashes)
W,
Not available if
O
Eye-Fi card is locked.
(flashes)
Solution
Turn camera off and
confirm that card is
correctly inserted (0 16).
• Use Nikon-approved
card (0 360).
• If error persists after card
has been repeatedly
ejected and reinserted,
card may be damaged.
Contact retailer or
Nikon-authorized
service representative.
• Unable to create • Delete files or insert new
new folder.
memory card after
copying important
images to computer or
other device (0 16, 245,
360).
• Check that Eye-Fi card
firmware is up to date.
Camera cannot
• Copy files on Eye-Fi card
control Eye-Fi
to a computer or other
card.
device and format card,
or insert new card.
Memory card is
locked (write
Slide card write-protect
protected).
switch to “write” position
Eye-Fi card is
(0 17).
locked (write
protected).
333
Indicator
Monitor
Control
panel
Problem
Solution
Memory card has
This card is not
Format memory card or
[C] not been
formatted.
insert new memory card
(flashes) formatted for use
Format the card.
(0 271, 360).
in camera.
Wait for the internal
The internal
circuits to cool before
Unable to start live
temperature of
—
resuming live view
view. Please wait.
the camera is
photography or movie
high.
recording.
No images on
Select folder containing
memory card or images from Playback
Folder contains no
— in folder(s)
folder menu or insert
images.
memory card containing
selected for
images (0 16, 248).
playback.
No images can be played
back until another folder
All photos in
All images are
has been selected or Hide
— current folder are
hidden.
image used to allow at
hidden.
least one image to be
displayed (0 248).
File has been
created or
modified using a
Cannot display this
File cannot be played back
— computer or
file.
on camera.
different make of
camera, or file is
corrupt.
Selected image Images created with other
Cannot select this
— cannot be
devices cannot be
file.
retouched.
retouched.
334
Indicator
Monitor
Control
panel
Problem
Solution
• Movies created with
other devices cannot be
The selected
edited.
This movie cannot
— movie cannot be
be edited.
• Movies must be at least
edited.
two seconds long
(0 81).
Check printer. To resume,
Check printer.
— Printer error.
select Continue (if
available) *.
Paper in printer is
Insert paper of correct size
Check paper.
— not of selected
and select Continue *.
size.
Paper is jammed Clear jam and select
Paper jam.
—
in printer.
Continue *.
Printer is out of Insert paper of selected
Out of paper.
—
paper.
size and select Continue *.
Check ink. To resume,
Check ink supply.
— Ink error.
select Continue *.
Printer is out of Replace ink and select
Out of ink.
—
ink.
Continue *.
* See printer manual for more information.
335
Specifications
❚❚ Nikon D850 Digital Camera
Type
Type
Lens mount
Effective angle of view
Single-lens reflex digital camera
Nikon F mount (with AF coupling and AF
contacts)
Nikon FX format
Effective pixels
Effective pixels
45.7 million
Image sensor
Image sensor
Total pixels
Dust-reduction System
Storage
Image size (pixels)
336
35.9 × 23.9 mm CMOS sensor
46.89 million
Image sensor cleaning, Image Dust Off
reference data (Capture NX-D software
required)
• FX (36×24) image area
8256 × 5504 (Large: 45.4 M)
6192 × 4128 (Medium: 25.6 M)
4128 × 2752 (Small: 11.4 M)
• 1.2× (30×20) image area
6880 × 4584 (Large: 31.5 M)
5152 × 3432 (Medium: 17.7 M)
3440 × 2288 (Small: 7.9 M)
• DX (24×16) image area
5408 × 3600 (Large: 19.5 M)
4048 × 2696 (Medium: 10.9 M)
2704 × 1800 (Small: 4.9 M)
• 5 : 4 (30×24) image area
6880 × 5504 (Large: 37.9 M)
5152 × 4120 (Medium: 21.2 M)
3440 × 2752 (Small: 9.5 M)
Storage
Image size (pixels)
File format
Picture Control System
Media
Dual card slots
File system
• 1 : 1 (24×24) image area
5504 × 5504 (Large: 30.3 M)
4128 × 4128 (Medium: 17.0 M)
2752 × 2752 (Small: 7.6 M)
• FX-format photographs taken during movie recording
8256 × 4640 (Large)
6192 × 3480 (Medium)
4128 × 2320 (Small)
• DX-format photographs taken during movie recording
5408 × 3040 (Large)
4048 × 2272 (Medium)
2704 × 1520 (Small)
• NEF (RAW): 12 or 14 bit (lossless compressed,
compressed, or uncompressed); large,
medium, and small available (medium and
small images are recorded at a bit depth of
12 bits using lossless compression)
• TIFF (RGB)
• JPEG: JPEG-Baseline compliant with fine
(approx. 1 : 4), normal (approx. 1 : 8), or basic
(approx. 1 : 16) compression; optimal quality
compression available
• NEF (RAW)+JPEG: Single photograph recorded in
both NEF (RAW) and JPEG formats
Auto, Standard, Neutral, Vivid, Monochrome,
Portrait, Landscape, Flat; selected Picture
Control can be modified; storage for custom
Picture Controls
XQD and SD (Secure Digital) and UHS-II
compliant SDHC and SDXC memory cards
Either card can be used for primary or backup
storage or for separate storage of NEF (RAW)
and JPEG images; pictures can be copied
between cards.
DCF 2.0, Exif 2.31, PictBridge
337
Viewfinder
Viewfinder
Frame coverage
Magnification
Eyepoint
Diopter adjustment
Focusing screen
Reflex mirror
Depth-of-field preview
Lens aperture
338
Eye-level pentaprism single-lens reflex
viewfinder
• FX (36×24): Approx. 100% horizontal and 100%
vertical
• 1.2× (30×20): Approx. 97% horizontal and 97%
vertical
• DX (24×16): Approx. 97% horizontal and 97%
vertical
• 5:4 (30×24): Approx. 97% horizontal and 100%
vertical
• 1:1 (24×24): Approx. 97% horizontal and 100%
vertical
Approx. 0.75 × (50 mm f/1.4 lens at infinity,
–1.0 m–1)
17 mm (–1.0 m–1; from center surface of
viewfinder eyepiece lens)
–3–+1 m–1
Type B BriteView Clear Matte Mark VIII screen
with AF area brackets (framing grid can be
displayed)
Quick return
Pressing Pv button stops lens aperture down to
value selected by user (A and M modes) or by
camera (P and S modes)
Instant return, electronically controlled
Lens
Compatible lenses
Compatible with AF NIKKOR lenses, including
type G, E, and D lenses (some restrictions apply
to PC lenses), and DX lenses (using DX 24 × 16
image area), AI-P NIKKOR lenses, and non-CPU
AI lenses (exposure modes A and M only). IX
NIKKOR lenses, lenses for the F3AF, and non-AI
lenses cannot be used.
The electronic rangefinder can be used with
lenses that have a maximum aperture of f/5.6 or
faster (the electronic rangefinder supports
15 focus points with lenses that have a
maximum aperture of f/8 or faster, of which
9 points are available for selection).
Shutter
Type
Speed
Flash sync speed
Release
Release mode
Electronically-controlled vertical-travel focalplane mechanical shutter; electronic frontcurtain shutter available in quiet shutterrelease, quiet continuous shutter-release, and
mirror up release modes
1/8000 – 30 s in steps of 1/3, 1/2, or 1 EV, bulb, time,
X250
X= 1/250 s; synchronizes with shutter at 1/250 s or
slower; Auto FP High-Speed sync supported
S (single frame), CL (continuous low speed),
CH (continuous high speed), Q (quiet shutterrelease), QC (quiet continuous shutter-release),
E (self-timer), MUP (mirror up)
339
Release
Approximate frame
advance rate
Self-timer
Exposure
Metering system
• With an EN-EL18c battery inserted in an MB-D18
battery pack
CL: 1–8 fps
CH: 9 fps
QC: 3 fps
• Other power sources
CL: 1–6 fps
CH: 7 fps
QC: 3 fps
2 s, 5 s, 10 s, 20 s; 1–9 exposures at intervals of
0.5, 1, 2, or 3 s
TTL exposure metering using RGB sensor with
approximately 180K (180,000) pixels
Metering mode
• Matrix: 3D color matrix metering III (type G, E,
and D lenses); color matrix metering III (other
CPU lenses); color matrix metering available
with non-CPU lenses if user provides lens data
• Center-weighted: Weight of 75% given to 12 mm
circle in center of frame. Diameter of circle can
be changed to 8, 15, or 20 mm, or weighting
can be based on average of entire frame (nonCPU and AF-S Fisheye NIKKOR 8–15mm f/3.5–
4.5E ED lenses use 12-mm circle)
• Spot: Meters 4 mm circle (about 1.5% of frame)
centered on selected focus point (on center
focus point when non-CPU or AF-S Fisheye
NIKKOR 8–15mm f/3.5–4.5E ED lens is used)
• Highlight-weighted: Available with type G, E, and
D lenses
Range (ISO 100, f/1.4 lens, • Matrix or center-weighted metering: –3–+20 EV
20 °C/68 °F)
• Spot metering: 2–20 EV
• Highlight-weighted metering: 0–20 EV
Exposure meter coupling Combined CPU and AI
340
Exposure
Exposure mode
Programmed auto with flexible program (P);
shutter-priority auto (S); aperture-priority auto
(A); manual (M)
Exposure compensation –5 – +5 EV in increments of 1/3, 1/2, or 1 EV
Exposure lock
Luminosity locked at detected value
ISO sensitivity
ISO 64 – 25600 in steps of 1/3, 1/2, or 1 EV. Can also
(Recommended Exposure be set to approx. 0.3, 0.5, 0.7, or 1 EV (ISO 32
Index)
equivalent) below ISO 64 or to approx. 0.3, 0.5,
0.7, 1, or 2 EV (ISO 102400 equivalent) above
ISO 25600; auto ISO sensitivity control available
Active D-Lighting
Can be selected from Auto, Extra high, High,
Normal, Low, or Off
Focus
Autofocus
Detection range
Lens servo
Focus point
AF-area mode
Focus lock
Multi-CAM 20K autofocus sensor module with
TTL phase detection, fine-tuning, and 153 focus
points (including 99 cross-type sensors and 15
sensors that support f/8), of which 55 (35 crosstype sensors and 9 f/8 sensors) are available for
selection
–4 – +20 EV (ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F)
• Autofocus (AF): Single-servo AF (AF-S);
continuous-servo AF (AF-C); predictive focus
tracking automatically activated according to
subject status
• Manual focus (M): Electronic rangefinder can be
used
153 focus points, of which 55 or 15 are available
for selection
Single-point AF, 9-, 25-, 72-, or 153- point
dynamic-area AF, 3D-tracking, group-area AF,
auto-area AF
Focus can be locked by pressing shutter-release
button halfway (single-servo AF) or by pressing
the center of the sub-selector
341
Flash
Flash control
Flash mode
Flash compensation
Flash-ready indicator
Accessory shoe
Nikon Creative Lighting
System (CLS)
Sync terminal
White balance
White balance
Bracketing
Bracketing types
342
TTL: i-TTL flash control using RGB sensor with
approximately 180K (180,000) pixels; i-TTL
balanced fill-flash for digital SLR is used with
matrix, center-weighted, and highlightweighted metering, standard i-TTL fill-flash for
digital SLR with spot metering
Front-curtain sync, slow sync, rear-curtain sync,
red-eye reduction, red-eye reduction with slow
sync, slow rear-curtain sync, off
–3 – +1 EV in increments of 1/3, 1/2, or 1 EV
Lights when optional flash unit is fully charged;
flashes after flash is fired at full output
ISO 518 hot-shoe with sync and data contacts
and safety lock
i-TTL flash control, radio-controlled Advanced
Wireless Lighting, optical Advanced Wireless
Lighting, modeling illumination, FV lock, Color
Information Communication, Auto FP HighSpeed Sync, AF-assist for multi-area AF, unified
flash control
ISO 519 sync terminal with locking thread
Auto (3 types), natural light auto, incandescent,
fluorescent (7 types), direct sunlight, flash,
cloudy, shade, preset manual (up to 6 values
can be stored, spot white balance
measurement available during live view),
choose color temperature (2500 K–10,000 K), all
with fine-tuning.
Exposure, flash, white balance, and ADL
Live view
Modes
Lens servo
AF-area mode
Autofocus
Movie
Metering system
Metering mode
Frame size (pixels) and
frame rate
File format
Video compression
Audio recording format
Audio recording device
C (photo live view), 1 (movie live view)
• Autofocus (AF): Single-servo AF (AF-S); full-timeservo AF (AF-F)
• Manual focus (M)
Face-priority AF, wide-area AF, normal-area AF,
pinpoint AF, subject-tracking AF
Contrast-detect AF anywhere in frame (camera
selects focus point automatically when facepriority AF or subject-tracking AF is selected)
TTL exposure metering using main image
sensor
Matrix, center-weighted, or highlight-weighted
• 3840 × 2160 (4K UHD); 30p (progressive), 25p,
24p
• 1920 × 1080; 60p, 50p, 30p, 25p, 24p
• 1280 × 720; 60p, 50p
• 1920×1080 (slow-mo); 30p ×4, 25p ×4, 24p ×5
Actual frame rates for 60p, 50p, 30p, 25p, and
24p are 59.94, 50, 29.97, 25, and 23.976 fps
respectively; quality selection available at all
sizes except 3840 × 2160 (when quality is fixed
at ★) and 1920 × 1080 slow-mo (when quality is
fixed at “normal”)
MOV, MP4
H.264/MPEG-4 Advanced Video Coding
Linear PCM, AAC
Built-in stereo or external microphone;
sensitivity adjustable
343
Movie
ISO sensitivity
• Exposure modes P, S, and A: Auto ISO sensitivity
(Recommended Exposure control (ISO 64 to Hi 2) with selectable upper
Index)
limit
• Exposure mode M: Auto ISO sensitivity control
(ISO 64 to Hi 2) available with selectable upper
limit; manual selection (ISO 64 to 25600 in
steps of 1/3, 1/2, or 1 EV) with additional options
available equivalent to approximately 0.3, 0.5,
0.7, 1, or 2 EV (ISO 102400 equivalent) above
ISO 25600
Active D-Lighting
Can be selected from Same as photo settings,
Extra high, High, Normal, Low, or Off
Other options
Index marking, time-lapse movies, electronic
vibration reduction
Monitor
Monitor
Playback
Playback
Interface
USB
HDMI output
344
8-cm/3.2-in., approx. 2359k-dot (XGA) tilting
TFT touch-sensitive LCD with 170° viewing
angle, approximately 100% frame coverage,
and manual monitor brightness control
Full-frame and thumbnail (4, 9, or 72 images)
playback with playback zoom, playback zoom
cropping, movie playback, photo and/or movie
slide shows, histogram display, highlights,
photo information, location data display,
picture rating, and auto image rotation
SuperSpeed USB (USB 3.0 Micro-B connector);
connection to built-in USB port is
recommended
Type C HDMI connector
Interface
Audio input
Audio output
Ten-pin remote terminal
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Wi-Fi
Bluetooth
Range (line of sight)
Supported languages
Supported languages
Power source
Battery
Stereo mini-pin jack (3.5mm diameter; plug-in
power supported)
Stereo mini-pin jack (3.5mm diameter)
Can be used with optional MC-30A/MC-36A
remote cords and other optional accessories
• Standards: IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g
• Operating frequency: 2412–2462 MHz
(channels 1–11)
• Maximum output power: 1.6 dBm (EIRP)
• Authentication: Open system, WPA2-PSK
• Communication protocols: Bluetooth Specification
Version 4.1
• Operating frequency:
Bluetooth: 2402–2480 MHz
Bluetooth Low Energy: 2402–2480 MHz
• Maximum output power (EIRP):
Bluetooth: –0.4 dBm
Bluetooth Low Energy: –0.4 dBm
Approximately 10 m (32 ft) without
interference; range may vary with signal
strength and presence or absence of obstacles
Arabic, Bengali, Bulgarian, Chinese (Simplified
and Traditional), Czech, Danish, Dutch, English,
Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hindi,
Hungarian, Indonesian, Italian, Japanese,
Korean, Marathi, Norwegian, Persian, Polish,
Portuguese (Portugal and Brazil), Romanian,
Russian, Serbian, Spanish, Swedish, Tamil,
Telugu, Thai, Turkish, Ukrainian, Vietnamese
One EN-EL15a rechargeable Li-ion battery;
EN-EL15b/EN-EL15 can also be used, but note
that fewer pictures may sometimes be taken on
a single charge with an EN-EL15 than with an
EN-EL15b/EN-EL15a (0 365)
345
Power source
Battery pack
AC adapter
Tripod socket
Tripod socket
Dimensions/weight
Dimensions (W × H × D)
Weight
Operating environment
Temperature
Humidity
Optional MB-D18 multi-power battery pack with
one rechargeable Nikon EN-EL18c Li-ion battery
(available separately), one rechargeable Nikon
EN-EL15a Li-ion battery, or eight AA alkaline,
Ni-MH, or lithium batteries. An MH-26a or MH-26
battery charger and a BL-5 battery-chamber
cover (both available separately) are required
when using EN-EL18c batteries. EN-EL18b,
EN-EL18a, EN-EL18, EN-EL15b, and EN-EL15
batteries are also supported, but note that fewer
pictures can be taken on a single charge with an
EN-EL18 than with an EN-EL18c/EN-EL18b/
EN-EL18a, and that fewer pictures may
sometimes be taken on a single charge with an
EN-EL15 than with an EN-EL15b/EN-EL15a
(0 365).
EH-5c/EH-5b AC adapter; requires EP-5B power
connector (available separately)
/ in. (ISO 1222)
14
Approx. 146 × 124 × 78.5 mm (5.8 × 4.9 × 3.1 in.)
Approx. 1005 g (2 lb. 3.5 oz.) with battery and
XQD memory card but without body cap;
approx. 915 g/2 lb. 0.3 oz. (camera body only)
0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)
85% or less (no condensation)
• Unless otherwise stated, all measurements are performed in conformity with Camera and
Imaging Products Association (CIPA) standards or guidelines.
• All figures are for a camera with a fully-charged battery.
• Nikon reserves the right to change the appearance and specifications of the hardware and
software described in this manual at any time and without prior notice. Nikon will not be held
liable for damages that may result from any mistakes that this manual may contain.
346
❚❚ MH-25a Battery Charger
Rated input
Rated output
Supported batteries
Charging time
Operating temperature
Dimensions (W × H × D)
Length of power cable
(if supplied)
Weight
AC 100–240 V, 50/60 Hz, 0.23–0.12 A
DC 8.4 V/1.2 A
Nikon EN-EL15b/EN-EL15a/EN-EL15
rechargeable Li-ion batteries
Approx. 2 hours and 35 minutes at an ambient
temperature of 25 °C (77 °F) when no charge
remains
0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)
Approx. 95 × 33.5 × 71 mm (3.7 × 1.3 × 2.8 in.),
excluding projections
Approx. 1.5 m (4.9 ft)
Approx. 115 g (4.1 oz), excluding supplied
power connector (power cable or AC wall
adapter)
The symbols on this product represent the following:
m AC, p DC, q Class II equipment (The construction of the product is double-insulated.)
❚❚ EN-EL15a Rechargeable Li-ion Battery
Type
Rated capacity
Operating temperature
Dimensions (W × H × D)
Weight
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
7.0 V/1900 mAh
0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)
Approx. 40 × 56 × 20.5 mm (1.6 × 2.2 × 0.8 in.)
Approx. 78 g (2.8 oz), excluding terminal cover
Nikon reserves the right to change the appearance and specifications of the hardware and
software described in this manual at any time and without prior notice. Nikon will not be held
liable for damages that may result from any mistakes that this manual may contain.
347
A Trademark Information
IOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco Systems, Inc., in the
United States and/or other countries and is used under license.
Windows is either a registered trademark or a trademark of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Mac, macOS,
OS X, Apple®, App Store®, the Apple logos, iPhone®, iPad®, and iPod
touch® are trademarks of Apple Inc. registered in the U.S. and/or other
countries. Android, Google Play and the Google Play logo are
trademarks of Google LLC. The Android robot is reproduced or
modified from work created and shared by Google and used
according to terms described in the Creative Commons 3.0 Attribution
License. PictBridge logo is a trademark. XQD is a trademark of Sony
Corporation. The SD, SDHC, and SDXC logos are trademarks of the
SD-3C, LLC. HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia
Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing,
LLC.
Wi-Fi and the Wi-Fi logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of the
Wi-Fi Alliance.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned
by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Nikon Corporation
is under license.
All other trade names mentioned in this manual or the other
documentation provided with your Nikon product are trademarks or
registered trademarks of their respective holders.
Use of the Made for Apple badge means that an accessory has been
designed to connect specifically to the Apple products identified in
the badge, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple
performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of
this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards.
Please note that the use of this accessory with an Apple product may
affect wireless performance.
348
A Supported Standards
• DCF Version 2.0: The Design Rule for Camera File System (DCF) is a
standard widely used in the digital camera industry to ensure
compatibility among different makes of camera.
• Exif version 2.31: The camera supports Exif (Exchangeable Image File
Format for Digital Still Cameras) version 2.31, a standard in which
information stored with photographs is used for optimal color
reproduction when the images are output on Exif-compliant printers.
• PictBridge: A standard developed through cooperation with the digital
camera and printer industries, allowing photographs to be output
directly to a printer without first transferring them to a computer.
• HDMI: High-Definition Multimedia Interface is a standard for
multimedia interfaces used in consumer electronics and AV devices
capable of transmitting audiovisual data and control signals to HDMIcompliant devices via a single cable connection.
A Conformity Marking
The standards with which the camera complies can be viewed using
the Conformity marking option in the setup menu (0 276).
349
A Certificates
A FreeType License (FreeType2)
Portions of this software are copyright © 2012 The FreeType Project
(http://www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.
A MIT License (HarfBuzz)
Portions of this software are copyright © 2017 The HarfBuzz Project
(http://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/HarfBuzz). All rights
reserved.
350
AF-S NIKKOR 24–120mm f/4G ED VR Lens
User’s Manual
This section is included as a lens manual for purchasers of the
AF-S NIKKOR 24–120mm f/4G ED VR lens kit. Note that lens kits
may not be available in some countries or regions.
Using the Lens
❚❚ Parts of the Lens: Names and Functions
1 2
3
4
5 6 7 8 9 10
11 12 13
14
15
16
1 Lens hood .....................................357 10 Focus ring .....................................111
2 Lens hood alignment mark ......357 11 Lens mounting mark.................... 19
3 Lens hood lock mark ..................357 12 Rubber lens-mount gasket
4 Lens hood mounting mark.......357 13 CPU contacts................................284
5 Zoom ring
14 Focus-mode switch ....................111
6 Focal length scale
15 Vibration reduction switch.......355
7 Focal length mark
16 Vibration reduction mode switch
.......................................................355
8 Focus distance indicator
9 Focus distance mark
AF-S NIKKOR 24–120mm f/4G ED VR Lens User’s Manual 351
❚❚ Focus
Supported focus modes are shown in the following table (for
information on camera focus modes, see the camera manual).
Camera focus mode
AF
MF
Lens focus mode
M/A
M
Autofocus with
Manual focus with
manual override
electronic rangefinder
(manual priority)
Manual focus with electronic rangefinder
M/A (Autofocus with Manual Override)
To focus using autofocus with manual override (M/A):
1 Slide the lens focus-mode switch to M/A.
2 Focus.
If desired, autofocus can be over-ridden by rotating the lens
focus ring while the shutter-release button is pressed halfway
(or, if the camera is equipped with an AF-ON button, while the
AF-ON button is pressed). To refocus using autofocus, press the
shutter-release button halfway or press the AF-ON button
again.
352 AF-S NIKKOR 24–120mm f/4G ED VR Lens User’s Manual
❚❚ Zoom and Depth of Field
Before focusing, rotate the zoom ring to adjust the focal length
and frame the photograph. If the camera offers depth-of-field
preview (stop down), depth of field can be previewed in the
viewfinder.
Note: The lens uses Nikon’s Internal Focusing (IF) system. Unlike
other lenses, focal length decreases as the focus distance
shortens. Note that the focus distance indicator is intended only
as a guide and may not accurately show the distance to the
subject and may, due to depth of field or other factors, not show
∞ when the camera is focused on a distant object.
❚❚ Aperture
Aperture is adjusted using camera controls.
AF-S NIKKOR 24–120mm f/4G ED VR Lens User’s Manual 353
❚❚ Using the Built-in Flash
When using the built-in flash, be sure the subject is at a range of
at least 0.6 m (2 ft) and remove lens hoods to prevent vignetting
(shadows created where the end of the lens obscures the built-in
flash).
Shadow
Vignetting
When the lens is mounted on the following cameras, the built-in
flash may be unable to light the entire subject at ranges less than
those given below:
Camera
D750 (FX format)/
D610 (FX format)/
D600 (FX format)
D810 series (FX format)/
D800 series (FX format)
D700 (FX format)
D300 series/D200/D100
D90/D80/D70 series/D50
D5600/D5500/D5300/D5200/
D5100/D3300/D3200
Zoom position
24 mm
28 mm
50–120 mm
28 mm
35–120 mm
24 mm
35–120 mm
24 mm
35–120 mm
24 mm
35–120 mm
24 mm
28–120 mm
354 AF-S NIKKOR 24–120mm f/4G ED VR Lens User’s Manual
Minimum distance
without vignetting
2.0 m/6 ft 7 in.
1.0 m/3 ft 4 in.
No vignetting
1.0 m/3 ft 4 in.
No vignetting
3.0 m/9 ft 11 in.
No vignetting
1.0 m/3 ft 4 in.
No vignetting
1.5 m/5 ft
No vignetting
1.5 m/5 ft
No vignetting
Camera
D5000/D3100/D3000/D60/
D40 series
D3400
Zoom position
24 mm
35–120 mm
24 mm
28 mm
35–120 mm
Minimum distance
without vignetting
2.5 m/8 ft 3 in.
No vignetting
1.5 m/5 ft
1.0 m/3 ft 4 in.
No vignetting
❚❚ Vibration Reduction (VR)
Using the Vibration Reduction ON/OFF Switch
• Select ON to enable vibration reduction. Vibration reduction is
activated when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway,
reducing the effects of camera shake for improved framing and
focus.
• Select OFF to turn vibration reduction off.
Using the Vibration Reduction Mode Switch
• Select NORMAL for enhanced vibration reduction when
photographing stationary subjects.
• Select ACTIVE to reduce the effects of vibration when shooting
from a moving vehicle, and in other situations with active
camera motion.
AF-S NIKKOR 24–120mm f/4G ED VR Lens User’s Manual 355
D Using Vibration Reduction: Notes
• When using vibration reduction, press the shutter-release button
halfway and wait for the image in the viewfinder to stabilize before
pressing the shutter-release button the rest of the way down.
• When vibration reduction is active, the image in the viewfinder may
jiggle after the shutter is released. This does not indicate a
malfunction.
• Slide the vibration reduction mode switch to NORMAL for panning
shots. When the camera is panned, vibration reduction applies only
to motion that is not part of a pan (if the camera is panned
horizontally, for example, vibration reduction will be applied only to
vertical shake), making it much easier to pan the camera smoothly in
a wide arc.
• Do not turn the camera off or remove the lens while vibration
reduction is in effect. If power to the lens is cut while vibration
reduction is on, the lens may rattle when shaken. This is not a
malfunction, and can be corrected by reattaching the lens and
turning the camera on.
• If the camera is equipped with a built-in flash, vibration reduction will
be disabled while the flash charges.
• In the case of cameras equipped with an AF-ON button, vibration
reduction will not be performed when the AF-ON button is pressed.
• Select OFF when the camera is mounted on a tripod unless the tripod
head is unsecured or the camera is mounted on a monopod, in which
case ON is recommended.
356 AF-S NIKKOR 24–120mm f/4G ED VR Lens User’s Manual
❚❚ The Lens Hood
The lens hoods protect the lens and block stray light that would
otherwise cause flare or ghosting.
Attaching the Hood
Align the lens hood mounting mark (●) with the lens hood
alignment mark ( ) and then rotate the hood (w) until the ●
mark is aligned with the lens hood lock mark (—).
When attaching or removing the hood, hold it near the symbol
on its base and avoid gripping it too tightly. Vignetting may
occur if the hood is not correctly attached. The hood can be
reversed and mounted on the lens when not in use.
❚❚ Supplied Accessories
• LC-77 77 mm snap-on Front Lens Cap
• LF-4 Rear Lens Cap
• HB-53 Bayonet Hood
• CL-1218 Flexible Lens Pouch
❚❚ Compatible Accessories
77 mm screw-on filters
AF-S NIKKOR 24–120mm f/4G ED VR Lens User’s Manual 357
❚❚ Specifications
Type G AF-S lens with built-in CPU and F mount
24–120 mm
f/4
17 elements in 13 groups (including 2 ED lens
elements, 3 aspherical lens elements, and lens
elements with Nano-Crystal coatings)
Angle of view
• Nikon FX-format D-SLR cameras: 84° – 20° 20´
• Nikon DX-format D-SLR cameras: 61° – 13° 20´
Focal length scale
Graduated in millimeters (24, 28, 35, 50, 70, 85,
120)
Distance information
Output to camera
Zoom
Manual zoom using independent zoom ring
Focusing
Nikon Internal Focusing (IF) System with
autofocus controlled by Silent Wave Motor and
separate focus ring for manual focus
Vibration reduction
Lens shift using voice coil motors (VCMs)
Focus distance indicator 0.45 m to infinity (∞)
Minimum focus distance 0.45 m (1.48 ft) from focal plane at all zoom
positions
Diaphragm blades
9 (rounded diaphragm opening)
Diaphragm
Fully automatic
Aperture range
f/4–22
Metering
Full aperture
Filter-attachment size
77 mm (P = 0.75 mm)
Dimensions
Approx. 84 mm maximum diameter × 103.5 mm
(distance from camera lens mount flange)
Weight
Approx. 710 g (1 lb 9.1 oz)
Nikon reserves the right to change the appearance and specifications of the hardware and
software described in this manual at any time and without prior notice. Nikon will not be held
liable for damages that may result from any mistakes that this manual may contain.
Type
Focal length
Maximum aperture
Lens construction
358 AF-S NIKKOR 24–120mm f/4G ED VR Lens User’s Manual
D Lens Care
• Keep the CPU contacts clean.
• Should the rubber lens-mount gasket be damaged, cease use
immediately and take the lens to a Nikon-authorized service center
for repair.
• Use a blower to remove dust and lint from the lens surfaces. To
remove smudges and fingerprints, apply a small amount of ethanol
or lens cleaner to a soft, clean cotton cloth or lens-cleaning tissue and
clean from the center outwards using a circular motion, taking care
not to leave smears or touch the glass with your fingers.
• Never use organic solvents such as paint thinner or benzene to clean
the lens.
• The lens hood or Neutral Color (NC) filters can be used to protect the
front lens element.
• Attach the front and rear caps before placing the lens in its case.
• When a lens hood is attached, do not pick up or hold the lens or
camera using only the hood.
• If the lens will not be used for an extended period, store it in a cool,
dry location to prevent mold and rust. Do not store in direct sunlight
or with naphtha or camphor moth balls.
• Keep the lens dry. Rusting of the internal mechanism can cause
irreparable damage.
• Leaving the lens in extremely hot locations could damage or warp
parts made from reinforced plastic.
AF-S NIKKOR 24–120mm f/4G ED VR Lens User’s Manual 359
Approved Memory Cards
❚❚ XQD Memory Cards
The camera can be used with XQD memory cards. Cards with
write speeds of 45 MB/s (300×) or better are recommended for
movie recording; slower speeds may interrupt recording or
cause jerky, uneven playback. Contact the manufacturer for
information on features, operation, and limitations on use.
360
❚❚ SD Memory Cards
The camera supports SD, SDHC, and SDXC memory
cards, including SDHC and SDXC cards compliant
with UHS-I and UHS-II. Cards rated UHS Speed Class
3 or better are recommended for movie recording; using slower
cards may result in recording being interrupted. When choosing
cards for use in card readers, be sure they are compatible with
the device. Contact the manufacturer for information on
features, operation, and limitations on use.
361
Memory Card Capacity
The following table shows the approximate number of pictures
that can be stored on a 64 GB Sony QD-G64E XQD card at
different image quality, image size, and image area settings (as
of September 2017).
❚❚ FX (36×24) Image Area *
Image quality
NEF (RAW), Lossless
compressed, 12-bit
NEF (RAW), Lossless
compressed, 14-bit
NEF (RAW),
Compressed, 12-bit
NEF (RAW),
Compressed, 14-bit
NEF (RAW),
Uncompressed, 12-bit
NEF (RAW),
Uncompressed, 14-bit
Image size
Large
Medium
Small
File size 1 No. of images 1 Buffer capacity 2
41.5 MB
763
170
30.0 MB
1000
94
21.9 MB
1400
56
Large
51.6 MB
589
51
Large
34.2 MB
1000
200
Large
43.8 MB
865
74
Large
70.3 MB
763
55
Large
92.0 MB
589
29
Large
134.6 MB
408
32
Medium
76.6 MB
718
35
Small
34.9 MB
1500
39
Large
22.0 MB
1900
200
Medium
12.6 MB
3200
200
JPEG fine 3
Small
6.6 MB
6700
200
Large
11.5 MB
3800
200
JPEG normal 3
Medium
6.8 MB
6400
200
Small
3.4 MB
13,000
200
Large
4.2 MB
7400
200
JPEG basic 3
Medium
2.8 MB
12,500
200
Small
1.8 MB
24,500
200
* Includes images taken with non-DX lenses when On is selected for Auto DX crop.
TIFF (RGB)
362
❚❚ DX (24 × 16) Image Area *
Image quality
NEF (RAW), Lossless
compressed, 12-bit
NEF (RAW), Lossless
compressed, 14-bit
NEF (RAW),
Compressed, 12-bit
NEF (RAW),
Compressed, 14-bit
NEF (RAW),
Uncompressed, 12-bit
NEF (RAW),
Uncompressed, 14-bit
Image size
Large
Medium
Small
File size 1 No. of images 1 Buffer capacity 2
19.4 MB
1700
200
14.1 MB
2300
200
11.0 MB
3000
200
Large
23.9 MB
1300
200
Large
15.9 MB
2300
200
Large
19.8 MB
1900
200
Large
30.8 MB
1700
200
Large
40.2 MB
1300
200
Large
58.4 MB
936
113
Medium
33.3 MB
1600
200
Small
15.6 MB
3400
200
Large
10.1 MB
4200
200
Medium
6.2 MB
6900
200
JPEG fine 3
Small
3.4 MB
12,900
200
Large
5.3 MB
8200
200
JPEG normal 3
Medium
3.3 MB
13,500
200
Small
1.8 MB
24,500
200
Large
2.4 MB
15,900
200
JPEG basic 3
Medium
1.7 MB
25,100
200
Small
1.0 MB
43,100
200
* Includes images taken with DX lenses when On is selected for Auto DX crop.
TIFF (RGB)
363
1 All figures are approximate. File size varies with scene recorded.
2 Maximum number of exposures that can be stored in memory buffer at ISO 100. May drop in
some situations, for example at image qualities marked with a star (“★”) or if auto distortion
control is on.
3 Figures assume size-priority JPEG compression. Selecting an image-quality option marked with
a star (“★”; optimal compression) increases the file size of JPEG images; number of images and
buffer capacity drop accordingly.
A d2—Max. Continuous Release (0 264)
The maximum number of photographs that can be taken in a single
burst can be set to any amount between 1 and 200.
364
Battery Life
The movie footage or number of shots that can be recorded with
fully-charged batteries varies with the condition of the battery,
temperature, interval between shots, and the length of time
menus are displayed. In the case of AA batteries, capacity also
varies with make and storage conditions; some batteries cannot
be used. Sample figures for the camera and optional MB-D18
multi-power battery pack are given below.
• Photographs, single-frame release mode (CIPA standard 1)
- One EN-EL15a battery 2 (camera): Approximately 1840 shots
- One EN-EL15a battery 2 (MB-D18): Approximately 1840 shots
- One EN-EL18c battery 3 (MB-D18): Approximately 3300 shots
- Eight AA alkaline batteries (MB-D18): Approximately 1740 shots
• Photographs, continuous release mode (Nikon standard 4)
- One EN-EL15a battery 2 (camera): Approximately 4030 shots
- One EN-EL15a battery 2 (MB-D18): Approximately 4030 shots
- One EN-EL18c battery 3 (MB-D18): Approximately 7700 shots
- Eight AA alkaline batteries (MB-D18): Approximately 2960 shots
• Movies 5
- One EN-EL15a battery 2 (camera): Approximately 70 minutes of HD
footage
- One EN-EL15a battery 2 (MB-D18): Approximately 70 minutes of HD
footage
- One EN-EL18c battery 3 (MB-D18): Approximately 145 minutes of
HD footage
- Eight AA alkaline batteries (MB-D18): Approximately 65 minutes of
HD footage
365
1 Measured at 23 °C/73.4 °F (±2 °C/3.6 °F) with an AF-S NIKKOR 24–120mm f/4G ED VR lens
under the following test conditions: lens cycled from infinity to minimum range and one
photograph taken at default settings once every 30 s. Live view not used.
2 EN-EL15b or EN-EL15 batteries can also be used in place of the EN-EL15a, but note that fewer
pictures may sometimes be taken on a single charge with an EN-EL15 than with an EN-EL15b/
EN-EL15a.
3 Requires MH-26a or MH-26 battery charger and BL-5 battery-chamber cover (both available
separately). EN-EL18b, EN-EL18a, and EN-EL18 batteries can be used in place of the EN-EL18c,
but note that fewer pictures can be taken on a single charge with an EN-EL18 than with an
EN-EL18c/EN-EL18b/EN-EL18a.
4 Measured at 23 °C/73.4 °F (±2 °C/3.6 °F) with an AF-S NIKKOR 70–200mm f/2.8E FL ED VR lens
under the following test conditions: vibration reduction off, image quality set to JPEG normal,
image size set to Large, shutter speed 1/250 s, focus cycled from infinity to minimum range
three times after shutter-release button has been pressed halfway for 3 s; six shots are then
taken in succession and monitor turned on for 5 s and then turned off; cycle repeated once
standby timer has expired.
5 Measured at 23 °C/73.4 °F (±2 °C/3.6 °F) with the camera at default settings and an AF-S
NIKKOR 24–120mm f/4G ED VR lens under conditions specified by the Camera and Imaging
Products Association (CIPA). Individual movies are composed of one or more files, each up to
4 GB in size, and can total up to 29 minutes 59 seconds in length; recording may end before
these limits are reached if the camera temperature rises.
Actions such as the following can reduce battery life:
• Using the monitor
• Keeping the shutter-release button pressed halfway
• Repeated autofocus operations
• Taking NEF (RAW) or TIFF (RGB) photographs
• Slow shutter speeds
• Using camera Wi-Fi (wireless LAN) and Bluetooth features
• Using the camera with optional accessories connected
• Using VR (vibration reduction) mode with VR lenses
• Repeatedly zooming in and out with an AF-P lens.
To ensure that you get the most from rechargeable Nikon
EN-EL15a batteries:
• Keep the battery contacts clean. Soiled contacts can reduce
battery performance.
• Use batteries immediately after charging. Batteries will lose
their charge if left unused.
366
Index
Symbols
Numerics
P (Programmed auto).............126, 128
S (Shutter-priority auto) ........126, 129
A (Aperture-priority auto).....126, 130
M (Manual)..................................126, 131
S (Single frame) ................................. 113
CL (Continuous low speed) ...113, 264
CH (Continuous high speed).......... 113
Q (Quiet shutter-release) ................ 113
QC (Quiet continuous shutterrelease)............................................... 113
E (Self-timer) .................. 113, 116, 264
MUP.................................................114, 118
K (Single-point AF) ........................ 100
I (Dynamic-area AF) ..................... 100
T (3D-tracking)................................ 101
N (Group-area AF) .......................... 101
H (Auto-area AF) ............................. 101
! (Face-priority AF)............................42
5 (Wide-area AF).................................42
6 (Normal-area AF) ............................42
3 (Pinpoint AF) ....................................42
& (Subject-tracking AF)..................43
L (Matrix)............................................ 124
M (Center-weighted) ...................... 124
N (Spot)............................................... 124
t (Highlight-weighted) ............... 124
R (Info) button................... 55, 72, 203
a (Live view) ..............37, 59, 169, 270
Q (Help) ...................................................25
t (Memory buffer) ..................115, 362
i button.............. 45, 65, 200, 208, 228
D switch ..........................................6, 270
I (Focus indicator)..........33, 108, 112
L (Preset manual) ...............157, 165
1 : 1 (24 × 24) ........................................ 84
1.2× (30 × 20)........................................ 84
12-bit ....................................................... 90
14-bit ....................................................... 90
3D color matrix metering III ..........124
3D-tracking ......................101, 102, 260
3D-tracking face-detection ...........260
3D-tracking watch area ..................261
5 : 4 (30 × 24) ........................................ 84
A
AC adapter ..........................................295
Accessories..........................................295
Accessory shoe ........................ 187, 295
Active D-Lighting..... 45, 65, 152, 180,
253, 258
Add items (My Menu)......................280
ADL bracketing (Auto bracketing
set).............................................. 142, 152
Adobe RGB ..........................................253
AE & flash bracketing (Auto
bracketing set) .................................142
AE bracketing (Auto bracketing set)
142
AF...................41–43, 94–110, 260–262
AF activation.......................................261
AF area brackets................................ 7, 9
AF fine-tune ........................................272
AF-area mode.................... 42, 100, 261
AF-C ................................................98, 260
AF-F.......................................................... 41
AF-ON button....................... 99, 261, 268
AF-S..........................................41, 98, 260
After burst, show...............................249
After delete .........................................249
Airplane mode ...................................275
367
Angle of view..................................... 286
Aperture .................. 130, 131, 136, 268
Aperture lock............................ 136, 268
Aperture-priority auto.................... 130
Aspect ratio ....................................68, 84
Assign MB-D18 buttons................. 270
Assign remote (WR) Fn button.... 274
Attaching the lens ..............................19
Attenuator ................................... 65, 259
Audio .......................................................61
Audio output ..................................... 345
Auto (Set Picture Control)............. 175
Auto (White balance)............. 156, 159
Auto bracketing..............142, 254, 267
Auto bracketing (mode M) ........... 267
Auto bracketing set................ 142, 254
Auto distortion control .................. 253
Auto DX crop ........................................84
Auto external flash ................. 190, 198
Auto FP high-speed sync .............. 266
Auto image rotation ....................... 249
Auto ISO sensitivity control. 121, 257
Auto M ISO sensitivity control ...... 267
Auto-area AF............................. 101, 103
Autofocus... 41–43, 94–110, 260–262
Autofocus mode................. 41, 98, 262
Autofocus mode restrictions ....... 262
B
Backlight................................................... 6
Backup (Secondary slot function) .93
Battery.................... 14, 16, 30, 276, 347
Battery info......................................... 276
Battery order...................................... 276
Battery pack ..114, 270, 276, 295, 299
Beep options...................................... 274
BKT button.....143, 144, 148, 149, 152,
153, 186, 268
Black-and-white (Monochrome) 279
Blocked shot AF response............. 260
Bluetooth ......................................xx, 275
368
Body cap ..............................................295
Bracketing ........................142, 254, 267
Bracketing order ...............................267
Bulb........................................................133
Burst ............................................ 249, 264
Button backlights ........................ 6, 265
C
Camera Control Pro 2......................296
Capture NX-D .......................................... ii
Center-weighted metering . 124, 263
Charging the battery......................... 14
Choose color temp. (White balance) .
157, 163
Choose start/end point .................... 78
Choose tab ..........................................280
CL mode shooting speed...............264
Clean image sensor................ 272, 312
Clock........................................................ 23
Cloudy (White balance) ..................157
CLS .........................................................288
Color space .........................................253
Color temperature156, 157, 160, 163
Compatible lenses............................281
Compressed (NEF (RAW)
compression)...................................... 90
Conformity marking .............. 276, 349
Connect to smart device................275
Connector for external microphone .
2
Continuous high speed..................113
Continuous low speed.......... 113, 264
Continuous release mode .............113
Continuous-servo AF................98, 260
Control panel ..........................................5
Copy image(s) ....................................249
Copyright information....................273
CPU contacts ......................................284
CPU lens .............................. 20, 281, 284
Creative Lighting System...............288
Crop ......................................................... 68
Custom control assignment 268, 270
Custom Settings ............................... 260
Custom settings bank..................... 260
Customize command dials ........... 269
Cyanotype (Monochrome) ........... 279
D
Date and time............................. 23, 271
Date format ................................. 23, 271
Daylight saving time ................ 23, 271
DCF ........................................................ 349
Default settings.............. 209, 256, 277
Delete ............................................ 36, 245
Delete all images .............................. 246
Delete current image............... 36, 245
Depth of field..................................... 127
Destination ......................................... 256
Diopter .............................................9, 295
Direct sunlight (White balance) .. 157
Distance-priority manual.....190, 199,
288
Distortion control............................. 278
D-Lighting........................................... 278
DX (24 × 16)....................................84, 87
DX format..........................68, 83, 84, 85
Dynamic-area AF ........... 100, 103, 262
E
Easy exposure compensation...... 263
Electronic front-curtain shutter ....45,
265
Electronic rangefinder.................... 112
Electronic VR ............................... 66, 259
EV steps for exposure cntrl ........... 262
Exif ......................................................... 349
Exp./flash comp. step value.......... 262
Exposure........ 124, 126, 137, 139, 262
Exposure bracketing ... 142, 143, 254,
267
Exposure comp. for flash ............... 266
Exposure compensation.......139, 263
Exposure delay mode......................264
Exposure differential .......................184
Exposure indicator ...........................132
Exposure lock .....................................137
Exposure meters ........................34, 263
Exposure mode..................................126
Exposure preview ............................... 39
Extended photo menu banks.......250
External GPS device options221, 274
External microphone................67, 296
Eye-Fi upload......................................276
F
Face detection ......................... 260, 263
Face-priority AF ................................... 42
File information .................................230
File naming ............................... 250, 256
File number sequence ....................265
Filter effects .............................. 179, 279
Fine-tune optimal exposure .........263
Firmware version ..............................277
Flash....... 187, 192, 194, 196, 266, 288
Flash (White balance)......................157
Flash bracketing... 142, 143, 254, 267
Flash bracketing (Auto bracketing
set)........................................................142
Flash compensation.........................194
Flash control ....................189, 190, 251
Flash info..............................................198
Flash mode................................ 192, 193
Flash shutter speed..........................266
Flash sync speed ...............................266
Flash sync terminal...........................188
Flash-ready indicator...187, 197, 292,
342
Flat (Set Picture Control) ................175
Flexible program...............................128
Flick.................................................12, 274
Flicker reduction ..................... 254, 258
Fluorescent (White balance).........157
Fn1 button.................................. 268, 270
369
Fn2 button .........................242, 268, 270
f-number .................................... 130, 284
Focal length ....................................... 220
Focal length scale ............................ 351
Focal plane mark.............................. 112
Focus .... 41–43, 44, 94–112, 260–262
Focus indicator .................33, 108, 112
Focus lock ........................................... 108
Focus mode.......................... 41, 94, 111
Focus point.32, 42, 94, 100, 105, 261,
262
Focus point options ........................ 262
Focus point wrap-around ............. 262
Focus shift shooting........................ 212
Focus tracking............................ 99, 260
Focus tracking with lock-on......... 260
Focusing screen................................ 338
Focus-mode selector ........ 41, 94, 111
Focus-mode switch ......................... 111
Format.................................................. 271
Format memory card...................... 271
Frame interval (Slide show).......... 249
Frame rate.................................... 69, 114
Frame size/frame rate.............. 69, 256
Frequency response................. 65, 259
Front-curtain sync............................ 192
Full-frame playback......................... 223
Full-frame playback flicks.............. 274
Full-time-servo AF...............................41
FV lock.................................................. 196
FX (36 × 24)............................................84
FX format ...............................................84
G
GPS ........................................................ 221
GPS unit ......................................221, 296
Group-area AF..........................101, 103
H
H.264..................................................... 343
HDMI............................................274, 349
370
HDR (high dynamic range)............182
Headphone volume........................... 66
Headphones ......................................... 67
Help ......................................................... 25
Hi.............................................................120
Hide image..........................................248
High definition...................................349
High Dynamic Range (HDR) 182, 254
High ISO NR .............................. 253, 258
Highlight brightness .......................270
Highlight display................................. 66
Highlights............................................231
Highlight-weighted metering......124
Histogram.................... 55, 72, 232, 233
I
Image area 45, 65, 83, 84, 86, 91, 251,
256
Image comment................................273
Image Dust Off ref photo...............273
Image overlay ....................................279
Image quality ..............................88, 251
Image review............................ 225, 249
Image size.....................................91, 251
Incandescent (White balance) .....156
Index marking...................................... 64
In-focus indicator............. 33, 108, 112
Information display. 55, 72, 198, 203,
272
Interval timer shooting...................255
ISO display...........................................264
ISO sensitivity.........119, 121, 252, 257
ISO sensitivity settings.......... 252, 257
ISO sensitivity step value ...............262
i-TTL ...........................189, 190, 198, 288
J
JPEG.........................................88, 92, 278
JPEG basic.............................................. 88
JPEG fine ................................................ 88
JPEG normal.......................................... 88
L
L (large).............................................74, 91
Landscape (Set Picture Control) . 175
Language ..................................... 21, 271
LCD illumination...........................6, 265
LED lamp ............................................. 274
Lens .............19, 20, 218, 272, 281, 351
Lens focus ring ..................44, 111, 351
Lens mount .............................3, 19, 112
Lens mounting mark..................... 2, 19
Lens vibration reduction switch . 355
Limit AF-area mode selection...... 261
LINK mode .......................................... 274
Live view..........................................37, 59
Live view button options .............. 270
Live view in continuous mode .... 266
Live view photography ............. 37–58
Live view selector.........................37, 59
Lo ........................................................... 120
Location data..................................... 221
Lock mirror up for cleaning .272, 315
Long exposure NR............................ 253
Lossless compressed (NEF (RAW)
compression) ......................................90
M
M (Manual focus)........................ 44, 111
M (medium).....................................74, 91
Manage Picture Control........252, 258
Manual (Exposure mode) .............. 131
Manual (Flash control)...........191, 199
Manual focus............................... 44, 111
Manual focus ring in AF mode .... 262
Matrix metering .......................124, 263
Max. continuous release................ 264
Maximum aperture..44, 54, 218, 284,
292
Maximum sensitivity..............122, 257
MB-D18 battery type....................... 276
Memory buffer .................................. 115
Memory card .............. 16, 93, 271, 360
Memory card capacity.....................362
Menu Guide .............................................. i
Metering...............................................124
Microphone ............1, 65, 67, 258, 296
Microphone sensitivity ............65, 258
Minimum aperture ....................20, 127
Minimum shutter speed.................122
Mired .....................................................162
Mirror..................................114, 118, 315
Mirror up mode ....................... 114, 118
Modeling flash ......................... 127, 267
Monitor10, 12, 37, 223, 264, 271, 272
Monitor brightness ............45, 66, 271
Monitor color balance.....................272
Monitor off delay ..............................264
Monochrome............................ 175, 279
Mounting mark...........................19, 351
Movie file type ...................................257
Movie mode....................... 59, 256, 270
Movie quality...............................69, 257
Movie shooting menu.....................256
Movie-record button................61, 268
Multi selector..................... 25, 268, 269
Multi selector center button.........268
Multi selector exposure comp. ...... 66
Multiple exposure.............................254
Multi-power battery pack... 270, 276,
295, 299
Multi-selector power aperture....... 66
My Menu ..............................................280
N
Natural light auto (White balance) ....
156
NEF (RAW).......................88, 90, 92, 278
NEF (RAW) bit depth.......................... 90
NEF (RAW) compression................... 90
NEF (RAW) processing.....................278
NEF (RAW) recording................90, 252
Negative digitizer ............................... 52
371
Network............................................... 275
Neutral (Set Picture Control)........ 175
Non-CPU lens...................218, 282, 284
Non-CPU lens data.........218, 219, 272
Normal-area AF....................................42
Number of focus points................. 261
Quiet continuous shutter-release ......
113
Quiet shutter-release ......................113
O
R
Optical VR ........................................... 266
Overflow (Secondary slot function) ..
93
Overview data ................................... 237
Rank items (My Menu) ....................280
Rating....................................................241
RAW primary - JPEG secondary
(Secondary slot function)............... 93
Rear-curtain sync ..............................192
Recent settings..................................280
Rechargeable Li-ion batteryii, 14, 30,
347
Red-eye correction...........................278
Red-eye reduction............................192
Release button to use dial.............269
Release mode.....................................113
Remote cord...................... 75, 133, 296
Remove items (My Menu)..............280
Removing the lens from the camera .
20
Repeating flash........................ 191, 199
Reset...................................209, 256, 277
Reset all settings ...............................277
Reset movie shooting menu ........256
Resize ....................................................278
Restoring default settings .. 209, 256,
277
Retouch menu ...................................278
Reverse indicators ............................269
RGB ....................................... 88, 232, 253
RGB Histogram ..................................232
Rotate tall ............................................249
P
Peaking highlight color ................. 265
Peaking level..................................47, 67
Perspective control ......................... 279
Photo information ..................229, 248
Photo live view display WB..............46
Photo shooting menu .................... 250
Photo shooting menu bank ......... 250
PictBridge............................................ 349
Picture Controls ................................ 175
Pinpoint AF............................................42
Playback ................................ 35, 76, 223
Playback display options............... 248
Playback folder ................................. 248
Playback information............. 229, 248
Playback menu.................................. 248
Playback zoom.................................. 238
Portrait (Set Picture Control)........ 175
Power aperture ....................................66
Power connector.............................. 295
Predictive focus tracking..................99
Preset manual (White balance).. 157,
165
Press the shutter-release button
halfway..................................................33
Primary slot selection .............. 93, 250
Programmed auto ........................... 128
Protecting photographs................ 240
372
Pv button...........44, 127, 267, 268, 270
Q
S
S (small)............................................ 74, 91
Save current frame...................... 78, 82
Save/load settings............................277
SD memory card................. 16, 93, 361
Secondary slot function.......... 93, 250
Select to send to smart device .... 249
Self-timer.......................... 113, 116, 264
Send to smart device (auto) ......... 275
Sensitivity................119, 121, 252, 257
Set clock from satellite ................... 221
Set Picture Control........ 175, 252, 257
Setup menu........................................ 271
Shade (White balance) ................... 157
Shooting data.................................... 234
Shutter speed ................. 129, 131, 136
Shutter speed lock..................136, 268
Shutter-priority auto ....................... 129
Shutter-release button..33, 108, 137,
270
Shutter-release button AE-L......... 263
Side-by-side comparison............... 279
Silent live view photography 49, 255
Single frame ....................................... 113
Single-point AF ........................100, 103
Single-servo AF ................... 41, 98, 260
Size .......................................... 74, 91, 278
Skylight ................................................ 279
Slide show........................................... 249
Slot.........................................93, 224, 256
Slot empty release lock .................. 276
Slot selection .............................. 93, 224
Slow sync............................................. 192
Slow-motion movie.....................69, 70
Slow-motion playback ......................76
Smart device ................... 222, 249, 275
Smoothing.......................................... 184
Speedlights................................187, 288
Split-screen display zoom .........46, 48
Spot ....................................................... 124
Spot white balance.......................... 169
sRGB ...................................................... 253
Standard (Set Picture Control)..... 175
Standard i-TTL fill-flash for digital
SLR ..............................................189, 288
Standby timer ................... 34, 221, 263
Storage folder ....................................250
Store by orientation.........................261
Straighten............................................278
Sub-dial frame advance..................269
Subject motion ..................................260
Sub-selector..106, 108, 137, 268, 270
Sync with smart device...................271
Sync. release mode options..........264
Synchronized release ......................264
T
Ten-pin remote terminal..2, 221, 296
Text entry.............................................273
Thumbnail ...........................................223
TIFF (RGB)........................................ 88, 92
Tilting monitor..................................... 10
Time................................................23, 271
Time zone .....................................22, 271
Time zone and date ..................22, 271
Time-lapse movie .............................259
Timer .....................................................116
Toning (Set Picture Control) .........179
Touch controls .................. 12, 226, 274
Touch screen ........................12, 56, 226
Touch shutter....................................... 56
Trim........................................................278
Trim movie ...................................78, 279
Two-button reset ..............................209
Type D lens................................ 281, 284
Type E lens................................. 281, 284
Type G lens................................ 281, 284
U
Uncompressed (NEF (RAW)
compression)...................................... 90
USB cable ..................................................ii
UTC..................................................22, 222
V
Vibration reduction 66, 259, 266, 355
373
Viewfinder ................................. 7, 9, 338
Viewfinder eyepiece ...................9, 116
Viewfinder focus...........................9, 295
Viewfinder grid display .................. 265
Viewfinder mask display...................85
ViewNX-i....................................................ii
Vignette control ............................... 253
Virtual horizon..................... 55, 72, 272
Vivid (Set Picture Control)............. 175
Volume control ................................. 228
W
Warm filter.......................................... 279
WB.............................. 148, 156, 252, 257
WB bracketing (Auto bracketing set)
142, 148
White balance ....... 148, 156, 252, 257
White balance bracketing.... 142, 148
Wide-area AF ........................................42
Wi-Fi ................................................xx, 275
Wind noise reduction .............. 66, 259
Wireless remote (WR) options ..... 274
Wireless remote controller ... 75, 274,
295
Wireless transmitter ........................ 295
X
XQD card ............................... 16, 93, 360
374
No reproduction in any form of this manual, in whole or in part (except
for brief quotation in critical articles or reviews), may be made without
written authorization from NIKON CORPORATION.
DIGITAL CAMERA
User's Manual
Printed in Thailand
En
6MB40211-04
• Read this manual thoroughly before using the camera.
• To ensure proper use of the camera, be sure to read
“For Your Safety” (page x).
• After reading this manual, keep it in a readily accessible
place for future reference.
En
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising